Owners Manual

Published on December 2016 | Categories: Documents | Downloads: 84 | Comments: 0 | Views: 908
of 254
Download PDF   Embed   Report

Soda Octavia/Laura Owners Manual

Comments

Content

www.skoda-auto.com
You also can do something for the environment!
The fuel consumption of your ŠKODA and the related pollutant
emissions are determined crucially on how you drive.
The noise and the wear of the vehicle depend on the way how
you deal with your vehicle.
This Owner's Manual shows you how to use your ŠKODA vehicle with utmost care for the environment while driving economically at the same time.
Also please pay attention to those parts in the Owner's Manual
that are marked  below.
Work with us – for the sake of the environment.

Návod k obsluze
Octavia, Laura anglicky – Indie/Nepál 11.2011
S64.5610.09.91
1Z0 012 003 RA

ŠKODA Laura anglicky – Indie/Nepál 11.2011

S64.5610.09.91

SIMPLY CLEVER

ŠKODA Laura
OWNER'S MANUAL

Introduction
You have opted for a ŠKODA – our sincere thanks for your confidence in us.
Your new ŠKODA offers you a vehicle featuring the most modern engineering and a wide range of equipment
which you will undoubtedly wish to use to the full during your daily motoring. That is why, we recommend
that you read this Owner's Manual attentively to enable you to become familiar with your car and all that it
offers as quickly as possible.
Please do not hesitate to contact your specialist garage or importer should you have any further questions or
any problems regarding your vehicle which may arise. He will be ready at any time to receive your questions,
suggestions and criticisms.
National legal provisions, which deviate from the information contained in these operating instructions, take
precedence over the information contained in the operating instructions.
We wish you much pleasure with your ŠKODA and pleasant motoring at all times.
Your ŠKODA AUTO a.s. (hereinafter ŠKODA)

£

2

Introduction

On-board literature
The on-board literature for your vehicle consists of this “Owner's Manual” as well as a “Service schedule” and a “Help on the road”. There can
also be a variety of other additional operating manuals and instructions
on-board (e.g. an operating manual for the radio) depending on the vehicle model and equipment.
If one of the publications listed above is missing, please contact an authorised ŠKODA dealer immediately, where one will be glad to assist
you in such matters.
One should note that the details given in the vehicle's technical documentation always take precedence over those in the Owner's Manual.
Owner's Manual
This Owner's manual describes all possible equipment variants without
identifying them as special equipment, model variants or market-dependent equipment.
Consequently, this vehicle does not need to contain all of the equipment components described in this Owner's manual.
The scope of equipment for your vehicle is described in the sales documentation you were given when purchasing the car. For more information, contact your local ŠKODA retailer.
The illustrations can differ in minor details from your vehicle; they are
only intended for general information.
In addition to information regarding all the controls and equipment, the
Owner's Manual also contains important information regarding care and
operation for your safety and also to retain the value of your vehicle. To
provide you with valuable tips and aids. You will learn how you can operate your vehicle safely, economically and in an environmentally conscious way.
For safety reasons, please also pay attention to the information on accessories, modifications and replacement of parts ⇒ page 198.

The other chapters of the Owner's Manual are also important, however,
for proper treatment of your car - in addition to regular care and maintenance - helps to retain its value and in many cases is also one of the
conditions for possible warranty claims.
The Service schedule
contains:







Vehicle data,
Service intervals,
Overview of the service work,
Service proof,
Confirmation of mobility warranty (only valid in certain countries),
important information on the warranty.

The confirmations of the carried out service work are one of the conditions for possible warranty claims.
Please always present the Service schedule when you take your car to
an authorised ŠKODA Service Partner.
If the Service schedule is missing or worn, please contact your authorised ŠKODA Service Partner, where your car is serviced regularly. You
will receive a duplicate, in which the previously carried out service work
are confirmed.
Help on the road
Contains the most important telephone numbers in individual countries
as well as the addresses and telephone numbers of ŠKODA importers.

Table of Contents

3

Table of Contents
Layout of this Owner's Manual
(explanations) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6

Using the system

..........................

9

Cockpit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9
8

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Instruments and warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview of the instrument cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine revolutions counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Coolant temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Counter for distance driven . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Service reminder indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Digital clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shift recommendation for changing gears . . . . . . . . . . .
Multi-functional indicator (onboard computer) . . . . . . .
MAXI DOT display (information display) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Auto Check Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Unlocking and locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vehicle key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Child safety lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Central locking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Anti-theft alarm system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electric sliding/tilting roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Lights and Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Interior lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windshield wiper and wash system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear-view mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Using the system

Safety

Seats and Stowage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10
10
10
11
11
11
11
12
12
13
13
14
17
19
21
31
31
32
33
37
38
39
42
45
45
51
53
54
58

Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adjusting front seats electrically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Middle rear head restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seat heaters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Net partition (Estate) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The roof rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cup holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Note holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cigarette lighter, power sockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Storage compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Heating and air conditioning system . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description and information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the air conditioning system economically . . . . .
Operational problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Air outlet vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Air conditioning system (manual air conditioning
system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Climatronic (automatic air conditioning) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Auxiliary heating (auxiliary heating and ventilation) . .

Starting-off and Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting steering wheel position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ignition lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Switching off the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shifting (manual gearbox) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Handbrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front and rear parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cruise control system (CCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
“(START-STOP)” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Driving Tips

General Maintenance

61
61
62
64
65
65
67
67
72
74
75
76
76
77
78
86
86
86
86
86
87
88
89
92
95
99
99
99
100
101
102
102
102
103
104
105
106

Automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Information for driving with the 6-speed automatic
gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Information for driving with the automatic gearbox
DSG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selector lever positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selector lever lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Kickdown function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dynamic shift programme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tiptronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manual shifting on the multifunction steering wheel .
Emergency programme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selector lever-emergency unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multifunction steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mobile phones and two-way radio systems . . . . . . . . . .
Universal telephone preinstallation GSM II . . . . . . . . . .
Voice control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Universal telephone preinstallation GSM IIl . . . . . . . . . .
Voice control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Internet connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Music playback via Bluetooth® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multimedia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Safety

109
109
109
111
112
112
112
113
113
114
114
115
115
116
117
122
123
129
130
130
130

...........................................

132

Passive Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

132
132
133

Basic information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Correct seated position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Why seat belts? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The physical principle of a frontal collision . . . . . . . . . .
Important safety information regarding the use of
seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How are seat belts correctly fastened? . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description of the airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Side airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Breakdown assistance

Technical data

136
136
136
137
138
140
140
141
143

4

Table of Contents
Head airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deactivating an airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

145
146

General Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Transporting children safely . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

148
148
150
153
154

Taking care of your vehicle and cleaning the
vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

What you should know about transporting children! .
Child seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Attaching a child seat using the “ISOFIX” system . . . .
Attaching child seat using the “Top Tether” system . .

General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Care of the exterior of vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Care of the interior of vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Driving Tips

...................................

155

Intelligent Technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

155
155
155
158
159
159
159
160
160
160
161

General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electronic stability programme (ESP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brake booster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Antilock brake system (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brake Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Uphill Start Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electromechanical power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tyre pressure monitoring system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diesel particle filter (diesel engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Driving and the Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The first 1 500 kilometres and afterwards . . . . . . . . . . .
Catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Driving in an economical and environmentally
conscious manner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Environmental compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motoring abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Avoiding damage to your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Driving through bodies of water on roads . . . . . . . . . . .

Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Driving Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

162
162
162
163
166
167
167
167
169
169
169
170

Petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Biofuel Ethanol E85 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Inspecting and Replenishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windshield washer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Wheels and Tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Accessories, changes and replacement of parts .

171

171
171
171
175
177
177
178
179
179
181
181
183
185
187
188
191
193
193

General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

198
198

Breakdown assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

199

Breakdown assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
First-aid box and Warning triangle (Laura) . . . . . . . . . . .
First-aid box and warning triangle (Estate car) . . . . . . .
Fire extinguisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vehicle tool kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tyre repair kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Jump-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Fuses and light bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electric fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

199
199
199
199
200
200
201
205
207
209
212
212
215

Technical data

...............................

222

Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

222
222
222
222
222
223

General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Used abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Performances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Identification details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel consumption according to the ECE standards and
EU guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine oil specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine 1.2 l/77 kW TSI - EU5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine 1.4 l/59 kW - EU4, EU5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine 1.4 l/90 kW TSI - EU5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine 1.6 l/75 kW - EU2, EU4, EU5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine 1.8 l/112 kW TSI - EU5, EU2 DDK . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine 1.8 l/118 kW TSI - EU5, EU2 DDK . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine 2.0 l/147 kW TSI - EU5, EU2 DDK . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine 1.6 l/77 kW TDI CR - EU5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine 1.9 l/77 kW TDI PD - EU4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine 2.0 l/81 kW TDI CR - EU4, EU5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine 2.0 l/103 kW TDI CR - EU4, EU5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine 2.0 l/125 kW TDI CR - EU5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multi-purpose vehicles (AF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

223
224
225
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239

240

Table of Contents

Using the system

Safety

Driving Tips

General Maintenance

Breakdown assistance

Technical data

5

6

Layout of this Owner's Manual (explanations)

Layout of this Owner's Manual (explanations)
The Owner's Manual has been systematically designed, in order to make it easy
for you to find and absorb the information you require.

Chapters, table of contents and subject index
The text of the Owner's manual is divided into relatively short sections which are
combined into easy-to-read chapters. The chapter you are reading at any particular moment is always highlighted at the bottom right of the page.
The Table of contents is arranged according to the chapters and the detailed Subject index at the end of the Owner's Manual helps you to rapidly find the information you are looking for.

Sections
The majority of Sections apply to all models.
Since there is a wide range of different equipment and options available it is clearly unavoidable, despite dividing the contents into sections, that mention may be
made of equipment which is not fitted to your vehicle.

Brief information and instructions
Each section has a Heading.
This is followed by Brief information (in large italic lettering), which tells you the
subject which is dealt with in this section.
Most of the illustrations are accompanied by an Instruction (in large letters) which
explains to you in a straightforward way the action you have to take. Work steps
which have to be carried out begin with a hyphen.

Direction indications
All direction indications such as “left”, “right”, “front”, “rear” relate to the direction
of travel of the vehicle.

Explanation of symbols
 End of a section.
£ The section is continued on the next page.

Notes
All four kinds of notes, which are used in the text, are always stated at the end of
the respective section.

WARNING
The most important notes are marked with the heading WARNING. These
WARNING notes draw your attention to a serious risk of accident or injury.
While reading the text you will frequently encounter a double arrow followed
by a small triangle with an exclamation mark. This symbol is intended to draw
your attention to a WARNING note at the end of the section to which you must
pay careful attention.

CAUTION
A Caution note draws your attention to the possibility of damage to your vehicle
(e.g. damage to gearbox), or points out general risks of an accident.

For the sake of the environment
An Environmental note draws your attention to environmental protection aspects. This is where you will, for example, find tips aimed at reducing your fuel
consumption.

Notice
A normal Note draws your attention in a general way to important information for
the operation of your vehicle.



Layout of this Owner's Manual (explanations)

Using the system

Safety

Driving Tips

General Maintenance

Breakdown assistance

Technical data

7

8

Cockpit

Fig. 1 Cockpit

Cockpit

9

Using the system
Cockpit
Overview

18
19

This overview will help you to quickly familiarise yourself with the
displays and the control elements.

20
21

1
2
3
4

5

6
7

8
9
10
11
12

13
14
15
16
17

Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electric exterior mirror adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Air outlet vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lever for the multi-functional switch:
– Turn signal light, headlight and parking light, headlight flasher . .
– Speed regulating system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Steering wheel:
– with horn
– with driver airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
– with controls for radio, radio navigation system and phone . . . . . .
Instrument cluster: Instruments and indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lever for the multi-functional switch:
– Multi-functional indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
– Windshield wiper and wash system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control dial for heating on the driver's seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Air outlet vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Switch for hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Storage compartment on the dash panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Depending on equipment fitted:
– Radio
– Radio navigation system
Control dial for heating on the front passenger seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Storage compartment on the front passenger side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Switch for the front passenger airbag (in front passenger storage
compartment) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front passenger airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuse box (on side of dash panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Using the system

Safety

Driving Tips

39
58
87

22
23
24

51
105
25
26

141
115
10

27

28

14
54
67
87
50
80

67
79

29

30

Light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control dial for the instrument lighting and control dial for the
headlight beam range regulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Release lever engine compartment lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Storage compartment on the driver's side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lever for adjusting the steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ignition lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Depending on equipment fitted:
– Operating controls for the heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
– Operating controls for the air conditioning system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
– Operating controls for Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TCS switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front and rear parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Depending on equipment fitted:
– Gearshift lever (manual gearbox) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
– Selector lever (automatic gearbox) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tyre pressure monitoring system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Depending on equipment fitted:
– Ashtrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
– Storage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Indicator light for a switched off front seat passenger airbag . . . . . . .

45
49, 50
181
79
99
99
88
89
92
157
104
102
111
160
76
80
147

Notice
● Vehicles with a factory-fitted radio or radio navigation system are supplied
with separate instructions for operating such equipment.
● The arrangement of the controls and switches and the location of some items
on right-hand drive models may differ from that shown in ⇒ fig. 1 . The symbols on
the controls and switches are the same as for left-hand drive models.

147
141
212
General Maintenance

Breakdown assistance

Technical data



10

Instruments and warning lights

Instruments and warning lights
General information
WARNING
● Concentrate fully at all times on your steering! As the driver you are fully
responsible for road safety.
● Operate the controls in the instrument cluster never while driving, but only
when the vehicle is stationary!



Overview of the instrument cluster

Fig. 2 Instrument cluster

1
2
3
4

Engine revolutions counter ⇒ page 11
Speedometer ⇒ page 11
Coolant temperature gauge ⇒ page 11
Display
– with counter for distance driven ⇒ page 12
– with Service Interval Display ⇒ page 12
– with digital clock ⇒ page 13

5

– with Multi-functional display ⇒ page 14
– with Information display⇒ page 17
Button for the selection of the mode (turn button)/the setting (press button):
– Set hours/minutes
£
– Activating/deactivating the second speed in mph or km/h

Instruments and warning lights

6

– Service interval - Display of the remaining number of days, kilometres or
miles to the next Inspection Service/Reset 1)
– Reset trip counter for distance driven
– Resetting Service Interval Display
– Activate/deactivate display mode
Fuel gauge ⇒ page 11

Please pay attention to the following guidelines regarding temperature ranges in
order to avoid damage to the engine:



The red zone of the rev counter scale 1 ⇒ fig. 2 indicates the range in which the
engine control unit begins to limit the engine speed. The engine control unit restricts the engine speed to a steady limit value.

If the symbol  in the instrument cluster flashes it means that either the coolant
temperature is too high or the coolant level is too low. Please refer to the guidelines ⇒ page 25, Coolant temperature/ Coolant quantity .

Shift into the next higher gear or select the selector lever position D of the automatic gearbox before reaching the red zone of the rev counter scale.
Avoid high engine speeds during the driving time and before the engine has been
warmed up to operating temperature ⇒ page 162.

WARNING
Pay attention to the warning notes ⇒ page 182, Working in the engine compartment before opening the bonnet and inspecting the coolant level.

For the sake of the environment


Speedometer
Warning against excessive speeds
An acoustic warning signal will sound when the vehicle speed exceeds 120 kilometres per hour. The acoustic warning signal will switch off again when the vehicle speed goes below this speed limit.

Coolant temperature gauge
The coolant temperature gauge 3 ⇒ fig. 2 operates only when the ignition is
switched on.

1)

Valid for countries where the values are indicated in British measuring units.

2)

Valid for Laura Combi 4x4 and Laura Scout.

Using the system

Safety

Driving Tips

Cold range
If the pointer is in the left-hand area of the scale it means that the engine has not
yet reached its operating temperature. Avoid running at high engine speeds, at
full throttle and at severe engine loads.
The operating range
The engine has reached its operating temperature as soon as the pointer moves
into the mid-range of the scale. The pointer may also move further to the right at
high engine loads and high outside temperatures. This is not critical provided the
warning symbol  in the instrument cluster does not flash.

Engine revolutions counter

Shifting to a higher gear in good time helps to reduce the fuel consumption, minimises operating noise levels, protects the environment and contributes to a longer life and reliability of the engine.

11

CAUTION
Additional headlights and other attached components in front of the fresh air inlet
impair the cooling efficiency of the coolant. There is then a risk of the engine

overheating at high outside temperatures and high engine loads!

Fuel gauge


The fuel gauge 6 ⇒ fig. 2 only operates when the ignition is switched on.
The fuel tank has a capacity of about 55 litres or 60 litres 2). The warning symbol 
in the instrument cluster lights up when the pointer reaches the reserve marking.
There are now about 9 litres of fuel remaining in the tank. This symbol is a reminder for you, that you must refuel.
The following is displayed in the information display:

General Maintenance

Breakdown assistance

£

Technical data

12

Instruments and warning lights
Please refuel! (Please refuel!)

An audible signal sounds as an additional warning signal.

CAUTION
Never run the fuel tank completely empty! An irregular supply of fuel can lead to
irregular engine running. Unburnt fuel may get into the exhaust system and damage the catalytic converter.

Notice
If vehicles which are fitted with the information display the display of the second
speed is activated in mph or km/h, this driving speed is indicated instead of the
counter for the total distance driven.



Service reminder indicator

Notice
After filling up, it can occur that during dynamic driving (e.g. numerous curves,
braking, driving downhill and climbing a steep hill) the fuel gauge indicates approx. a fraction less. When stopping or during less dynamic driving, the correct fuel

supply quantity is indicated. This effect is not a fault.

Counter for distance driven
The distance which you have driven with your vehicle is shown in kilometres (km).
In some countries the measuring unit “mile” is used.
Reset button
If you hold the reset button 5 ⇒ fig. 2 pressed for about 1 second, the trip counter is set back to zero.
Trip counter for distance driven
The trip counter indicates the distance which you have driven since this counter
was last reset - in steps of 100 metres or 1/10 of a mile.
Counter for distance driven
The counter for distance driven indicates the total distance in kilometers or miles
which the vehicle has been driven.
Fault display
If there is a fault in the instrument cluster Error will appear continuously in the
display. Have the fault rectified as soon as possible by a specialist workshop.

WARNING
Never seek to adjust the trip counter for distance driven while driving for
safety reasons!

Fig. 3 Service Interval Display: Note

Depending on the equipment installed in the vehicle, the text can differ on the
display.
Service Interval Display
Before the next service interval a key symbol  and the remaining kilometres are
indicated after switching on the ignition ⇒ fig. 3 . At the same time, a display appears regarding the remaining days until the next service interval.
The following is displayed in the information display:
Service after ... km or... days. (Service after ... km or ... days.)
The kilometre indicator or the days indicator reduces in steps of 100 km. or days
until the service due date is reached.
A flashing key symbol  and the text Service appears in the display for 20 seconds as soon as the due date for the service is reached.
The following is displayed in the information display:
Service now! (Service now!)
Display regarding the distance and days until the following service interval
You can use the button 5 to display the remaining distance driven and the days
until the next service interval ⇒ fig. 2 .

£

Instruments and warning lights
A key symbol  and a display regarding the remaining kilometers appear for 10
second in the display. At the same time, a display appears regarding the remaining
days until the next service interval.
On vehicles which are equipped with an information display, you can call up this
display in the menu Settings ⇒ page 19.
The following will be displayed in the information display for 10 seconds:

13

● The data displayed is the same after resetting the display with flexible service
intervals (QG1) is displayed as that for a vehicle with fixed service intervals (QG2).
We therefore recommend having the Service Interval Display reset only by an authorised ŠKODA Service Partner who is familiar with the procedure for resetting
the display with a vehicle system tester.
● Please refer to the brochure Service schedule for extensive information about
the service intervals.



Service after ... km or... days. (Service after ... km or ... days.)
Resetting Service Interval Display
It is only possible to reset the Service Interval Display, if a service message or at
least a pre-warning is shown on the display of the instrument cluster.

Digital clock

We recommend having this resetting performed by a specialist garage.

Select the information which you wish to change by turning the button 5 and
carry out the change of the selected information by pressing the button.

The specialist garage:
● resets the memory of the display after the appropriate inspection,
● makes an entry in the Service schedule,
● affix the sticker with the entry of the following service interval to the side of
the dash panel on the driver's side.
Reset the service interval displays by using the button 5 ⇒ fig. 2 .
On vehicles which are equipped with an information display, you can call up this
display in the menu Settings ⇒ page 19.

CAUTION

You can set the time with the rotary knob 5 ⇒ fig. 2 .

On vehicles which are fitted with the information display, it is possible to set the
time in the menu Time ⇒ page 19.

WARNING
The clock should not be adjusted while driving for safety reasons but only
when the vehicle is stationary!



Shift recommendation for changing gears

We recommend that you do not reset the Service Interval Display yourself otherwise this can result in the service interval display being incorrectly set, which may
also result in problems with operation of your vehicle.

Notice
● Never reset the display between service intervals otherwise this may result in
incorrect readouts.
● information is retained in the Service Interval Display also after the battery of
the vehicle is disconnected.
● If the instrument cluster is exchanged after a repair, the correct values must
be entered in the counter for the Service Interval Display. This work is carried out
by a specialist garage.

Fig. 4 Shift recommendation for changing gears

An information for the engaged gear A ⇒ fig. 4 is shown in the display of the instrument cluster.
In order to minimise the fuel consumption, a recommendation for shifting into an£
other gear is indicated in the display.

Using the system

Safety

Driving Tips

General Maintenance

Breakdown assistance

Technical data

14

Instruments and warning lights

Memory

If the control unit recognises that it is appropriate to change the gear, an arrow B
is shown in the display. The arrow points up or down, depending on whether it is
recommended to shift into a higher or lower gear.
At the same time, the recommended gear is indicated instead of the currently engaged gear A .



Multi-functional indicator (onboard computer)
Introduction
Fig. 5 Multi-functional indicator

The multi-functional indicator appears in the display ⇒ fig. 5 or in the information
display ⇒ page 17 depending on the equipment fitted to your vehicle.

The multi-functional indicator is equipped with two automatic memories. The selected memory is displayed in the middle of the display field ⇒ fig. 5 .

The multi-functional indicator offers you a range of useful information.
The outside temperature
Driving time
Current fuel consumption
Average fuel consumption
Range
Distance driven
Average speed
Current speed
Oil temperature
Warning against excessive speeds

The data of the single-trip memory (memory 1) is shown if a 1 appears in the display. A 2 shown in the display means that data relates to the total distance memory (memory 2).

⇒ page 15
⇒ page 15

⇒ page 16

Switching over the memory with the help of the button B ⇒ fig. 6 on the windscreen wiper lever or with the help of the button D on the ⇒ fig. 6 multifunction
steering wheel.

⇒ page 16
⇒ page 16
⇒ page 16

Single-trip memory (memory 1)
The single-trip memory collates the driving information from the moment the ignition is switched on until it is switched off. New data will also flow into the calculation of the current driving information if the trip is continued within 2 hours after
switching off the ignition. The memory will be is automatically erased, on the other hand, if the trip is interrupted for more than 2 hours.

⇒ page 16
⇒ page 16
⇒ page 17
⇒ page 17

On vehicles which are fitted out with information display, it is possible to switch
off the display of some information.

Total-trip memory (memory 2)
The total distance driven memory gathers data from any number of individual
journeys up to a total of 19 hours and 59 minutes driving or 1 999 kilometres driven. 99 hours and 59 minutes driving time or 9 999 km driven in vehicles with an
Information display. The memory is deleted when either of these limits is reached
and the calculation starts from anew.

Notice
● In certain national versions the displays appear in the Imperial system of
measures.
● If the display of the second speed is activated in mph, the current speed is not
indicated in km/h on the display.



The total-trip memory will not, contrary to the single-trip memory, be deleted af£
ter a period of interruption of driving of 2 hours.

Instruments and warning lights
Setting function to zero
– Select the memory you want.

Notice
All information in the memory 1 and 2 is erased if the battery of the vehicle is disconnected.

Operating with the buttons on the windshield wiper lever and on
the multifunction steering wheel

15





Press the button B or D for more than 1 second.

The following readouts of the selected memory will be set to zero with the button
B on the windshield wiper lever or with the button D on the multifunction steering wheel:





average fuel consumption,
distance driven,
average speed,
Driving time.

You can only operate the multi-functional indicator when the ignition is switched
on. After the ignition is switched on, the function displayed is the one which you
last selected before switching off the ignition.



Outside temperature
Fig. 6 Multi-functional indicator: Controls on the windshield wiper lever/controls on the multifunction steering wheel

The rocker switch A and the button B are located on the windshield wiper lever
⇒ fig. 6 . Switching over and resetting is performed with the handwheel D on the
multifunction steering wheel.
Selecting the memory
– After briefly pressing the button B on the windshield wiper lever or by briefly
pressing the button D on the multifunction steering wheel, you can select the
desired memory.
Selecting the functions with the help of the windshield wiper lever
– Press the top or bottom rocker switch A for longer than 0.5 seconds. In this
way, call up in sequence the individual functions of the multi-functional indicator.
Selecting the functions with the help of the multifunction steering wheel
– By pressing the button C , you can call up the menu of the multi-functional indicator.


Turn the handwheel D upwards or downwards. In this way, call up in sequence the individual functions of the multi-functional indicator.

Using the system

Safety

Driving Tips

The outside temperature appears in the display when the ignition is switched on.
If the outside temperature drops below +4 °C, a snow flake symbol (warning signal
for ice on the road) appears before the temperature indicator and a warning signal
sounds. After pressing the rocker switch A at the windshield wiper lever ⇒ fig. 6
or the button C at the multifunction steering wheel ⇒ fig. 6 , the function shown
last is indicated.

WARNING
Do not only rely upon the information given on the outside temperature display that there is no ice on the road. Please note that black ice may also be
present on the road surface even at temperatures around +4 °C - warning,
drive with care!



Driving time
The driving time which has elapsed since the memory was last erased, appears in
the display. If you wish to measure the driving time as of a particular time, you
must set the memory to zero at this moment in time by pressing the button B on
the windshield wiper lever ⇒ fig. 6 or the handwheel D on the multifunction
£
steering wheel ⇒ fig. 6 for longer than 1 second.

General Maintenance

Breakdown assistance

Technical data

16

Instruments and warning lights

The maximum distance indicated in both memories is 19 hours and 59 minutes.
99 hours and 59 minutes in vehicles with an Information display. The indicator is
set back to null if this period is exceeded.



If the memory is set to zero (after disconnecting the battery), the fuel consumption of 10 ltr./100 km is calculated for the range; afterwards the value is adapted
accordingly to the style of driving.

Current consumption
The current fuel consumption level is shown in the display in litres/100 km. This
information can help you to adapt your style of driving to the fuel consumption
you wish to achieve.



Average fuel consumption

The average speed since the memory was last erased is shown in the display in
km/hour ⇒ page 14. If you wish to determine the average vehicle speed over a certain period of time you must set the memory to zero at the start of the measurement using the button B on the windshield wiper lever ⇒ fig. 6 or with the handwheel D on the multifunction steering wheel ⇒ fig. 6 .

The indicated value will be updated every 5 seconds while you are driving.

Notice

The estimated range in kilometres is shown on the display. It indicates the distance you can still drive with your vehicle based on the present level of fuel in the
tank for the same style of driving.
The readout is shown in steps of 10 km. After lighting up of the indicator light for
the fuel reserve the display is shown in steps of 5 km.



Average speed

If you wish to determine the average fuel consumption over a certain period of
time you must set the memory to zero at the start of the measurement using the
button B on the windshield wiper lever ⇒ fig. 6 or with the handwheel D on the
multifunction steering wheel ⇒ fig. 6 . A zero appears in the display for the first
100 m you drive after erasing the memory.

Range

The distance driven since the memory was last erased appears in the display
⇒ page 14. If you wish to measure the distance driven of a particular time, you
must set the memory to zero at this moment in time by pressing the button B
⇒ fig. 6 on the windshield wiper lever or the handwheel D on the multifunction
steering wheel ⇒ fig. 6 .
The maximum distance indicated in both memories is 1 999 km or on vehicles with
information display, it is 9 999 km. The indicator is set back to null if this period is
exceeded.

The average fuel consumption since the memory was last erased is shown in the
display in litres/100 km ⇒ page 14. This information can help you to adapt your
style of driving to the fuel consumption you wish to achieve.

The amount of fuel consumed will not be indicated.



Distance driven

The display appears in litres/hour if the vehicle is stationary or driving at a low
speed.
The indicated value will be updated every 0.5 seconds while you are driving.

The fuel consumption for the last 50 km is taken as a basis for calculating the
range. If you drive in a more economical manner from this moment on, the range
will be increased accordingly.



A zero appears in the display for the first approx. 300 m you drive after erasing
the memory.
The indicated value will be updated every 5 seconds while you are driving.



Current speed
The current speed which is identical to the display of the speedometer, is indicated on the display 2 ⇒ fig. 2 .



Instruments and warning lights

Oil temperature
If the oil temperature is lower than 50 °C or if a fault in the system for checking
the oil temperature is present, three lines are displayed instead of the oil temperature.

17

Change or delete speed limit
– With the A button on the multi-function windshield wiper lever or the handwheel D on the multi-function steering wheel, choose the menu point Warning against excessive speeds.




Press the button B on the windshield wiper lever or the handwheel D on the
multifunction steering wheel to delete the speed limit.

Warning against excessive speeds



Adjust the speed limit while the vehicle is stationary
– With the A button on the multi-function steering wheel ⇒ fig. 6 or the handwheel D on the multi-function steering wheel ⇒ fig. 6 , choose the menu
point Warning against excessive speeds.

Press the button B on the windshield wiper lever a second time or the handwheel D on the multifunction steering wheel to activate the speed limit.

If you exceed the set speed limit, an acoustic warning signal will sound as a warning. At the same time the message Warning against excessive speeds appears
with the set limit value.



Choose the B button on the multi-function steering wheel, or the handwheel
D on the multi-function steering wheel, the activate the option for setting
the speed limit (the value flashes).



Use the A button on the windshield wiper lever or the handwheel D on the
multi-function steering wheel to set the required speed limit., e.g. 50 km/h.



Use the B button on the windshield wiper lever or the handwheel D on the
multi-function steering wheel to confirm the required speed limit, or wait
around 5 seconds. The setting saves automatically (the value stops flashing).

This allows you to set the speed in 5 km/h intervals.
Adjust the speed limit while the vehicle is moving
– With the A button on the multi-function windshield wiper lever or the handwheel D on the multi-function steering wheel, choose the menu point Warning against excessive speeds.


You can drive at the desired speed, e.g. 50 km/h



Use the B button on the multi-function steering wheel, or the handwheel D
on the multi-function steering wheel to accept the current speed as the speed
limit (the value flashes).

If you wish to change the speed limit that was set, it is changed in 5 km/h intervals (e.g. the accepted speed of 47 km/h increases to 50 km/h or decreases to 45
km/h).


Press the B button on the windshield wiper lever a second time or the handwheel D on the multi-function steering wheel to confirm the required speed
limit, or wait around 5 seconds. The setting saves automatically (the value
stops flashing).

Using the system

Safety

Driving Tips

The set speed limit remains stored even after switching off the ignition.

WARNING
Concentrate fully at all times on your steering! As the driver you are fully responsible for road safety.



MAXI DOT display (information display)
Introduction
The information display provides you with information in a convenient way concerning the current operating state of your vehicle. The information system also
provides you with data (depending on the equipment installed in the vehicle) relating to the radio, mobile phone, multi-functional indicator, radio navigation system, the unit connected to the MDI input and the automatic gearbox.
Certain functions and operating conditions are always being checked on the vehicle when the ignition is switched on and also while driving.
Functional faults, if required repair work and other information are indicated by
red symbols ⇒ page 19 and yellow symbols ⇒ page 19.
Lighting up of certain symbols is combined with an acoustic warning signal.
Information and texts giving warnings are also shown in the display ⇒ page 21.
The following information can be shown in the display (depending on the equipment installed on the vehicle):

General Maintenance

Breakdown assistance

Technical data

£

18

Instruments and warning lights
⇒ page 18



Audio

Door, luggage compartment door and bonnet ajar
warning

⇒ page 18



Navigation

Service Interval Display

⇒ page 12



Phone ⇒ page 117

Main menu

Selector lever position for an automatic gearbox

⇒ page 109

Main menu



Aux. Heating ⇒ page 95



Assistants ⇒ page 47



Vehicle status ⇒ page 19



Settings ⇒ page 19



The menu point Audio is only then displayed when the factory-fitted car radio is
switched on.
The menu point Navigation is only then displayed when the factory-fitted radio
navigation system is switched on.
The menu point Aux. heating is only then displayed, if the vehicle is factory-fitted
with auxiliary heating.
The menu point Assistants is only then displayed, if the vehicle is fitted with cornering lights.
Fig. 7 Information display: Controls on the windshield wiper lever/controls on the multifunction steering wheel

Operating with the buttons on the windshield wiper lever
– You can activate the Main Menu by pressing the rocker switch A ⇒ fig. 7 for
more than 1 second.


You can select individual menu points by means of the rocker switch A . When
the pushbutton B is briefly pressed, the information you have selected is displayed.

Operating with the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel
– You can activate the Main menu by pressing the rocker switch C ⇒ fig. 7 for
more than 1 second.


By briefly pressing the C button you will reach one level higher.



You can select the individual menus by pressing the handwheel D . After briefly pressing the handwheel D , the desired menu is indicated.

You can select the following information (depending on the equipment installed
on the vehicle):


MFD ⇒ page 14

Notice
● If warning messages are shown in the information display, these messages
can be confirmed with the button B on the windshield wiper lever or with the
button D on the multifunction steering wheel in order to call up the main menu.
● If you do not activate the information display at that moment, the menu shifts
to one level higher every 10 seconds.
● The operation of the factory-fitted car stereo or radio navigation system is described in separate operating instructions to be found in the on-board literature.



Door, luggage compartment door and bonnet ajar warning
The door, luggage compartment and bonnet ajar warning lights up if at least one
door, the luggage compartment or bonnet are not closed. The symbol indicates
which door is still open or whether the luggage compartment door or bonnet is
not closed.
The symbol goes out as soon as the doors, luggage compartment door and bonnet
are completely closed.
A warning signal sounds if the car is driven at a speed of more than 6km/hour and
if the engine or the luggage compartment door is open.



Instruments and warning lights

Auto Check Control




Car state
The Auto Check Control carries out a check of certain functions and vehicle components. The check is performed constantly when the ignition is switched on,
both when the vehicle is stationary, as well as when driving.

Engine oil pressure too low

⇒ page 25

Overheated clutches of the automatic gearbox DSG

⇒ page 29

Three successive warning signals will sound if a red symbol appears.



Yellow symbols

Some operational faults, urgent repairs, service work or other information appear
in the display of the instrument cluster. The displays are shown with a red or yellow light symbol depending on the priority of the message.

A yellow symbol signals a warning.
Check the relevant function as soon as possible.

The red symbols indicate danger (priority 1) while the yellow symbols indicate a
warning (priortity 2). Information for the driver may also appear in addition to the
symbols ⇒ page 21.

The meaning of the yellow symbols:

There is at least one error message when the term Vehicle status is displayed in
the menu. After selecting this menu the first of the error messages is displayed.
Several error messages are shown on the display under the message e.g. 1/3. This
indicates that the first of a total of three error messages is displayed. Investigate
the displayed faults as soon as possible.



Check engine oil level,
engine oil sensor faulty



Problem with engine oil pressure

⇒ page 29

It is also important to have the vehicle inspected
without delay by a specialist garage. The information about the maximum permissible engine speed
is displayed together with this symbol.

As long as the operational faults are not rectified, the symbols are always indicated again. After the first display, the symbols are indicated without information for
the driver.

In certain countries, if a yellow symbol appears one warning signal will sound as
well.

If a fault occurs, a warning signal will also sound in addition to the symbol and
text in the display:

If several operational faults of priority 2 exist, the symbols appear one after the
other and are each illuminated for about 5 seconds.




Priority 1 - three warning signals
Priority 2 - one warning signal



A red symbol signals danger.
Bring the vehicle to a stop.



Switch the engine off.



Investigate the function indicated.



Obtain professional assistance.

Safety

Set-up

You can select the following information (depending on the equipment installed
on the vehicle):







Meaning of the red symbols:

Using the system



You can change certain settings by means of the information display. The current
setting is shown on the information display in the respective menu at the top below the line.

Red symbols



19

Driving Tips

Language
MFD Data
Convenience
Lights & Vision
Time
Winter tyres

General Maintenance

£

Breakdown assistance

Technical data

20







Instruments and warning lights
Units
Assistants
Alternative speed displayed (Second speed)
Service Interval (Service)
Factory setting
Back

After selecting the menu point Back you will reach one level higher in the menu.
Language
Here you can set in which language the warning and information texts should be
displayed.
Displays of the MFA
Here you can switch off or on certain displays of the multi-functional indicator.
Comfort
Here you can activate, deactivate or adjust the following functions:

Rain closing

Switch on/off the function for automatically closing the
window and panoramic tilt/slide sunroof in a locked rain
when it starts raininga). If the function is set and it is not
raining, the windows including the panoramic tilt/slide
sunroof will close automatically after approx. 12 hours.

ATA confirm

Switch on/off the acoustic signal indicating activation of
the anti-theft alarm system.

Central locking

Switch on/off the central locking and automatic locking
function.

Window op.

Here you can set the convenience mode only for the
driver window or for all the windows.

Mirror down

Switch on/off the function for mirror lowering on the
front passenger side when engaging the reverse gearb).

Mirror adjust.

Switch on/off the function for left and right exterior
mirror setting simultaneously.

Factory setting

Restore the Convenience factory setting.

a)

This function is only available on vehicles with a rain sensor.

b)

This function is only available on vehicles with an electrically adjustable driver seat.

Lights and Visibility
Here you can activate, deactivate or adjust the following functions:
Coming Home

Switch on/off and adjust the light duration of the Coming Home function.

Leaving Home

Switch on/off and adjust the light duration of the Coming Home function.

Dayl. dri. light

Switch on/off the “DAY LIGHT” function.

Lane ch. flash
Switch on/off the convenience flashing function.
(convenience flashing)
Rear wiper
Travel mode
Factory setting

Switch on/off the function for automatic rear window
wiping.
Switch on/off the travel model function.
Restore the factory setting for the lighting.

Time
Here you can set the time, the time format (12 or 24 hour indicator) and the time
change summer/winter time.
Winter tyres
Here you can set at which speed a warning signal should sound. This function is
used for e.g winter tyres with the permissible maximum speed less than the maximum speed of the vehicle.
When exceeding the speed, an indication is displayed on the information display:
Winter tyres max. speed ... km/h
Measures
Here you can set the units for temperature, consumption and distance driven.
Assistants
Here you can adjust the tones of the acoustic signals of the parking aid.

£

Instruments and warning lights
Second speed
Here you can switch on the display of the second speed in mph or in km/h1).
Service
Here you can have the kilometers still to be driven and the days until the following service interval shown and the Service Interval Display reset.

Factory Setting
After selecting the menu Factory Setting the factory setting of the information
display is established again.

21



Warning lights
Overview
The warning lights indicate certain functions or faults.

Fig. 8 Instrument cluster with warning lights




1)

Turn signal lights (to the left)

⇒ page 23

Turn signal lights (to the right)

⇒ page 23




Fog lights

⇒ page 23

Main beam

⇒ page 23

Valid for countries where the values are indicated in British measuring units.

Using the system

Safety

Driving Tips

General Maintenance

Breakdown assistance

Technical data

£

22

Instruments and warning lights




















Low beam

⇒ page 23

Rear fog light

⇒ page 23

Speed regulating system

⇒ page 23

Failure of the light bulbs

⇒ page 23

Diesel particle filter (diesel engine)

⇒ page 23

Airbag system

⇒ page 24

Control system for exhaust

⇒ page 24

Electromechanical power steering

⇒ page 24

Engine oil pressure

⇒ page 25

EPC fault light (petrol engine)

⇒ page 25

Glow plug system (diesel engine)

⇒ page 25

Coolant temperature/coolant level

⇒ page 25

Traction control system (TCS)

⇒ page 26

Electronic stability programme (ESP)

⇒ page 26

Switch off traction control system (TCS)

⇒ page 26

Selector lever lock

⇒ page 27

Tyre pressure

⇒ page 27

Antilock brake system (ABS)

⇒ page 27












Bonnet

⇒ page 27

Seat belt warning light

⇒ page 28

Boot lid

⇒ page 28

Open door

⇒ page 28

Fluid level in windshield washer system

⇒ page 28

Brake system

⇒ page 28

Handbrake

⇒ page 29

Generator

⇒ page 29

Engine oil level

⇒ page 29

Fuel reserve

⇒ page 29

WARNING
● If you do not pay attention to the warning lights coming on and the corresponding descriptions and warning notes, this may result in severe body injuries or major vehicle damage.
● The engine compartment of your car is a hazardous area. There is a risk of
injuries, scalding, accidents and fire when working in the engine compartment, e.g. inspecting and replenishing oil and other fluids. It is also essential
to observe all warnings ⇒ page 182, Working in the engine compartment.

Notice
● The arrangement of the indicator lights depends on the model version. The
symbols shown in the following functional description are to be found as indicator
lights in the instrument cluster.
● Operational faults are shown in the instrument cluster as red symbols (priority
1 - danger) or yellow symbols (priority 2 - warning).



Instruments and warning lights

Bulb failure 

Turn signal system  
Either the left  or right  indicator light flashes depending on the position of the
turn signal lever.

The warning light  comes on if a bulb is faulty:
● up to 2 seconds after the ignition is switched on,
● when switching on the defective light bulb.

The indicator light flashes at twice its normal rate if a turn signal light fails. This
does not apply when towing a trailer.

The following text e.g will be displayed in the information display:

Switching off the hazard warning light system is switched on will cause all of the
turn signal lights as well as both indicator lights to flash.
Further information about the turn signal system ⇒ page 51.

Check front right dipped beam! (Check front right dipped beam!)

The warning light  comes on when the fog lights are operating ⇒ page 48.

Diesel particle filter  (diesel engine)



If the warning light  comes on, this means that soot has accumulated in the
diesel particle filter because of the frequent short distances.
In order to clean the diesel particlulate filter, the vehicle should be driven at an
even speed of at least 60 km/h at engine speeds of 1 800 - 2 500 rpm for at least
15 minutes or until the warning light goes out with the 4th or 5th gear engaged
(automatic gearbox: position S) when the traffic situation permits it. This increases the exhaust temperature and the soot deposited in the diesel particle filter is
burnt.

Main beam 
The indicator light  comes on when the main beam is selected or also when the
headlight flasher is operated.
Further information about the main beam ⇒ page 51.





Fog lights 



Always pay attention to the valid speed limits ⇒ 

.

The warning light  goes out after the successful cleaning of the diesel particle
filter.

Low beam 
The indicator light  comes on when low beam is selected ⇒ page 45.



Rear fog light 
The warning light  comes on when the rear fog lights are operating ⇒ page 49.



If the filter is not properly cleaned, the warning light  does not go out and the
warning light  begins to flash. The following is displayed in the information display: Diesel-particle filter: Owner's manual! Diesel particle filter appears. Afterwards the engine control unit shifts the engine into the emergency mode, which
only has a reduced power output. After switching the ignition off and on again the
warning light  comes on.
Have the vehicle inspected without delay by your specialist garage.

Cruise control 

WARNING

The warning light  lights up, when operating the speed regulating system.



● If you do not pay attention to the warning light coming on and the corresponding descriptions and warning notes, this may result in injuries or major
vehicle damage.
● Always adjust your speed to suit weather, road, region and traffic conditions. The route indicated by the warning light must not tempt you to disregard the national regulations for road traffic.

Using the system

23

Safety

Driving Tips

General Maintenance

Breakdown assistance

Technical data

£

24

Instruments and warning lights

Control system for exhaust 

CAUTION
As long as the warning light  lights up, one must take into account an increased
fuel consumption and in certain circumstances a power reduction of the engine.

The warning light  comes on after the ignition has been switched on.

Notice
Further information about diesel particle filter ⇒ page 161.



Airbag system 



Electromechanical power steering  

Monitoring the airbag system
The warning light  comes on for a few seconds when the ignition is switched on.

The warning light  comes on for a few seconds when the ignition is switched on.
If the warning light after switching on the ignition or when driving lights up continuously, a fault exists in the electromechanical power steering.

There is a fault in the system if the warning light does not go out or flashes while
driving ⇒  . This also applies if the warning light does not come on when the ignition is switched on.

● If the yellow warning light lights up , this indicates a partial failure of the
power steering and the steering forces can be greater.
● If the red warning light lights up , this indicates a complete failure of the
power steering and the steering assist has failed (significantly higher steering
forces).

The following text will be displayed in the information display:
Error: Airbag (Error: Airbag)
The functionality of the airbag system is also monitored electronically when one
airbag has been switched off.

Further information ⇒ page 160.

The following situation applies if the front, side and head airbags or belt tensioner have been switched off using the vehicle system tester:

WARNING

● The warning light  lights up for 4 seconds after switching on the ignition and
then flashes again for 12 seconds afterwards in 2 second intervals.

Contact your specialist garage if the power steering is defective.

The following text will be displayed in the information display:

Notice
● If the yellow warning light  goes out after starting the engine again and a
short drive, it is not necessary to visit a specialist garage.

Airbag/belt tensioner deactivated
The following situation applies if the airbag has been switched off using the
switch for the airbag in thefront passenger storage compartment:

● If the battery has been disconnected and reconnected, the yellow warning
light  comes on after switching on the ignition. The warning light must go out
after driving a short distance.

● the warning light  comes on for 4 seconds after the ignition has been
switched on,
● switching off the airbag is indicated in the middle of the dash panel by the
lighting up of the indicator light   (airbag switched off) ⇒ page 147.

WARNING
Have the airbag system checked immediately by a specialist garage if a fault
exists. Otherwise, there is a risk of the airbag not being activated in the event
of an accident.

If the warning light does not go out after starting the engine or it lights up when
driving, a fault exists in an exhaust relevant component. The engine management
system selects an emergency programme which enables you to drive to the nearest specialist garage by adopting a gentle style of driving.





Instruments and warning lights

Engine oil pressure 

25

If the warning light  does not go out or lights up after starting the engine, a
fault exists in the engine control. The engine management system selects an
emergency programme which enables you to drive to the nearest specialist garage by adopting a gentle style of driving.

The warning light  comes on for a few seconds 1) when the ignition is switched
on.
Stop the vehicle and switch the engine off if the warning light does not go off
after the engine has started or flashes while driving. Check the oil level and top up
with oil as necessary ⇒ page 184, Replenishing engine oil.



Glow plug system  (diesel engine)
The indicator light  lights up for a cold engine when switching on the ignition
(pre-heat position) 2 ⇒ page 99. Start the engine after the indicator light goes
out.

An audible signal sounds three times as an additional warning signal.
Do not continue your journey if for some reason it is not possible under the conditions prevailing to top up with oil. Keep the engine switched off and obtain professional assistance from a specialist garage, otherwise it could lead to severe engine damage.

The glow plug indicator light will come on for about 1 second if the engine is at a
normal operating temperature or if the outside temperature is above +5°C. This
means that you can start the engine right away.

Do not drive any further if the warning light flashes even if the oil is at the correct
level. Do not run the engine not at idling speed either. Contact the nearest specialist garage to obtain professional assistance.

There is a fault in the glow plug system if the warning light  does not come on
or lights up continuously; contact a specialist garage as soon as possible to obtain assistance.

The following text will be displayed in the information display:

If the warning light  begins to flash while driving, a fault exists in the engine
control. The engine management system selects an emergency programme which
enables you to drive to the nearest specialist garage by adopting a gentle style of
driving.

Oil Pressure: Engine off! Owner's manual Switch off the engine! Car documentation!



WARNING
Coolant temperature/ Coolant quantity 

● If you must stop for technical reasons, then park the vehicle at a safe distance from the traffic and switch off the engine and switch on the hazard
warning light system.
● The red oil pressure light  is not an oil level indicator! One should therefore check the oil level at regular intervals, preferably after every refueling
stop.

The warning light  comes on for a few seconds 2) when the ignition is switched
on.


The coolant temperature is too high or the coolant level too low if the warning
light  does not go out or flashes while driving.
3 peeps sound as an additional warning signal.

EPC fault light  (petrol engine)
The  (Electronic Power Control) warning light comes on for a few seconds when
the ignition is switched on.

1)

The warning light  on vehicles fitted with information display does not come on after switching
the ignition on, but only if a fault exists or the engine oil level is too low.

2)

The warning light  on vehicles fitted with information display does not come on after switching the
ignition on, but only if the coolant temperature is too high or the coolant level is too low.

Using the system

Safety

Driving Tips

In this case stop and switch the engine off and check the coolant level; top up
the coolant as necessary.

General Maintenance

Breakdown assistance

Technical data

£

26

Instruments and warning lights

Do not continue your journey if for some reason it is not possible under the conditions prevailing to top up with coolant. Keep the engine switched off and obtain
professional assistance from a specialist garage, otherwise it could lead to severe
engine damage.

Notice
If the battery has been disconnected and reconnected, the warning light  comes
on after switching on the ignition. The warning light must go out after driving a
short distance.

If the coolant is within the specified range, the increased temperature may be
caused by an operating problem at the coolant fan. Check the fuse for the coolant
fan, replace it if necessary ⇒ page 213, Fuse assignment in engine compartment.

Anti-spin regulation (ASR) 

Do not continue driving if the warning light does not go off although the fluid is
at the correct level and also the fuse of the fan is in proper order. Contact a specialist garage to obtain assistance.

The TCS system is switched off by pressing the button ⇒ fig. 139 and the warning
light  lights up.

Please refer to the following guidelines ⇒ page 185, Cooling system.

Electronic stability programme (ESP)

The following text will be displayed in the information display:

When the ESP helps to stabilise the vehicle, the warning light  flashes in the instrument cluster.

WARNING
● If you must stop for technical reasons, then park the vehicle at a safe distance from the traffic and switch off the engine and switch on the hazard
warning light system ⇒ page 50.

The warning light lights up permanently if there is a fault in the ESP system.

● Take care when opening the coolant expansion bottle. If the engine is hot,
the cooling system is pressurized - risk of scalding! It is best to allow the engine to cool down before removing the cap.

If the warning light  comes on immediately after starting the engine, the ESP
system can be switched off for technical reasons. In this case, the ESP system can
be switched on again by switching the ignition on and off. If the warning light
goes out, the ESP system is fully functional again.

Traction control system (TCS) 
The warning light  comes on for a few seconds when the ignition is switched on.
The warning light comes on when driving when a control cycle is activated.
The warning light lights up permanently if there is a fault in the TCS system.
The fact that the TCS system operates together with the ABS means that the TCS
warning light will also come on if the ABS system is not operating properly.
If the warning light  comes on immediately after starting the engine, the TCS
system can be switched off for technical reasons. In this case, the TCS system can
be switched on again by switching the ignition on and off. If the warning light
goes out, the TCS system is fully functional again.
Further information about the TCS ⇒ page 157, Traction control system (TCS).



The warning light  comes on for a few seconds when the ignition is switched on.

Check coolant! Owner's manual! Check coolant! Car documentation!

● Do not touch the coolant fan The coolant fan may switch on automatically
even if the ignition is off.



The fact that the ESP system operates together with the ABS means that the ESP
warning light will also come on if the ABS system is not operating properly.



Further information on the ESP ⇒ page 155, Electronic stability programme (ESP).
Electronic Differential Lock (EDL)
The EDL is a part of the ESP. A fault in the EDL is indicated by the lighting up of
the ESP warning light in the instrument cluster. Have the vehicle inspected immediately by your specialist garage. Further information on the EDL ⇒ page 156,
Electronic Differential Lock (EDL and XDL).

Notice
If the battery has been disconnected and reconnected, the warning light  comes
on after switching on the ignition. The warning light must go out after driving a
short distance.



Instruments and warning lights

Selector lever lock 
If the green warning light  lights up, operate the brake pedal. This is necessary,
in order to be able to move the selector lever out of the position P or N.
Further information about the selector lever lock ⇒ page 112.



A fault in the entire brake system
If the ABS warning light  comes on together with the brake system warning
light  (handbrake must be released), there is a fault not only in the ABS but also
in another part of the brake system ⇒  .

The warning light  lights up, if there is a substantial drop in inflation pressure in
one of the tyres. Reduce the speed and check or correct as soon as possible the
inflation pressure in the tyres ⇒ page 193.
If the warning light flashes, there is a system fault. Visit the nearest specialist garage and have the fault rectified.

WARNING

Further information about the tyre pressure monitoring system ⇒ page 160.

● If the brake system warning light  comes on together with the ABS
warning light  stop the vehicle immediately and check the brake fluid level
in the reservoir ⇒ page 187, Brake fluid. If the fluid level has dropped below
the MIN marking, do not drive any further - risk of accident! Contact a Škoda
dealer to obtain professional assistance.

WARNING
● When the warning light  lights up, immediately reduce the speed and
avoid sudden steering and brake manoeuvres. Please stop the vehicle without
delay at the nearest possible stop and inspect the tyres and their inflation
pressures.

● Pay attention to the following instructions ⇒ page 182, Working in the engine compartment before checking the brake fluid level and opening the bonnet.

● Under certain circumstances (e.g. sporty style of driving, wintry or unpaved
roads) the warning light  can be delayed or does not light up at all.

Notice
If the battery has been disconnected, the warning light  comes on after switching on the ignition. The warning light must go out after driving a short distance.



● If the brake fluid is at the correct level, the ABS control function has failed.
The rear wheels may then block very rapidly when braking. In certain circumstances, this can result in the rear end of the car breaking away - risk of skidding! Drive carefully to the nearest specialist garage and have the fault rectified.



Bonnet 

Antilock brake system (ABS) 
The warning light  shows the functionality of the ABS.
The warning light comes on for a few seconds after the ignition has been switched on or when starting the engine. The warning light goes out after an automatic
check sequence has been completed.

Safety

A fault in the ABS
The system is not functioning properly if the ABS warning light  does not go out
within a few seconds after switching on the ignition, does not light up at all or
lights up while driving. The vehicle will only be braked by the normal brake system. Visit a specialist garage immediately and adjust your style of driving appropriately as you will not know how great the damage is.
Further information about ABS ⇒ page 159, Antilock brake system (ABS).

Tyre inflation pressure

Using the system

27

Driving Tips

The warning light  comes on if the bonnet is unlocked. If the engine bonnet unlocks while driving , the warning light lights up and an audible signal sounds.
The warning light comes on even when the ignition is switched off. The warning
light lights up for a maximum of 5 minutes.
In vehicles with an information display, this warning light is replaced by a vehicle
symbol⇒ page 18

General Maintenance

Breakdown assistance

Technical data



28

Instruments and warning lights

Seat belt warning light 

Windshield washer fluid level 

The warning light  comes on after the ignition is switched on as a reminder for
the driver to fasten the seat belt. The warning light only goes out if the driver has
fastened his seat belt.

The warning light  comes on when the ignition is switched on if there is insufficient fluid in the windshield washer system. Top up with liquid ⇒ page 191.
The following text will be displayed in the information display:

If the seat belt has not been fastened by the driver, a permanent warning signal
sounds at vehicle speeds greater than 20 km/h and simultaneously the warning
light  flashes.

Top up wash fluid! (Top up washer fluid)

Brake system 

If the seat belt is not fastened by the driver during the next 90 seconds, the warning signal is deactivated and the warning light  lights up permanently.
For further information on the seat belts ⇒ page 136, Seat belts.



The following text will be displayed in the information display:

The warning light  comes on when the ignition is switched on if the luggage
compartment door is open. If the boot lid opens while driving , the warning light
lights up and an audible signal sounds.

Brake fluid: Owner's manual Car documentation!
If there is a fault in the ABS which also influences the function of the brake system (e.g. distribution of brake pressure), the ABS warning light  comes on and at
the same time the brake system warning light starts flashing . Be aware that
not only the ABS but also another part of th brake system is defective ⇒  .

An audible signal sounds as an additional warning signal.
The warning light comes on even when the ignition is switched off. The warning
light lights up for a maximum of 5 minutes.

An audible signal sounds three times as an additional warning signal.


One should get used to high pedal forces, long braking distances and long free
play of the brake pedal when driving to the next specialist garage.
For further information on the brake system ⇒ page 158, Brakes.

Open door

WARNING

The warning light  comes on, if one or several doors are opened. If one of the
doors opens while driving, the warning light lights  up and an audible signal
sounds.

● Pay attention to the following instructions ⇒ page 182, Working in the engine compartment before checking the brake fluid level and opening the bonnet.

The warning light comes on even when the ignition is switched off. The warning
light lights up for a maximum of 5 minutes.
In vehicles with an information display, this warning light is replaced by a vehicle
symbol⇒ page 18

The warning light  lights up when the brake fluid level is too low or there is a
fault in the ABS.
if the warning light flashes  and an audible signal sounds three times, stop and
check the brake fluid level ⇒  .

Boot lid 

In vehicles with an information display, this warning light is replaced by a vehicle
symbol⇒ page 18





● If the brake system warning light  does not go out a few seconds after
switching on the ignition or comes on when driving, stop immediately and
check the brake fluid in the reservoir ⇒ page 187. If the fluid level has dropped below the MIN marking, do not drive any further - risk of accident! Contact
a Škoda dealer to obtain professional assistance.



Instruments and warning lights

Handbrake 

Warning light  flashes
A fault on the engine oil level sensor is indicated additionally by an audible signal
and the warning light coming on several times after the ignition has been switched on.

The warning light  comes on if the handbrake is applied. An audible warning is
also given if you drive the vehicle for at least 3 seconds at a speed of more than 6
km/h.

In this case have the engine inspected without delay by a specialist garage.

The following text will be displayed in the information display:
Release parking brake! (Release parking brake!)

The following text will be displayed in the information display:


Alternator 

Oil sensor workshop! (Oil sensor workshop!)



Fuel reserve 

The warning light  comes on after the ignition has been switched on. It should
go out after the engine has started.

The warning light  comes on, if the fuel level is still below 9 litres.

If the warning light does not go out after the engine has started, or comes on
when driving, drive to the nearest specialist garage. The vehicle battery will be
discharged in this case so switch off all non-essential electrical components.

The following text will be displayed in the information display:

An audible signal sounds as an additional warning signal.
Please refuel! Range...km (Please refuel! (Range...km)

CAUTION
If the warning light  comes on when driving and in addition the warning light 
(cooling system fault) also comes on in display, you must then stop the car immediately and switch the engine off - risk of engine damage!

Notice


The Text in the information display goes out only after refuelling and driving a
short distance.



Temperature of the clutches of the automatic gearbox DSG 

Engine oil level 
Warning light  lights up
If the warning light  lights up, the quantity of oil in the engine is probably too
low. Check as soon as possible the oil level or top up ⇒ page 184, Replenishing
engine oil with engine oil.
The following text will be displayed in the information display:
Check oil level! (Check oil level!)
The warning light will go out if the bonnet is left open for more than 30 seconds.
If no engine oil has been replenished, the warning light will come on again after
driving about 100 km.

Safety

In the event that the temperature of the clutches of the automatic gearbox DSG is
too high, the symbol and the warning are shown in the Information display:
Gearbox overheated. Stop! Owner's man.! (Transmission overheated. Stop!
appears.
An audible signal sounds as an additional warning signal.

A peep sounds as an additional warning signal.

Using the system

29

Driving Tips

WARNING
If you must stop for technical reasons, then park the vehicle at a safe distance
from the traffic and switch off the engine and switch on the hazard warning
£
light system.

General Maintenance

Breakdown assistance

Technical data

30

Instruments and warning lights
CAUTION

In the event that the clutches of the automatic gearbox have overheated, bring
the vehicle to a stop and switch off the engine. You must wait until the symbol 
and the warning go out - risk of gearbox damage! You can continue the trip as
soon as the symbol and the warning go out.



Unlocking and locking

31

Unlocking and locking
Vehicle key

Notice
Please approach an authorised ŠKODA Service Partner if you lose a key since he
can obtain a new one for you.

Description



Changing the battery in the remote control key

Fig. 9 Set of keys without remote control/Keys with remote control key

Two keys are provided with the vehicle. Depending on the equipment, your vehicle can be equipped with keys without radio remote control ⇒ fig. 9 - left, or with
radio remote control ⇒ fig. 9 - right.

WARNING
● Always withdraw the key whenever you leave the vehicle - even if it is only
for a short time. This is particularly important if children are left in the vehicle.
The children might otherwise start the engine or operate electrical equipment
(e.g. power windows) - risk of injury!

Fig. 10 Remote control key - remove cover/remove battery

Each remote control key contains a battery which is housed under the cover B
⇒ fig. 10 . If the battery is discharged, the red warning light A does not flash after
you press a button on the remote control key ⇒ fig. 9 . We recommend that you
have the batteries of the key replaced by an authorised ŠKODA Service Partner.
You should, however, proceed as follows if you wish to replace the discharged
battery yourself:


Fold open the key.



Press off the battery cover with your thumb or using a flat screwdriver at the
points of the arrows 1 from ⇒ fig. 10 .



Remove the discharged battery from the key by pressing the battery downwards at the point of the arrow 2 ⇒ fig. 10 .

● Each key contains electronic components; therefore protect them against
moisture and severe shocks.



Insert the new battery. Ensure that the “+” symbol on the battery is facing upwards. The correct polarity is shown on the battery cover.

● Keep the groove of the keys absolutely clean as impurities (textile fibres, dust
etc.) have a negative effect on the proper operation of the locking cylinder and the
ignition lock.



Position the battery cover on the key and press on it until it is heard to lock in
£
place.

● Do not withdraw the ignition key from the ignition lock until the vehicle
has come to a stop. The steering lock might otherwise engage unintentionally
- risk of accident!

CAUTION

Using the system

Safety

Driving Tips

General Maintenance

Breakdown assistance

Technical data

32

Unlocking and locking

Child safety lock

For the sake of the environment
Dispose of a used battery in accordance with environmental regulations.

The child safety lock prevents the rear door from being opened
from the inside.

Notice


Pay attention to the correct polarity when changing the battery.

● The replacement battery must have the same specification as the original battery.
● If it is still not be possible to unlock or lock the vehicle with the remote control
key even after replacing the battery, this means that the system has to be
synchronised ⇒ page 38.



Electronic immobiliser
Fig. 11 Child safety locks on the rear
doors

The electronic immobiliser prevents the vehicle being operated by
an unauthorised person.

The rear doors are equipped with a child safety lock. You can switch the child
safety lock on and off using the vehicle key.

An electronic chip is integrated in the head of the key. The immobiliser is deactivated with the aid of this chip when the key is inserted in the ignition lock. The electronic immobiliser is automatically activated when you withdraw the ignition key
from the lock.

Switching child safety lock on
– Use the vehicle key to turn the slit in the rear door to the left in the direction
of the arrow ⇒ fig. 11 .

Notice
It is only possible to start the engine of your car with a Genuine ŠKODA key with
the matching code.



Switching child safety lock off
– Use the vehicle key to turn the slit to the right against the direction of the arrow.
So long as the child safety lock is switched on it is not possible to open the door
from the inside with the door opening lever. In this case the door can be opened
only from the outside.



Unlocking and locking

Central locking system

Automatic locking and unlocking
All the doors and the boot lid are locked automatically once the car reaches a
speed of about 15 km/h.

Description
When using the central locking and unlocking system, all the doors and the fuel
filler flap are locked or unlocked at the same time (if it was not set differently in
the menu point Settings - Convenience of the information display). The boot lid is
unlocked when opening. It can be opened by pressing the hand grip above the licence plate ⇒ page 36.
Operation of the central locking system is possible:




33

from the outside using the vehicle key ⇒ page 34,
using the buttons for the central locking system ⇒ page 35,
with a remote control key ⇒ page 37,

Indicator light in the driver's door
After locking the vehicle, the warning light flashes for around 2 seconds in quick
succession, afterwards it begins to flash evenly at longer intervals.

If the ignition key is withdrawn, the car is then automatically unlocked again. In
addition, it is possible for the driver to unlock the car by pressing the central locking button  or by pulling the door opening lever.
This function can be activated/deactivated by a specialist garage.
On vehicles with an information display, this function can be switched on in the
menu Settings Convenience - Door open.

WARNING
Locking the doors prevents involuntary opening in an exceptional situation
(an accident). Locked doors prevent unwanted entry into the vehicle from outside, for example at road crossings. Locked doors do, however, make it more
difficult for rescuers to get into the vehicle in an emergency - danger to life!

Notice

If the vehicle is locked and the safe securing system ⇒ page 33 is not operating,
the indicator light in the driver door flashes for about 2 seconds fast, goes out and
starts to flash evenly at longer intervals after about 30 seconds.

● In the event of an accident in which the airbags are deployed, the locked doors
are automatically unlocked in order to enable rescuers to gain access to the vehicle.

If the indicator light first of all flashes fast for about 2 seconds, afterwards lights
up for about 30 seconds and then flashes slowly, there is a fault in the system of
the central locking or the interior monitor ⇒ page 39. Visit a specialist garage to
obtain assistance.

● Only the front door which is fitted with a locking cylinder can be unlocked and
locked using the key if the central locking system fails. You can lock or unlock
manually the other doors and the boot lid.
– Emergency locking of the door ⇒ page 35.
– Emergency unlocking of the boot lid ⇒ page 36.

Convenience operation of windows
One can open and close the electrically powered windows when unlocking and
locking the vehicle ⇒ page 41.
Opening a single door
This function makes it possible to only unlock the driver's door. The other doors
and the fuel filler flap remain locked and are only unlocked after repetitive unlocking.
This function can be activated/deactivated by a specialist garage.
On vehicles with an information display, this function can be switched on in the
menu Settings Convenience - Door open.

Using the system

Safety

Driving Tips



Safe securing
The central locking system is equipped with a safe securing system. Locking the
vehicle from the outside causes the door locks to be automatically blocked. The
warning light flashes for around 2 seconds in quick succession, afterwards it begins to flash evenly at longer intervals. It is not possible to open the doors with
the door handle either from the inside or from the outside. This acts as an effective deterrent for attempts to break into your vehicle.
You can deactivate the safe securing system by locking twice within 2 seconds.

General Maintenance

Breakdown assistance

Technical data

£

34

Unlocking and locking

If the safe securing system is not operating, the warning light in the driver door
flashes for about 2 seconds fast, goes out and starts to flash evenly at longer intervals after about 30°seconds.
The safe securing system is again activated the next time the vehicle is unlocked
and locked again.

The door is unlocked by actuating the door-opening lever.
The door opens upon actuating the door-opening lever again.

WARNING
If the vehicle is locked from the outside and the safe securing system is activated, there must not be any person and animals in the vehicle as it is then
not possible to open either a door or a window from the inside. The locked
doors make it more difficult for rescuers to get into the vehicle in an emergency - hazard!

Pull on the door handle and open the door.

Notice

● The anti-theft alarm system is also activated with the deactivated safe securing system when locking the vehicle. The interior monitor is however not activated.

Unlocking the vehicle using the key



If the vehicle is equipped with an anti-theft alarm system, you must insert the key
into the ignition lock and switch the ignition on within 15 seconds after unlocking
the door in order to deactivate the anti-theft alarm system. The alarm will be triggered if you do not switch on the ignition within 15 seconds.

Notice

● When activating the Safelock function after you lock the vehicle, the message
CHECK DEADLOCK will appear to inform you about this. In vehicles equipped with
an information display, the message Check deadlock! appears Owner's manual!
(CHECK DEADLOCK appears.

Turn the key in the locking cylinder of the driver's door in the direction of travel (unlock position) A ⇒ fig. 12 .

● All the doors (only the driver's door on vehicles with anti-theft alarm system)
and the fuel filler flap are unlocked.
● The boot lid is then unlocked.
● The switched on interior lights come on over the door contact.
● The safe securing system is deactivated.
● The windows open provided the key is held in the unlock position.
● The indicator light in the driver door stops flashing if the car is not fitted with
an anti-theft alarm system⇒ page 38.

The doors can be opened from the inside if the vehicle is locked and the safe securing system is deactivated:







Locking the vehicle with the key




Turn the key in the locking cylinder of the driver's door in the opposite direction of travel (lock position) B ⇒ fig. 12 .

● The doors, the boot lid and the fuel filler flap are locked.
● The switched on interior lights will switch off over the door contact.
● The windows and the electric sliding/tilting roof close provided the key is held
in the lock position.
● The safe securing system is activated immediately.
● The indicator light in the driver door begins flashing.

Notice
If the driver's door has been opened, the vehicle cannot be locked.

Fig. 12 Turning the key for unlocking
and locking the vehicle



Unlocking and locking

Button for the central locking system

35

WARNING
The central locking system also operates if the ignition is switched off. All the
doors and the boot lid are locked. Children should never be left unattended in
the vehicle since it is difficult to provide assistance from the outside when the
doors are locked. Locked doors make it difficult for rescuers to get into the vehicle in an emergency - hazard!

Notice
Fig. 13 Centre console: Central locking
system

If the vehicle was not locked from the outside, you can also unlock and lock it with
the rocker switch without the ignition switched on.

The door opening lever and the buttons for the central locking system do not operate if the safe securing system is activated ⇒ page 33.



Emergency locking of the doors

Locking all doors and the boot lid
– Press button 1 ⇒ fig. 13 . The symbol  in the button comes on.
Unlocking all doors and the boot lid
– Press button 2 ⇒ fig. 13 . The symbol  goes out in the button.
The following applies if you have locked your vehicle using the button 1 :
● It is not possible to open the doors or the boot lid from the outside (safety feature, e.g. when stopping at traffic lights etc.).
● You can unlock the doors individually from the inside and open them by pulling
the door opening lever.
● As long as one door is opened1), the vehicle cannot be locked in order to avoid
inadvertently locking the key in the vehicle.
● In the event of an accident in which the airbags are deployed, the locked doors
are automatically unlocked from the inside in order to enable rescuers to gain access to the vehicle.
By pressing and holding the button 1 or 2 , you can conveniently close or open
the windows ⇒ page 41.

Fig. 14 Rear door: Emergency locking of
the door

An emergency locking mechanism is located on the rear side of the doors which
have no locking cylinder; it is only visible after opening the door.
Locking
– Remove the panel A ⇒ fig. 14 .


Insert the key into the opening under the panel and press the stopping lever
B as far as the stop toward the inside.



Re-insert the panel.

After closing the door, you can no longer open it from outside. The door can be
unlocked from the inside by pulling on the door handle again, and then opened
from the outside.

1)

Is not valid for the boot lid.

Using the system

Safety

Driving Tips

General Maintenance

Breakdown assistance

Technical data



36

Unlocking and locking

Boot lid

Notice
● After closing the boot lid, it is automatically locked within 1 second and the
anti-theft alarm system is activated. This applies only if the vehicle was locked
before closing the boot lid.
● The function of the hand grip above the licence plate is deactivated when
starting off or as of a speed of more than 5 km/hour for vehicles with central locking. The function of the hand grip is activated again when the vehicle has stopped
and a door is opened.



Emergency unlocking of the boot lid (Laura)
Fig. 15 Handle of boot lid

Open the boot lid by pressing the hand grip above the licence plate after unlocking the vehicle using the key or the radio remote control.
Opening the boot lid
– Press on the handle ⇒ fig. 15 and at the same time raise the boot lid.
Closing the boot lid
– Pull the boot lid down and close it with a slight swing ⇒ 

.

A handle which makes the closing easier is located on the inner paneling of the
boot lid.

WARNING
● Ensure that the lock is properly engaged after closing the boot lid. Otherwise, the boot lid might open suddenly when driving even if the boot lid lock is
closed - risk of accident!
● Never drive with the boot lid fully opened or slightly ajar otherwise exhaust gases may get into the interior of the vehicle - risk of poisoning!
● Do not press on the rear window when closing the boot lid, it could crack risk of injury!

Fig. 16 Emergency unlocking of the boot
lid

If there is a fault in the central locking, you can open the boot lid as follows:


Fold the backrest of the rear seat forwards ⇒ page 65.



Take out the warning triangle A ⇒ fig. 16 .



Press the operating lever in the direction of arrow in order to unlock the boot
lid. The operating lever is located under the panel B .



Open the boot lid/luggage compartment door.



Unlocking and locking

Emergency unlocking of the boot lid (Estate car)

37

If a lost key is replaced or if the receiver unit has been repaired or a new unit installed, it is then necessary for an authorised ŠKODA Service Partner to initialise
the system. Only after this is it possible to again use the remote control key.

Notice
● The remote control is automatically deactivated when the ignition is switched
on.
● The operation of the remote control may temporarily be affected by interference from transmitters close to the car and which operate in the same frequency
range (e.g. mobile phone, TV transmitter).
● The battery must be replaced if the central locking or anti-theft alarm system
does react to the remote control at less than 3 metres away ⇒ page 31.

Fig. 17 Emergency unlocking of the boot
lid

● If the driver door is opened, the vehicle cannot be locked using the remote
control.

If there is a fault in the central locking, you can open the boot lid as follows:


Fold the backrest of the rear seat forwards ⇒ page 65.



Open up the cover of the lock upwards ⇒ fig. 17 .



Move the operating lever A with the aid of a narrow object e.g. screwdriver up
to the stop in the direction of arrow; the boot lid is then unlocked.



Open the boot lid/luggage compartment door.



Unlocking and locking car



Remote control
Description
Fig. 18 Remote control key

You can use the remote control key:
● to unlock and lock the car,
● unlocking boot lid,
● electrically open and close the windows.

Unlocking the vehicle 
– Press the button 1 ⇒ fig. 18 for about 1 second.

The transmitter with the battery is housed in the handle of the remote control
key. The receiver is located in the interior of the car. The operating range of the
remote control key is approx. 10 m. But this range of the remote control can be
reduced if the batteries are weak.
The key has a fold-open key bit which can be used for unlocking and locking the
car manually and also for starting the engine.

Using the system

Safety

Driving Tips

Locking the vehicle 
– Press button 3 for about 1 second.
Deactivating safe securing system
– Press button 2 twice in 3 seconds. Further information ⇒ page 33.
Boot lid remote release 
– Press button 2 for about 1 second. Further information ⇒ page 36.

General Maintenance

Breakdown assistance

Technical data

£

38

Unlocking and locking

Folding out of the key
– Press button 4 .
Folding up of the key
– Press button 4 and collapse the key bit in the housing.
The turn signal lights flash twice as confirmation that the vehicle has been unlocked. The vehicle will lock again automatically if you unlock the vehicle using
button 1 but do not open a door or the boot lid within the next 30 seconds. The
safelock and/or anti-theft alarm system will reactivate. This function is intended
to prevent the car being unlocked unintentionally.
In addition, when the car is unlocked, the electrically adjustable seats and exterior
mirrors move into the position assigned to this key. The stored setting of driver
seat and exterior mirrors is retrieved.
Display of the locking
The turn signal lights flash once to confirm that the vehicle has been correctly
locked.
If the vehicle is locked by pressing the button 3 and some doors or the boot lid
are not closed, the turn signal lights flash only after closing.

WARNING
If the vehicle is locked from the outside and the safe securing system is activated, there must not be any person in the vehicle as it is then not possible to
open either a door or a window from the inside. The locked doors make it
more difficult for rescuers to get into the vehicle in an emergency - hazard!

Synchonisation of the remote control
If the vehicle cannot be unlocked by actuating the remote control system then it
is possible that the code in the key and the control unit in the vehicle are no longer synchronised. This can occur when the buttons on the radio-operated key are
actuated a number of times outside of the operative range of the equipment or
the battery on the remote control was replaced.
This means it is necessary to synchronise the code as follows:
● press any button on the remote control;
● pressing of the button means that the door will unlock with the key within 1
minute.

Anti-theft alarm system
Description
The anti-theft alarm system increases the level of protection against people seeking to break into the vehicle. The system triggers audible and visual warning signals if an attempt is made to break into the vehicle.
How is the alarm system activated?
The anti-theft alarm system is activated automatically when the vehicle is locked
with the key on the driver's door or by using the radio remote control. It is activated 30 seconds after locking the door.

● Operate the radio remote control only when the doors and boot lid are closed
and you have visual contact with the vehicle.

How is the alarm system deactivated?
The anti-theft alarm system is deactivated if the vehicle is unlocked by only using
the radio remote control. The anti-theft alarm system is reactivated if the vehicle
is not opened within 30 seconds after transmitting the radio signal.

● Once in the car, you must not press the lock button  of the radio remote control before inserting the key into the ignition lock in order to avoid the car being
inadvertently locked and the alarm system being switched on. Should this happen,

press the unlock button  of the radio remote control.

Once you unlock the vehicle by inserting the key into the driver door you then
have to insert the key into the ignition lock and switch the ignition on within 15
seconds after opening the door in order to deactivate the anti-theft alarm system.
The alarm will be triggered if you do not switch on the ignition within 15 seconds.

Notice



When is the alarm triggered?
The following security areas of the locked vehicle are monitored:
● Bonnet,
● Boot lid,

£

Unlocking and locking







Doors,
Ignition lock,
Vehicle inclination ⇒ page 39,
Vehicle interior⇒ page 39,
A drop in voltage of the on-board power supply,
Socket of the factory-fitted towing device.



Press the button  at the centre column on the driver side ⇒ fig. 19 , the symbol  which lights up in the button changes from red to orange.



Lock the vehicle within 30 seconds.

The interior monitor and the towing protection monitoring are switched on again
automatically the next time the car is locked.

Notice

An alarm is immediately triggered if either of the two battery terminals is disconnected while the anti-theft alarm system is activated.

● You can switch the interior monitor and the towing protection monitoring off if
there is a possibility that movements from (e.g. children or animals) inside the vehicle interior or if the vehicle must be transported (e.g. by train or ship) or towed,
might trigger the alarm.

How is the alarm switched off?
You switch the alarm off if you unlock the vehicle with the radio remote control or
if you switch the ignition on.

● You can also switch off the interior monitor and the towing protection monitoring, by deactivating the safe securing system ⇒ page 33.

Notice

● The opened storage compartment for spectacles reduces the effectiveness of
the interior monitor. In order to ensure the function of the interior monitor to be
fully operational, always close the storage compartment for spectacles before
locking the vehicle.

● The working life of the alarm siren is 6 years. More detailed information is
available by a specialist garage.
● Before leaving the car, check that all the doors, windows and the electric sliding/tilting roof are properly closed in order to ensure that the anti-theft alarm system is fully operational.
● Coding of the radio remote control and the receiver unit precludes the use of
the radio remote control from other vehicles.

Interior monitor and Towing protection monitoring



Switch off the interior monitor and towing protection monitoring
– Switch off the ignition.
Open the driver door.

Using the system

Safety

Driving Tips



Power windows
Buttons on the driver's door

Fig. 19 Button for interior monitor and
towing protection monitoring



39

Fig. 20 Buttons on the driver's door

The power windows operate only when ignition is switched on.
Opening a window
– A window is opened by pressing lightly on the respective button in the door.
The process stops when one releases the button.
General Maintenance

Breakdown assistance

Technical data

£

40


Unlocking and locking
Additionally you can open the window automatically (fully opened) by pressing
the button up to the stop. Renewed pressing of the button causes the window
to stop immediately.

Closing a window
– A window is closed through pulling lightly on the respective button in the
door. The closing process stops when one releases the button.


Additionally you can close the window automatically (fully closed) by pulling
the button up to the stop. Renewed pulling of the button causes the window
to stop immediately.

The buttons for the individual windows are located in the armrest of the driver's
door ⇒ fig. 20 , front passenger seat and in the rear doors ⇒ page 41.
Buttons for the power windows in the armrest for the driver
A Button for the power window in the driver's door
B Button for the power window in the front passenger's door
C Button for the power window at the rear right door
D Button for the power window at the rear left door
S Safety switch

WARNING
● If you lock the vehicle from the outside, do not leave any person in the vehicle since it is no longer possible to open the windows from the inside in an
emergency.
● The system is fitted with a force limiter ⇒ page 41. If there is an obstacle,
the closing process is stopped and the window goes down by several centimetres. You should then take particular care when closing the windows! You may
otherwise suffer severe injuries as a result of getting an arm, for example,
jammed in the window!
● It is recommended to deactivate the electrically operated power windows
in the rear doors (safety pushbutton) S ⇒ fig. 20 when children are being
transported on the rear seats.

CAUTION
● Keep the window glass clean to ensure correct function of the electric windows.
● In the event of a freezing up of the windscreen, first of all eliminate the ice
⇒ page 173 and then operate the power windows otherwise the power window
mechanism could be damaged.

Notice

Safety pushbutton
You can deactivate the buttons for power windows at rear doors by pressing the
safety pushbutton S ⇒ fig. 20 . The buttons for power windows at rear doors are
activated again by pressing the safety pushbutton S again.

● After switching the ignition off, it is still possible to open or close the windows
for a further 10 minutes. During this time the automatic closing and opening functions of the window will operate. The power windows are switched off completely
once you open the driver or front passenger door.

If the buttons for the rear doors are deactivated, the indicator light  in the safety switch S lights up.

● When driving always use the existing heating, air conditioning and ventilation
system for ventilating the interior of the vehicle. If the windows are opened, dust
as well as other dirt can get into the vehicle and in addition the wind noise is more

at certain speeds.

Unlocking and locking

Button in the front passenger door and in the rear doors

41

Notice
● After switching the ignition off, it is still possible to open or close the windows
for a further 10 minutes. During this time the automatic closing and opening functions of the window will operate. The power windows are switched off completely
once you open the driver or front passenger door.
● If the child safety lock is switched on, the lighting of the switch for the window lifter in the rear doors is not activated.



Force limiter of the power windows
Fig. 21 Position of button in front passenger door

A button for the relevant window is provided in these doors.
Opening a window
– Lightly press the appropriate button down and hold it until the window has
moved into the desired position.


Additionally you can open the window automatically (fully opened) by pressing
the button down up to the stop. Renewed pressing of the button causes the
window to stop immediately.

Closing a window
– Lightly press the appropriate button up and hold it until the window has
moved into the desired position.


Additionally you can close the window automatically (fully closed) by pressing
the button up up to the stop. Renewed pressing of the button causes the window to stop immediately.

WARNING
The system is fitted with a force limiter ⇒ page 41. If there is an obstacle, the
closing process is stopped and the window goes down by several centimetres.
You should then take particular care when closing the windows! You may otherwise suffer severe injuries as a result of getting an arm, for example, jammed in the window!

Using the system

Safety

Driving Tips

The electrically operated power windows are fitted with a force limiter. It reduces
the risk of bruises or injuries when closing the windows.
If there is an obstacle, the closing process is stopped and the window goes down
by several centimetres.
If the obstacle prevents the window from being closed during the next 10 seconds, the closing process is interrupted once again and the window goes down by
several centimetres.
You must try to close the window once again within 10 seconds after the window
has gone down twice, even if the obstacle was not yet removed, the closing process is stopped. During this time it is not possible to automatically close the window. The force limiter is still switched on.
The force limiter is only switched off, if you attempt to close the window within
the next 10 seconds - the window closes now with full strength!
If you wait longer than 10 seconds, the force limiter is switched on again.

WARNING
You should take particular care when closing the windows! You may otherwise
suffer severe injuries as a result of getting an arm, for example, jammed in the
window!



Window convenience operation
You can open and close the electrically powered windows as follows when unlocking and locking the vehicle (only close the sliding/tilting roof):

General Maintenance

Breakdown assistance

Technical data

£

42

Unlocking and locking

Opening a window
– Hold the key in the locking cylinder of the driver's door in the unlock position
or press the unlock button of the radio remote control until all the windows
are opened.

Operation in winter
Ice accumulating on the surface of the windows during the winter may result in a
greater resistance when closing the windows and the window may stop and move
back several centimetres

Closing a window
– Hold the key in the locking cylinder of the driver's door in the lock position or
press the lock button of the radio remote control until all the windows are
closed.

It is necessary to put the force limiter out of operation in order to close the window ⇒ page 41, Force limiter of the power windows.

WARNING
The system is fitted with a force limiter ⇒ page 41. If there is an obstacle, the
closing process is stopped and the window goes down by several centimetres.
You should then take particular care when closing the windows! You may otherwise suffer severe injuries as a result of getting an arm, for example, jammed in the window!

You can interrupt the opening or closing operation of the windows immediately by
releasing the key or the lock button.

WARNING
The system is fitted with a force limiter ⇒ page 41. If there is an obstacle, the
closing process is stopped and the window goes down by several centimetres.
You should then take particular care when closing the windows! You may otherwise suffer severe injuries as a result of getting an arm, for example, jammed in the window!

CAUTION
● Keep the window glass clean to ensure correct function of the electric windows.
● In the event of a freezing up of the windscreen, first of all eliminate the ice
⇒ page 173 and then operate the power windows otherwise the power window
mechanism could be damaged.

Notice
On vehicles fitted with anti-theft alarm system the convenience window opening
is possible by means of the key in the locking cylinder only 45 seconds after deactivating the warning system or after activating the anti-theft alarm system.

Operational faults





Electric sliding/tilting roof
Description

Electrically operated power windows do not operate
If the battery of the car has been disconnected and then reconnected, the electrically operated power windows do not operate. The system must be activated. Proceed as follows in order to re-establish the function:
● switch on the ignition,
● slightly pull on the upper edge of the relevant button and hold it until the window is closed,
● release the switch,
● you must pull the respective switch again in upward direction for approx. 3
seconds.

Fig. 22 Detail of the headliner: Control
dial for the power sliding/tilting roof

The sliding/tilting roof is operated by means of the control dial ⇒ fig. 22 and only
functions when the ignition is switched on. The control dial has several positions. £

Unlocking and locking
Safety closing
The sliding/tilting roof is fitted with a force limiter. If an obstacle (e.g. ice) prevents closing, the sliding/tilting roof stops and opens completely. You can close
the sliding/tilting roof completely without force limiter by pressing the switch to
the A position ⇒ fig. 22 at the front for as long as it takes for the sliding/tilting
roof to close completely ⇒  .

After switching the ignition off, it is still possible to open, close and tilt the sliding/
tilting roof for approx. 10 minutes. It is no longer possible to operate the sliding/
tilting roof after opening one of the front doors, however.

Notice
If the battery has been disconnected and reconnected, it is possible that the sliding/tilting roof does not close fully. Here you have to set the control dial to the
switch position A and press it forward for about 10 seconds.

43



WARNING
Close the sliding/tilting roof carefully - risk of injury!

Opening and tilting



Convenience operation

Comfort position
– Turn the switch to position C ⇒ fig. 22 .

You can also close an open sliding/tilting roof from the outside.

Opening fully
– Turn the switch to position B and hold it in this position (spring-tensioned
position).



Tilting roof
– Turn the switch to position D .

Hold the key in the locking cylinder of the driver's door in the lock position or
press the lock button of the radio remote control until the sliding/tilting roof is
closed ⇒  .

The closing operation stops when one releases the key or the lock button.

WARNING

When the sliding/tilting roof is in the comfort position, the intensity of the wind
noise is much less.

Close the sliding/tilting roof carefully - risk of injury! The force limiter does not
operate with the convenience closing.

The sun screen is also opened automatically when the roof slides open. You can
slide the sun screen into the opened or closed position by hand when the sliding/
tilting roof is closed.



Emergency operation

CAUTION
It may be necessary during winter to remove any ice and snow in the area of the
sliding/tilting roof before opening it in order to prevent damaging the opening
mechanism and the seal.



Closing
Sliding closed/closing the sliding/tilting roof
– Turn the switch to position A ⇒ fig. 22 .
Fig. 23 Detail of the headliner: Points for positioning screwdriver/opening for positioning the
key
£

Using the system

Safety

Driving Tips

General Maintenance

Breakdown assistance

Technical data

44

Unlocking and locking

You can close and/or open the sliding/tilting roof by hand if the system is defect.


Position the flat blade of a screwdriver carefully against the rear edge of the
cover for the electrical drive at the points of the arrows 1 ⇒ fig. 23 on the
left.



Pull the cover down.



Insert an Allen key, Group 4, up to the stop into the opening at the point of the
arrow 2 and close and/or open the sliding/tilting roof ⇒ fig. 23 on the right.



Press on the cover again by first of all inserting the plastic lugs and then pushing the cover up.



Have the fault rectified by a specialist workshop.

Notice
It is necessary after each emergency operation (using Allen key) to move the sliding/tilting roof into the basic position. Here you have to turn the control dial forward to the switch position A ⇒ fig. 22 and press for about 10 seconds.



Lights and Visibility

45

Lights and Visibility
Lights

WARNING
Never drive with only the side lights on - risk of accident! The side lights are
not bright enough to light up the road sufficiently in front of you or to be seen
by other oncoming traffic. In this case, always switch on the low beam when it
is dark or if visibility is poor.

Switching lights on and off 

Notice
● If the light switch is in the position , the ignition key is removed and the
driver's door is open, an acoustic warning signal will sound. The acoustic warning
signal is switched off over the door contact when the driver's door is closed (ignition off). The vehicle can be parked with the side lights on.
Fig. 24 Dash panel: Light switch

Switching on side lights
– Turn the light switch ⇒ fig. 24 into position .



Push the main beam lever slightly forward in the spring-tensioned position in
order to switch on the main beam ⇒ fig. 30 .

Switching off lights (except daylight driving lights)
– Turn the light switch into position.
The dipped beam continues to shine while the ignition is switched on and the
light switch is in the position  or . After switching off the ignition, the low
beam is switched off automatically and only the side lights come on. The parking
light also goes out after the ignition key is removed.
On vehicles with separate lights for daylight driving lights in the fog lights or in
the front bumper, the low beam does not light up when the light switch is in position 0 even if the ignition is switched on.
On models fitted with right-hand steering the position of certain switches differs
from that shown in ⇒ fig. 24 . The symbols which mark the switch positions are
identical, however.

Using the system

Safety

● If the car is parked for a lengthy period, we recommend switching off all lights,
or leaving only the parking lights switched on.
● The switching on of the described lights should only be undertaken in accordance with the legal requirements.

Switching on the low beam and main beam
– Turn the light switch into position .


● If the light switch is in the position  and the ignition key is removed, the
lights will go out.

Driving Tips

If a fault occurs in the light switch, the low beam comes on automatically

● In the event of cool or humid weather conditions, the headlights can be misted
up from inside.
– The temperature difference between interior and external area of the headlight lenses is decisive.
– When the driving lights are switched on, the light outlet surfaces are free
from mist after a short period. The headlight lenses can possibly mist up at the
border areas.
– It also concerns reverse light and turn signal lights.

– This mist has no influence on the life of the lighting system.

“DAY LIGHT”
Switching on daylight driving lights
– Switch on the ignition without turning the light switch out of the position 0 or
£
.

General Maintenance

Breakdown assistance

Technical data

46

Lights and Visibility

Deactivating the function daylight driving lights
– Pull the turn signal light lever towards the steering wheel within 3 seconds after switching on the ignition and at the same time, slide it to the bottom and
hold it in this position for at least 3 seconds.

Automatic driving lamp control

Activating the function daylight driving lights
– Pull the turn signal light lever towards the steering wheel within 3 seconds after switching on the ignition and at the same time, slide it towards the top and
hold it in this position for at least 3 seconds.
On vehicles fitted with an information display, you can also activate or deactivate
in the menu the function daylight driving lights:
Fig. 25 Dash panel: Light switch



Settings
Lights & Vision

On vehicles with separate lights for daylight driving lights in the fog lights or in
the front bumper, the parking lights and the licence plate light do not come on
when activating the function daylight driving lights (neither front nor rear).
If the vehicle is not equipped with separate lights for daylight driving lights, the
combination of the low beam, the parking lights (front and rear) including the licence plate light is used as daylight driving lights.
In some countries, the national legal provisions require that the rear parking lights
also come on together with the separate lights for daylight driving lights when activating the function daylight driving lights.
When the daylight driving lights are switched on, the illumination of the instrument cluster is switched off, however, it is switched on in the position  when it
is dark and the low beam shines with full brightness (100 % of the performance). 

Switching on automatic driving lamp control
– Turn the light switch ⇒ fig. 25 into position .
Switching off automatic driving lamp control
– Turn the light switch to the position 0,  or .
If the light switch is in the position , the symbol illuminates when the ignition
is switched on  next to the light switch. If the low beam is activated with the
light sensor, the symbol  illuminates additionally next to the light switch.
If the light comes on automatically, the side lights and low beam as well as licence
plate light light up at the same time.
If the automatic light control is switched on, the light is regulated with the light
sensor in the rear mirror holder. If the light intensity drops below the set value, e.g
when driving during the day into a tunnel, the low beam and the side lights as
well as the licence plate light come on automatically. If the light intensity increases again, the lights switch off automatically.
Motorway lights
If the automatic light control has been switched on and the vehicle speed is over
140 km/h for at least 10 seconds, the side lights and low beam are switched on
automatically.
If the vehicle speed is below 65 km/h for at least 2 minutes, the lights are switch£
ed off.

Lights and Visibility

47

Parking light

Rain lights
If you switch on the windscreen wipe in the operation rain sensor for longer than
10 seconds or in the operation permanent wipe (position 2 or 3) ⇒ page 54
switching on for longer than 15 seconds, the side lights and low beam are switched on automatically. The light switches off if the windscreen wipe is in operation
rain sensor for more than around 4 minutes or is not switched on in the operation
permanent wipe.

Parking light 
– Switch off the ignition.


Pull the turn signal light lever ⇒ fig. 30 upwards or downwards - the parking
light on the right and left side of the vehicle will be switched on respectively.

The parking light only operates if the ignition is switched off.

WARNING

If you have switched on the right or left turn signal light and you switch off the
ignition, the parking light is not automatically switched on.

The automatic light control only operates as a support. The driver is not released from his responsibility to inspect the light and if necessary to switch on
the light depending on the light conditions. The light sensor cannot detect for
example rain or snow. For these conditions we recommend to switch on the
low beam !

Parking light on both sides
– Turn the light switch into the position  and lock the vehicle.



Coming Home Function

Notice
● Do not affix any stickers in front of the light sensor, so that you do not impair
its function or put it out of operation.
● The same principles as for using the automatic light control also apply to the
light which is switched on manually ⇒ page 45.

The function makes it possible to switch on the lights in the darkness for a short
time after leaving the vehicle.


Cornering lights
The cornering lights are used to illuminate the curves by means of the cone of
light swiveling together with the front headlight with Xenon lights. This function
is active when the speed of the car increases to more than 10km/h.
The swiveling function of the headlights can be switched off/on via the menu
point Assistants in the main menu of the information display ⇒ page 18.



Switch off the ignition.



After opening the driver's door, the function Coming Home is switched on.



Close all the doors and the boot lid and lock the vehicle. After a short time,
switch all lights off.

Depending on equipment fitted the function Coming Home switches on the following lights:

WARNING
If the cornering lights are defective, the headlights are automatically lowered
to the emergency position, which prevents a possible dazzling of oncoming
traffic. Thus the illuminated length of the road is shortened. Drive carefully
and have the car inspected immediately by a specialist garage.

Switching on Coming Home Function
– The light switch is in the position automatic driving lamp control  and the
low beam illuminates.








Parking lights,
Low beam,
Entry lighting in the exterior mirrors,
Licence plate light.

Coming Home Function
The lights go out 10 seconds after closing all the doors and the boot lid.
If a door or the boot lid remains open, the lights go out 60 seconds after switching
£
off the ignition.
Using the system

Safety

Driving Tips

General Maintenance

Breakdown assistance

Technical data

48

Lights and Visibility

The function Coming Home is controlled with the light sensor in the mount of the
interior rear mirror. If the light intensity is higher than the set value of the light
sensor, the Coming Home Function is not switched on after switching off the ignition.

Notice
● If the Leaving Home Function is switched on constantly, the battery will be
heavily discharged particularly in short-haul traffic.
● The switching on of the described lights should only be undertaken in accordance with the legal requirements.

Notice
● If the Coming Home Function is switched on constantly, the battery will be
heavily discharged particularly in short-haul traffic.

● You can change the illumination period for the Leaving Home Function by
means of the Information display.

● The switching on of the described lights should only be undertaken in accordance with the legal requirements.

Tourist light

● You can change the illumination period for the Leaving Home Function by
means of the Information display.

Leaving Home Function
This function makes it possible to switch on the lights when approaching the vehicle.
Switching on Leaving Home Function
– The light switch is in the position automatic driving lamp control .


This mode makes it possible to drive in countries with opposing traffic system,
driving on the left/right, without dazzling the oncoming vehicles. When the mode
“tourist light” is active, the side to side swivel of the headlights is deactivated.
The mode “tourist light” is activated/deactivated via the Information display in the
menu:



Unlock the vehicle with the radio remote control - the lights come on.

Depending on equipment fitted the function Leaving Home switches on the following lights:









Settings
Lights & Vision
■ Travel mode
■ Off
■ Switched on



Fog lights 

Parking lights,
Low beam,
Entry lighting in the exterior mirrors,
Licence plate light.

Leaving Home Function
The function Leaving Home is controlled with the light sensor in the mount of the
interior rear mirror. If the light intensity is higher than the set value of the light
sensor, the Leaving Home Function is not switched on after unlocking the vehicle
with the radio remote control.
After unlocking the vehicle with the radio remote control, the lights come on for
10 seconds. The Leaving Home Function is also switched off after the ignition is
switched on and after locking the vehicle.
If no door is opened within 30 seconds, the lights go out and the vehicle is locked
automatically.

Fig. 26 Dash panel: Light switch

Switch on the front fog lamp
– First of all turn the light switch into position  or  ⇒ fig. 26 .


Pull the light switch into position 1 .

£

Lights and Visibility
The warning light  lights up in the instrument cluster when the fog lights are
switched on ⇒ page 21.

49

The rear fog light is located in the rear light array on the driver's side.


CAUTION
The rear fog light should only be switched on if visibility is particularly poor (conform with any varying legal provisions) to avoid dazzling vehicles behind your vehicle.

Fog lights with the function “CORNER”
The fog lights with the function “CORNER” are designed for a better illumination of the surrounding area near the vehicle when
corning, parking etc.



Instrument lighting 
You can adjust the brightness of the instrument lighting.

The fog lights with the function “CORNER” are adjusted according to the steering
angle or after switching on the turn signal light 1) in the following circumstances:
● the vehicle is stationary and the engine is running or it moves with a speed of
maximum 40 km/h;
● the daylight driving lights are not switched on;
● the low beam is switched on or the light switch is in the position  and the
intensity of the ambient light causes the low beam to be switched on;
● the fog lights are not switched on;
● no reverse gear is engaged.

Notice

Fig. 27 Dash panel: Instrument lighting

If you engage the reverse gear during the active function “CORNER”, both fog
lights illuminate.

Rear fog light 

Instrument lighting
– Switch on the light.


Switching on the rear fog light
– First of all turn the light switch into position  or  ⇒ fig. 26 .




Pull the switch into position 2 .

Turn the control dial ⇒ fig. 27 to the desired intensity of the instrument lighting.

The illumination intensity of the Information display ⇒ page 17 is set automatically.
It is only possible to adjust the instrument lighting with the control dial if the light

intensity drops below the set value of the light sensor.

The warning light  lights up in the instrument cluster when the rear fog light is
switched on ⇒ page 21.
Only the rear fog light of the trailer lights up if the vehicle has a factory-fitted
towing device or a towing device from ŠKODA original accessories and when you
are towing a trailer which is fitted with the rear fog light.

1)

If both switch on versions are conflicting, for example if the steering wheel is turned to the left and
the right turn signal light is switched on, the turn signal light has the higher priority.

Using the system

Safety

Driving Tips

General Maintenance

Breakdown assistance

Technical data

50

Lights and Visibility

Headlamp range adjustment 

Switch for hazard warning lights 

Once the low beam is switched on you can then adapt the range of
the headlights to the load of the vehicle.

Fig. 29 Dash panel: Switch for hazard
warning lights


Fig. 28 Dash panel: Lights and Visibility



All the turn signal lights on the vehicle flash at the same time when the hazard
warning light system is switched on. The indicator light for the turn signals and
the indicator light in the switch also flash at the same time. You can also switch
on the hazard warning light system if the ignition is switched off.

Turn the control dial ⇒ fig. 28 until you have adjusted the low beam so that
oncoming traffic is not dazzled.

Settings

The hazard warning light system is switched on automatically if an airbag is deployed in the event of an accident.

The positions correspond approximately to the following vehicle loads:
- Front seats occupied, luggage compartment empty.
1 All seats occupied, luggage compartment empty.
2 All seats occupied, luggage compartment laden.
3 Driver seat occupied, luggage compartment laden.

Please comply with any legal requirements when using the hazard warning light
system.

Notice
Switch on the hazard warning light system if, for example:

CAUTION
Headlamp range adjustment should always be adjusted in a way that:


it does not dazzle other road users, especially oncoming traffic,



and the range is sufficient for safe driving.

Notice
Headlights fitted with Xenon bulbs adapt automatically to the load and driving
state of the vehicle (e.g. accelerating, braking) when the ignition is switched on
and when driving. Vehicles which are equipped with Xenon bulbs do not have a
manual headlight range adjustment control.

Press switch  ⇒ fig. 29 to switch the hazard warning light system on or off.





you encounter traffic congestion;



your vehicle breaks down or an emergency situation occurs.



Lights and Visibility

The turn signal   and main beam lever 
The parking lights and headlight flasher are also switched on and
off using the turn signal and main beam lever.

51

Information concerning the function of the lights.
● The turn signal system only operates when the ignition is switched on. The
corresponding warning light  or  in the instrument cluster also flashes.
● The turn signal is automatically cancelled after negotiating a curve.
● The indicator light flashes at twice its normal rate if a bulb of the turn signal
light fails.

CAUTION
Use main beam or the headlight flasher only if this does not risk dazzling other
road users.

Notice
Fig. 30 Turn signal and main beam lever

The turn signal and main beam lever perform the following functions:
Right  and left  turn signal light
– Push the lever upwards A or downwards ⇒ fig. 30 B .


If you only wish to flash three times (the so-called convenience turn signal),
push the lever briefly up to the upper or lower pressure point and release it.
This function can be activated/deactivated in the Information display
⇒ page 17.



Turn signal for changing lanes - in order to only flash briefly, move the lever up
or down to the pressure point and hold it in this position.

Use only in accordance with the legal requirements the described lighting and sig
nal systems.

Interior lighting
Interior vehicle lighting - Variant 1

Main beam 
– Switch on the low beam.


Push the lever forwards in direction of arrow C (spring-tensioned position).



If you push the lever towards the steering wheel in direction of arrow D
(spring-tensioned position) the main beam is switched off.

Headlight flasher 
– Pull the lever towards the steering wheel (spring-tensioned position) in direction of arrow D - the main beam and warning light  in the instrument cluster come on.
Parking light
For a description of the operation, see ⇒ page 47, Parking light.
Using the system

Safety

Driving Tips

Fig. 31 Interior vehicle lighting - Variant
1

Switching on the interior lighting
– Press switch A towards the edge of the light, the symbol  ⇒ fig. 31 appears.
Switching off the interior lighting
– Press the switch A into the middle position O.
Operating the lights with the door contact switch
– Press switch A towards the centre of the light, the symbol  appears.

General Maintenance

Breakdown assistance

Technical data

£

52

Lights and Visibility

Reading lights
– Press switch B to switch the reading light on/off.

Operating the lights with the door contact switch
– Turn the switch to the position .

If operating lights with the door contact switch is enabled (switch A is in position
), the light will come on when:

The same principles apply for interior lighting version 2 as for ⇒ page 52.





Lighting of the storage compartment on front passenger side

the vehicle is unlocked,
one of the doors is opened,
or the ignition key is removed.

If operating lights with the door contact switch is enabled (switch A is in position
), the light will turn off when:






the vehicle is locked,
the ignition is switched on,
about 30 seconds after all the doors have been closed.



When opening the flap of the storage compartment on the front passenger
side the lighting in the storage compartment comes on.



The light switches on automatically when the parking light is switched on and
goes out when the flap is closed.



Front door warning light

If a door remains open, or if the switch A is in position , the interior lighting
goes out after 10 minutes to prevent the battery from discharging.

Notice
We recommend having these bulbs replaced by a specialist garage.



Interior vehicle lighting - Variant 2
Fig. 33 Front door: Warning light

The warning light is located in the door trim panel below ⇒ fig. 33 .
The warning light goes on every time the door is opened. The light goes out about
10 minutes after opening the door in order to avoid discharging the battery of the
vehicle.
Fig. 32 Interior vehicle lighting - Variant
2

Switching on the interior lighting
– Turn the switch to the position  ⇒ fig. 32 .
Switching off the interior lighting
– Turn the switch to the position O .

There is a reflector installed on some vehicles instead of the warning light.



Entry lighting
The lighting is positioned on the bottom edge of the exterior mirror.
The light beam is directed towards the entry area of the front door.

£

Lights and Visibility
The light comes on after the doors have been locked or on opening the boot lid.
The light goes out after switching on the ignition or up to 30 seconds after closing
all the doors and the boot lid.

For the sake of the environment
As soon as the window is de-iced or free from mist, the heating should be switched off. The reduced current consumption will have a favourable effect on fuel
economy ⇒ page 166, Saving electricity.

If a door or the boot lid remains open, the light goes out within 2 minutes if the
ignition is switched off.

Notice

WARNING
If the entry light comes on, do not touch its cover - risk of burns!

53



● If the on-board voltage drops, the rear window heater switches off automatically, in order to provide sufficient electrical energy for the engine control
⇒ page 191, Automatic consumer shut-off.
● The position and the shape of the switch can differ depending on equipment
installed in the vehicle.

Luggage compartment light
The lighting comes on automatically when the boot lid is opened. If the lid remains
open for more than about 10 minutes, the luggage compartment lighting switches

off automatically.



Sun visors

Visibility
Rear window heater

Fig. 35 Sun visor: Swivelling out/double sun visor

You can pull the sun visor for the driver or front passenger out of the fixture and
swivel it toward the door in the direction of the arrow 1 ⇒ fig. 35 .
The vanity mirrors in the sun visors are provided with covers. Push the cover in direction of arrow 2 .
Fig. 34 Switch for rear window heater



You can switch the rear window heater on or off by pressing the switch
⇒ fig. 34 - the indicator light in the switch comes on or goes out.

The rear window heater only operates when the engine is running.
The rear window heater switches off automatically after 10 minutes.

Using the system

Safety

Driving Tips



On vehicles which are equipped with double sun visor, you can also unfold the
auxiliary visor in direction of arrow 3 after swivelling the sun visor.

WARNING
The sun visors must not be swivelled to the side windows into the deployment area of the head airbags if any objects, such as ball-point pens etc. are
attached to them. This might result in injuries to the occupants if the head airbag is deployed.

General Maintenance

Breakdown assistance

Technical data



54

Lights and Visibility

Windshield wiper and wash system

Sun screen

Windshield wiper
You can operate the windscreen wipers and automatic wipe/wash
using the windscreen wiper lever.

Fig. 36 Unroll/remove the sun screen

The sun screen is located in a housing on the luggage compartment cover. If required, you can remove the housing with the sun screen from the luggage compartment cover.

Fig. 37 Windscreen wiper lever

Pulling out
– Pull the sun screen at the loop A and hang it in the brackets B ⇒ fig. 36 .

The windscreen wiper lever ⇒ fig. 37 has the following positions:
Finger-operated wiping
– If you wish to wipe the windscreen only briefly, push the lever into the sprung
position 4 . If you hold the lever in the lower position for more than 1 second,
the wiper wipes faster.

Folding
– Take the sun screen out of the brackets B and hold it at the loop A so that it
can roll up slowly and without damage into the housing on the luggage compartment cover.

Intermittent wiping
– Position the lever up into position 1 .

Removing
– Unhook the fastening elements from the luggage compartment cover C .


Roll up the sun screen again into the housing on the luggage compartment
cover.



Press the locking button in the direction of arrow 1 and take out the sun
screen in the direction or arrow 2 .





Set with the switch A the desired break between the individual wiper
strokes.

Slow wipe
– Position the lever up into position 2 .
Fast wipe
– Position the lever up into position 3 .

£

Lights and Visibility
Automatic wipe/wash for windscreen
– Pull the lever towards the steering wheel into sprung position 5 , the wash
system sprays immediately, the windscreen wiper starts wiping a little later.
The wash system and the windscreen wiper operate simultaneously at a
speed of more than 120 km/h.


Release the lever. The windscreen wash system stops and the wiper continues for another 3 - 4 wiper strokes (depending on the period of spraying of the
windscreen). At a speed of more than 2 km/h, the wiper wipes once again 5
seconds after the last wiper stroke in order to wipe the last drops from the
windscreen. This function can be activated/deactivated by a specialist garage.

Rain sensor
– Move the lever into position 1 .


You can set the sensitivity of the sensor individually with switch A .

Wiping the rear window pane
– Push the lever away from the steering wheel into position 6 - the widescreen
wiper will operate every 6 seconds.
Automatic wipe/wash for the rear window pane
– Press the lever from the steering wheel forward into the sprung position 7 ,
the wash system sprays immediately, the windscreen wiper starts wiping a little later. As long as you hold the lever in this position, the wiper operates as
well as the wash system.


Letting go of the lever will cause the windscreen wash system to stop and the
wiper to continue for another 2 - 3 wiper strokes (depending on the period of
spraying of the windscreen). The lever will stay in position after releasing it
6.

Switching windscreen wipers off
– Move the lever back into its home position 0 .

If the intermittent wipe is switched on, the intervals are also controlled depending
on speed.
The rain sensor automatically regulates the break between the individual wiper
strokes depending on the intensity of the rain.
The rear window will be wiped again if the front window wipers are on when reverse gear is selected.
Top up with wash liquid ⇒ page 191.
Winter position
If the windscreen wipers are in rest position, they cannot be folded out from the
windscreen. For this reason we recommend adjusting the windscreen wipers in
winter so that they can be folded out from the windscreen easily.
You can set this rest position as follows:
● Switch on the windscreen wipers.
● Switch off the ignition. The windscreen wipers remain in the position in which
they were when switching off the ignition.
You can also use the service position ⇒ page 57 as a winter position.

WARNING
● Properly maintained windscreen wiper blades are essential for clear visibility and safe driving ⇒ page 57.
● Do not use the windscreen washer system at low temperatures, without
heating the windscreen beforehand. Otherwise the window cleaner could
freeze on the windscreen and restrict the view to the front.
● The rain sensor only operates as a support. The driver is not released from
the responsibility to set the function of the windscreen wipers manually depending on the visibility conditions.

After the windscreen wiper switches off each time or the ignition switches off for
the third time, the position of the windscreen wiper changes, this counteracts an
early fatigue of the wiper rubbers.
The windscreen wipers and the wash system only operate if the ignition is switched on and the bonnet is closed1).
1)

On vehicles which do not have a contact switch for the bonnet, the windshield wiper and wash system operates also when the bonnet is opened.

Using the system

Safety

Driving Tips

55

General Maintenance

Breakdown assistance

Technical data

£

56

Lights and Visibility
CAUTION

● In cold temperatures and in winter, check before the trip or before switching
on the ignition that the wiper blades are not frozen. Switching on windscreen
wipers when the blades are frozen to the windscreen may result in damage both
to the blades and the motor of the windscreen wipers!
● If you switch off the ignition while the windscreen wipers are on, the wipers
will sweep in the same mode the next time the ignition is switched on. At low
temperatures, the wipers may freeze to the window between switching off the ignition and the next time you switch the ignition on again.


Carefully detach frozen wiper blades from the front or rear window.



Remove snow and ice from the window wipers before driving.

Notice
● If the slower 2 or the faster 3 wiper setting is switched on ⇒ fig. 37 and the
vehicle speed decreases to below 4 km/h, the lower wiper step is switched on automatically. At a speed increase of more than 8 km/h the previous wiper setting is
established again.
● If there is an obstacle on the windscreen, the wiper will try to push away the
obstacle. If the obstacle continues to block the wiper, the wiper stops automatically after 5 attempts to eliminate the obstacle, in order to avoid a damage to the
wiper. Remove the obstacle and and switch on the wiper again.
● The windscreen washer nozzles for the windscreen are heated when the engine is running and the outside temperature is less than +10 °C.

Activation/deactivation
The function of the automatic rear window wiper is activated/deactivated in the
information display in the menu:
■ Settings
■ Lights & Vision
■ Rear wiper

Notice
The function of the automatic rear window wiper is only valid for Combi vehicles
which are equipped with an Iinformation display. The function is activated in the
factory.

Headlight cleaning system
The headlights are being cleaned after the windscreen has been sprayed for the
first time and fifth time, the low beam or main beam are switched on and the
windscreen wiper lever was held in the position 5 ⇒ fig. 37 for about 1 second.
The headlight washer nozzles are moved forward out of the bumper by the water
pressure for cleaning the headlights.
You should remove stubborn dirt (such as insect residues) from the headlight lenses at regular intervals, for example when refuelling. Please refer to the following
guidelines ⇒ page 173, The headlight lenses.

● The content of the windscreen wiper reservoir is 3 litres. On vehicles which are
equipped with a headlight cleaning system, the content of the reservoir is 5.5 litres. On vehicles fitted with auxiliary heating, the content of the windscreen wiper

reservoir is 4.5 litres.

You should remove any snow from the fixtures of the washer nozzles and clear ice
in winter with a de-icing spray in order to ensure proper operation of the cleaning
system.

Automatic rear window wiper (Combi)

Never remove the nozzles from the headlamp cleaning system by hand - risk of
damage!

If the windshield wiper is in positions 2 ⇒ fig. 37 or 3 the rear view window is
wiped every 30/10 seconds if the vehicle's speed exceeds 5 km/h.
When the rain sensor is active (the lever is in the position 1 ) the function is only
active if the front window wipers continue to operate (no break between each
wiping process).



CAUTION


Lights and Visibility

Replacing wiper blades for the windscreen wipers

57

Juddering or smearing of the wiper blades could then be due to wax residues left
on the windscreen by vehicle washing in automatic vehicle wash systems. It is
therefore important to degrease the lips of the winscreen wiper blades after every pass through an automatic vehicle wash system.

WARNING
● The ignition must not be switched on if the front windscreen wiper arms
are folded out. The wiper blades would move back into their rest position and
while doing so damage the paintwork of the bonnet.
Fig. 38 Wiper blade for the windscreen
wiper

One cannot fold out the wiper arms in the rest position from the windscreen. Before replacing the wiper arms you must put them into the service position.
Service position for changing wiper blades
– Close the bonnet.

● If the windscreen wipers are handled carelessly, there is a risk of damage
to the windscreen.
● You should clean the wiper blades regularly with a windscreen cleaner in
order to avoid any smears. Clean a wiper blade with a sponge or cloth if it is
very dirty, for example from insect residues.
● Replace the windscreen wiper blades once or twice a year for safety reasons. These can be bought from an authorised ŠKODA Service Partner.



Replacing the wiper blade on the rear window wiper



Switch the ignition on and then again off.



Then press the windscreen wiper lever in the position 4 ⇒ fig. 37 within 20
seconds - the wiper arms move into the service position.

Removing the wiper blade
– Fold windscreen wiper arm out from the windscreen and position the wiper
blade at right angles to the wiper arm ⇒  .


Take off the wiper blade in direction of arrow ⇒ fig. 38 ⇒ 

.

Attaching the wiper blade
– Push the new wiper blade over the wiper arm and turn the wiper blade into
the vertical position.


Check whether the wiper blade is correctly attached.



Fold the windscreen wiper arms onto the window and switch on the ignition.
By pressing the window wiper lever into the sprung position 4 ⇒ fig. 38 or
when driving at a speed greater than 4 km/h, the windscreen wiper arms move
back into the rest position.

Windscreen wiper blades in proper condition are essential to obtain good visibility.
Wiper blades should not be allowed to become dirtied by dust, insect remains and
preserving wax.
Using the system

Safety

Driving Tips

Fig. 39 Wiper blade for the rear window

Removing the wiper blade
– Fold windscreen wiper arm out from the windscreen and position the wiper
blade at right angles to the wiper arm ⇒ fig. 39 .


Hold the window wiper arm at the top end with one hand.



With the other hand unlock the locking button A in the direction of arrow and
£
remove the wiper blade.

General Maintenance

Breakdown assistance

Technical data

58

Lights and Visibility

Attaching the wiper blade
– Position the wiper blade onto the wiper arm and lock the locking button A .


Check whether the wiper blade is correctly attached.



Fold the windscreen wiper arm back onto the windscreen.

The same remarks apply here as for ⇒ page 57.

If the automatic dimming is switched on, the mirror dims automatically depending
on the light striking the mirror from the rear. The mirror has no lever on the bottom edge of the mirror. After the reverse gear is engaged, the mirror always
moves back into the normal position.



Do not attach external navigation devices on the windscreen or in the vicinity of
the automatic dimming interior mirror ⇒  .

WARNING

Rear-view mirror

The display lighting of the external navigation device may cause malfunction
of the automatic dimming interior mirror – risk of accident.

Manual dimming interior rear-view mirror

Notice
● Automatic mirror dimming operates only properly if the sun screen for the rear
window in the housing on the luggage compartment cover is not in use or the
light striking the interior rear-view mirror is not affected by other objects.

Basic setting
– Pull the lever on the bottom edge of the mirror forward.
Dimming mirror
– Pull the lever on the bottom edge of the mirror back.

Automatic dimming interior mirror



● Do not affix any stickers in front of the light sensor, so that you do not impair
the automatic dimming function or put it out of operation.
● If you switch off the automatic dimming interior rear-view mirror, also the exterior mirror dimming is switched off.



Exterior mirror
You can adjust the exterior mirrors electrically.

Fig. 40 Automatic dimming interior mirror

Switching on the automatic dimming
– Press the button B ⇒ fig. 40 , the warning light A lights up.
Switching off the automatic dimming
– Press again the button B - the warning light goes out A .

Fig. 41 Inner part of door: Rotary knob

Adjust the rear mirror before commencing to drive so that there is a clear view to
£
the rear.

Lights and Visibility
Heating of the external mirror
– Turn the rotary knob to position  ⇒ fig. 41 .

WARNING

The exterior mirror heater only operates when the engine is running and up to an
outside temperature of +20 °C.
Adjusting left and right exterior mirrors simultaneously
– Turn the rotary knob to position . The movement of the mirror surface is identical to the movement of the rotary knob.
The adjustment of both mirrors simultaneously or each individual mirror is possible in the Information display ⇒ page 19 in the menu point Mirror adjust. (Mirror
adjust.).
Adjusting the right-hand exterior mirror
– Turn the rotary knob to position . The movement of the mirror surface is identical to the movement of the rotary knob.
Switching off operating control
– Turn the rotary knob to position .
Folding in both exterior mirrors
– Turn the rotary knob to position .
Fold in the exterior mirrors using the remote control key
– If all the windows are closed, press the unlock button 3 on the radio remote
control ⇒ fig. 18 for approx. 2 seconds.
Tilting surface of front passenger exterior mirror
On vehicles fitted with a memory for the driver seat, the surface of the mirror tilts
down slightly when the rear gear is engaged and the rotary knob is in the position  ⇒ fig. 41 . This provides an aid in seeing the kerb of the pavement when
parking the car.
The mirror returns into its initial position, after the rotary knob is moved out of the
position  and put into another position or if the speed is more than 15 km/h.
Memory for exterior mirrors
On vehicles fitted with a memory for the driver seat, the relevant setting of the
exterior mirror is also stored automatically when the seat position is stored
⇒ page 62.

Using the system

Safety

59

Driving Tips

● Convex (curved outward) or a spherical exterior mirrors increase the vision
field. They do, however, make objects appear smaller in the mirror. These mirrors are only of limited use, therefore, for estimating distances to the following vehicles.
● Use whenever possible the interior rear mirror, for estimating the distances to the following vehicles.

Notice
● If the exterior mirrors are folded in using the remote control of the vehicle key,
these are folded back into the driving position after opening the door or switching
on the ignition.
● If the exterior mirrors are folded in using the rotary knob ⇒ fig. 41 , they can
only be folded back into the driving position using the rotary knob.
● If the exterior mirrors were folded in using the remote control of the vehicle
key and if the rotary knob was in the fold-in position before switching on the ignition, the mirrors remain in the fold-in position the next time the ignition is switched on. Folding back into the driving position is performed by actuating the rotary
knob in a different position from the fold-in position.
● Do not touch the surfaces of the exterior mirrors if the exterior mirror heater is
switched on.
● You can set the exterior mirrors by hand, if the power setting function fails at
any time, by pressing on the edge of the mirror surface.
● Contact your specialist garage if a fault exists with the power setting of the
exterior mirrors.



Automatic dimming exterior mirror on the driver's side
The exterior mirror on the driver's side is dimmed together with the interior mirror.
If the automatic dimming is switched on, the mirror dims automatically depending
on the light striking the mirror from the rear.
After the reverse gear is engaged, the mirror always moves back into the normal
(not dimmed) position.

General Maintenance

Breakdown assistance

Technical data

£

60

Lights and Visibility
Notice

● Automatic mirror dimming operates only properly if the sun screen for the rear
window is not in use or the light striking the rear of the interior rear-view mirror is
not affected by other objects.
● Do not affix any stickers in front of the light sensor, so that you do not impair
the automatic dimming function or put it out of operation.
● If you switch off the automatic dimming interior rear-view mirror, also the exterior mirror dimming is switched off.



Seats and Stowage

61

Seats and Stowage
Front seats

WARNING (Continued)

Basic information

● Ensure that there are no objects in the footwell as any objects may get behind the pedals during a driving or braking manoeuvre. You would then no
longer be able to operate the clutch, to brake or accelerate.

The front seats have a wide range of different settings and can thus be matched
to the physical characteristics of the driver and front passenger.

● Do not transport any objects on the front passenger seat except objects
(e.g. child safety seat) provided for this purpose - risk of accident!



Correct adjustment of the seats is particularly important for:
● safely and quickly reaching the controls,
● a relaxed, fatigue-free body position,
● achieving the maximum protection offered by the seat belts and the airbag
system.

Adjusting the front seats

WARNING


Never transport more occupants than the maximum seating in the vehicle.

● Each occupant must correctly fasten the seat belt belonging to the seat.
Children must be fastened ⇒ page 148, Transporting children safely with a
suitable restraint system.
● The front seats and the head restraints must always be adjusted to match
the body size of the seat occupant as well as the seat belts must always be
correctly fastened in order to provide an optimal protection for you and your
occupants.
● Always keep your feet in the footwell when the car is being driven - never
place your feet on the instrument panel, out of the window or on the surfaces
of the seats. This is particularly important for the front seat passenger. You
will be exposed to increased risk of injury if it becomes necessary to apply the
brake or in the event of an accident. If an airbag is deployed, you may suffer
fatal injuries when adopting an incorrect seated position!
● It is important for the driver and front passenger to maintain a distance of
at least 25 cm from the steering wheel or dash panel. Not maintaining this
minimum distance will mean that the airbag system will not be able to properly protect you - hazard! The front seats and the head restraints must always
also be correctly adjusted to match the body size of the occupant.

Fig. 42 Controls at seat

Adjusting a seat in a forward/back direction
– Pull the lever 1 ⇒ fig. 42 up and push the seat into the desired position.


Release the lever 1 and push the seat further until the lock is heard to engage.

Adjusting height of seat
– Lift the seat if required by pulling or pumping lever 2 upwards.


Lower the seat if required by pushing or pumping lever 2 downwards.

Adjust the angle of the seat backrest
– Relieve any pressure on the seat backrest (do not lean on it) and turn the
handwheel 3 to adjust the angle of the backrest.
Adjusting lumbar support
– Turn the wheel 4 until you have set the most comfortable curvature of the
seat upholstery in the area of your spine.

Using the system

Safety

Driving Tips

General Maintenance

Breakdown assistance

Technical data

£

62

Seats and Stowage
Adjust the angle of the seat cushion
– Press the switch A at the front in the direction of arrow 2 or at the back in
the direction of arrow 3 .

The driver's seat should be adjusted in such a way that the pedals can be fully
pressed to the floor with slightly bent legs.
The seat backrest on the driver's seat should be adjusted in such a way that the
upper point of the steering wheel can be easily reached with slightly bent arms.

Adjusting the seat backrest
– Press the switch B in the direction of the desired setting.

WARNING


Adjusting lumbar support
– Press the switch C at the front in order to enlarge the curvature of the lumbar support.

Only adjust the driver seat when the vehicle is stationary - risk of injury!

● Take care when adjusting the seat! Adjusting the seat without care can
lead to bruises or injuries.



Press the switch C rear in order to reduce the curvature of the lumbar support.



Press the switch C top in order to adjust the curvature of the lumbar support
higher.

Adjusting front seats electrically



Press the switch C bottom in order to adjust the curvature of the lumbar support lower.

Adjusting seats

Switch A is operated in order to move the seat up/down and forward/back, while
switch B is operated in order to move the seat backrest forward or back.

● The seat backrests must not be angled too far back when driving otherwise this will affect proper operation of the seat belts and of the airbag system - risk of injury!



WARNING


Only adjust the driver seat when the vehicle is stationary - risk of injury!

● Caution when adjusting the seat! You may suffer injuries or bruises as a result of adjusting the seat without paying proper attention.
● In view of the fact that the seats can also be adjusted when the ignition is
switched off (even when ignition key withdrawn), you should never leave children unattended in the car.
Fig. 43 Side view: Controls for adjusting the seat/seat setting switch

Adopt the correct seated position before setting ⇒ page 61.
Adjusting a seat in a forward/back direction
– Press the switch A ⇒ fig. 43 forwards or backwards 1 .
Set the height of the seat cushion
– Press the switch A upwards or downwards.

● The seat backrests must not be angled too far back when driving otherwise this will affect proper operation of the seat belts and of the airbag system - risk of injury!

Notice
If the movement of the seat is inadvertently interrupted during an adjustment,
once again press the switch in the appropriate direction and continue with the ad
justment of the seat to the end.

Seats and Stowage

Storing setting

63

Emergency Off
You can interrupt the setting operation at any time, if you operate any button of
the driver seat.

Notice
● When storing settings with the memory buttons, we recommend that you begin with the front button and assign a memory button to each additional driver.


Fig. 44 Driver seat: Memory buttons
and SET button

Storing seat and exterior mirror settings for driving forward
– Switch on the ignition.


Each new setting stored with the same button erases the previous setting.

● Each time you store the seat and exterior mirror settings for driving forward
you also have to re-store the individual setting of the exterior mirror on the passenger side for reversing.

Assigning the remote control key to the memory buttons

Adjust the seat ⇒ page 62.

After storing the settings of the seat and exterior mirrors, you have 10 seconds in
order to assign the remote control to the appropriate memory button.



Adjust both exterior mirrors ⇒ page 58.



Withdraw the ignition key.



Press button SET A ⇒ fig. 44 .





Press one of the memory buttons B within 10 seconds after pressing the button SET - an acknowledgement signal confirms that the seat setting is stored..

Press the unlock button ⇒ page 37, after the successful assignment an audible
signal will sound. The setting is stored with the memory button which you
have selected.

Storing exterior mirror setting for reversing
– Switch on the ignition.


Turn the exterior mirror control to position  ⇒ page 58.



Engage reverse gear.



Move the right exterior mirror into the desired position ⇒ page 58.



Take the vehicle out of gear. The set position of the exterior mirror is stored.

Station keys
Memory for the seat offers the possibility to store the individual driver seat and
external mirror position. An individual position can be allocated to each of the
three memory buttons B ⇒ fig. 44 , that is three in total. After pressing the corresponding memory button B , the seat and the exterior mirror are automatically
moved into the positions which have been allocated to this button ⇒ page 63.

Using the system

Safety

Driving Tips



If you wish to be able to retrieve the settings which are stored in the memory by
also using the remote control, you have to assign the remote control to a memory
button in each case.
If you wish, you can obtain an additional remote control key from an authorised
ŠKODA Service partner and then assign the remote control key to another memory button.

Notice
● If the remote control had previously been assigned to another memory button,
this setting is then erased by the new assignment.
● If you assign the remote control to a memory button which has already been
assigned to a remote control, the old assignment is also replaced by a new assign£
ment in this case.

General Maintenance

Breakdown assistance

Technical data

64

Seats and Stowage

● The assignment of the radio remote control to a memory button is retained,
however, after reassigning the seats and exterior mirrors.
● After the successful assignment, the turn signal lights flash and an audible
signal will sound as a confirmation. The setting is stored with the memory button
which you have selected.

Notice



If the inclination angle of the seat backrest is more than 102° in relation to the
seat cushion, the backrest remains in this position, after reaching this angle, when
retrieving the setting by briefly pressing the memory button. Once the stored angle is reached, it is necessary to press the memory button and hold it pressed until

the seat is in the stored position.

Retrieving settings of the seat and mirrors
You can retrieve the stored settings either with the memory buttons or with the remote control.

Head restraints

Retrieving settings with memory buttons
– In order to retrieve the stored setting, you have two possibilities:


By pressing briefly: briefly press the desired memory button B ⇒ fig. 44 . The
seat and exterior mirror are moved automatically into the stored positions (this
applies only if the ignition is switched on and the speed is less than 5 km/h).



Memory keying: Press and hold the desired memory button B pressed long
enough until the seat and the exterior mirror are moved into the stored positions.

Retrieving settings with remote control
– If the driver door is closed and the ignition is switched off, briefly press the unlock button of the remote control ⇒ page 37 and then open the driver door.


The seat and exterior mirrors now move automatically into the stored positions.

Retrieving setting of exterior mirror for reversing
– Turn the rotary knob for the exterior mirror setting into the position 
⇒ page 58 before engaging the reverse gear.
The mirror returns into its initial position, after the rotary knob is moved out of the
position  and put into another position or if the speed is more than 15 km/h.
Emergency Off
You can interrupt the setting operation at any time, if you operate any button of
the driver seat.

Fig. 45 Head restraint: Adjusting/pulling out

Best protection is achieved if the top edge of the head restraint is at the same
level as the upper part of your head.
Adjusting the height of a head restraint
– Grasp the side of the head restraint with both hands and push it in upward direction as desired ⇒ fig. 45 - left.


Move the head restraint downwards if required by pressing and holding the
safety button with one hand ⇒ fig. 45 - right and by pressing with the other
hand the head restraint downwards.

Removing and installing a head restraint
– Pull the head restraint up out of the seat backrest as far as the stop (on the
rear head restraints fold forward the seat backrest).


Press the locking button in the direction of arrow ⇒ fig. 45 - right and pull the
head restraint out.



To re-insert the head restraint, push it down into the seat backrest far enough
£
until you hear the locking button engage.

Seats and Stowage
The position of the front and rear outer head restraints is adjustable in height.
The middle rear head restraint is adjustable in two positions.



The head restraints must be adjusted to match the size of the seat occupant. Correctly adjusted head restraints together with the seat belts offer effective protection for the occupants ⇒ page 133, Correct seated position.

WARNING

WARNING

● Do not drive under any circumstance with removed head restraints - risk of
injury!
● If the rear seats are occupied, the rear head restraint must not be in the
lower position.

● Do not drive under any circumstance with removed head restraints - risk of
injury!

Fig. 46 Rear seats: middle head restraint

IIn certain countries national legal provisions also require the equipment of the
rear seat with fixing eyes for child seat using the “Top Tether” system
⇒ page 154, Attaching child seat using the “Top Tether” system. For vehicles,
which are equipped with such fixing eyes, a deviating sequence for removing the
middle head restraint must be observed.
Removing and installing the rear middle head restraint
– Pull the head restraint out of the seat backrest as far as the stop.
Press the locking button in the direction of arrow A , press simultaneously the
locking button into the opening B using a flat screwdriver with a width of
maximum 5 mm and pull out the head restraint.

Using the system

Safety





Rear seats
Folding the rear seats forwards

Middle rear head restraint



To re-insert the head restraint, push it down into the seat backrest far enough
until you hear the locking button engage.

● The head restraints must be correctly adjusted in order to offer effective
protection for the occupants in the event of an accident.

● The head restraints must be correctly adjusted in order to offer effective
protection for the occupants in the event of an accident.

● If the rear seats are occupied, the rear head restraint must not be in the
lower position.

65

Driving Tips

Fig. 47 Fold the seat cushion forwards/unlock the seat backrest

To enlarge the luggage compartment, the rear seats can be folded forwards, if
necessary remove the seat cushions. The rear seats can be folded forward individually on vehicles with divided rear seats.
Folding seats forwards
– Before folding the rear seats forwards, you must adapt the position of the
front seats in such a way that they are not damaged when the rear seats are
folded forwards.


Pull up the seat cushion in direction of arrow 1 and fold forwards in direction
£
of arrow 2 ⇒ fig. 47 .

General Maintenance

Breakdown assistance

Technical data

66

Seats and Stowage



Press the unlocking knob A and fold the seat backrest forwards.

If the front seats are too far back, we recommend that you have the rear head restraints removed before the seat backrests are folded forward. Store the removed
head restraints in such a way that they cannot be damaged or soiled. Please refer
to the guidelines ⇒ page 67.

Move seats into the initial position

WARNING (Continued)

● Pay attention that the seat backrests are correctly interlocked. It is only
then that the three-point seat belt for the middle seat can reliably fulfil its
function.


● Before folding the seat backrest back into the secure position, place the
rear lateral seat belt behind the edge of the side trim panel. Take suitable
measures to prevent that the seat belt is jammed between the seat backrest
and the side trim panel and is thus damaged.



Removing the seats

Fig. 48 Lock the seat backrest

Move seats into the initial position
– Install the head restraint in the slightly lifted seat backrest.


Place the rear lateral seat belt C ⇒ fig. 48 behind the edge of the side trim
panel.



Then push the seat backrest back into the upright position until the securing
knob clicks into place - check by pulling on the seat backrest.



Make sure that the red pin B is covered ⇒ fig. 47 .



Move the seat cushion into its original position.

WARNING
● The belts and the belt locks must be in their original position after folding
back the seat cushions and the seat backrests - they must be ready to use.
● The seat backrests must be securely interlocked in position so that no objects in the luggage compartment can slide forwards if there is sudden braking - risk of injury!

Fig. 49 Removing the seats

You can enlarge the luggage compartment on vehicles with divided rear seats by
removing the rear seat.
Removing
– Fold the seat cushion forwards completely.


Press the wire clamps in the direction of the arrow ⇒ fig. 49 and remove the
seat cushion from its holder.

Install
– Press the wire clamps in the direction of the arrow and place it in its holder.


Fold the seat cushion back into its original position.

CAUTION
For vehicles with heated rear seats it is necessary to disconnect the plug connection for the power supply before removing the seat cushion. For reinstalling the
seat cushion it is necessary to re-connect the plug connection.



Seats and Stowage

Rear seat armrest

67



With repeated pressing of the switch, the intensity of the heating is downregulated up to the switch-off. The intensity of the heating is indicated by the
number of illuminated warning lights in the switch.



If you set the heating of the rear seats to the highest intensity - 3rd stage, it is
automatically switched over to the 2nd stage after 10 minutes (two warning
lights light up in the switch).

WARNING

Fig. 50 Rear seats: Armrest



You can fold down the armrest at the loop to enhance occupant comfort
⇒ fig. 50 .

Seat heaters



If, as an occupant, you have a subdued pain and/or temperature sensitivity,
e.g. through medication, paralysis or because of chronic illness (e.g. diabetes),
we recommend not to use the seat heating. This can lead to burns on the
back, the posterior and the legs which are difficult to heal. If the seat heating
is used, we recommend to make regular breaks in your journey when driving
long distances, so that in specific cases as mentioned above the body can recuperate from the stress of the journey. Please consult your doctor, who can
evaluate your specific condition.

CAUTION
● You should not kneel on the seats or otherwise apply pressure at specific
points in order to avoid damaging the heating elements of the seat heaters.
● Do not use the seat heating if the seats are not occupied by persons or if objects are fastened or stored on them, for example a child seat, a bag etc. A fault of
the heating elements in the seat heating can occur.


Do not clean the seats moist ⇒ page 175.

Notice
● The seat heating should only be switched on when the engine is running. This
has a significant effect of saving on the battery capacity.
Fig. 51 Regulator for heating the front seats/rear seats

You can electrically heat the seat backrests and the surfaces of the front seats
and the two outer rear seats.

● If the on-board voltage drops, the seat heating is switched off automatically,
in order to provide sufficient electrical energy for the engine control ⇒ page 191,
Automatic consumer shut-off.



You can switch on and regulate the seat heating of the driver or front passenger seat by pressing the surface of the regulator at the point at which the
symbol is located  ⇒ fig. 51 - left.

luggage compartment



You can switch on and adjust the heaters of the left or right rear seats by
pressing the regulator  ⇒ fig. 51 - right.

Loading the luggage compartment



With one press, you can switch the heating to highest intensity - 3rd stage,
which is indicated by the lighting up of the three warning lights in the switch.

Please observe the following in the interest of having good handling characteris£
tics of your vehicle:



Using the system

Safety

Driving Tips

General Maintenance

Breakdown assistance

Technical data

68

Seats and Stowage



Distribute the items of luggage as evenly as possible.



Place heavy objects as far forward as possible.



Attach the items of luggage to the lashing eyes or the fixing net ⇒ page 68.

In the event of an accident, there is such a high kinetic energy which is produced
by small and light objects that they can cause severe injuries. The magnitude of
the kinetic energy depends on the speed at which the vehicle is travelling and on
the weight of the object. The speed at which the vehicle is travelling is in this case
the more significant factor.
Example: In the event of a frontal collision at a speed of 50 km/h, an unsecured
object with a weight of 4.5 kg produces an energy, which corresponds to 20 times
its own weight. This means that it results in a weight of approx. 90 kg. You can
imagine the injuries that can occur, if this “bullet” is flying through the interior
compartment and hits an occupant.

WARNING
● Store the objects in the luggage compartment and attach them to the
lashing eyes.

CAUTION
Make sure that transported objects with sharp edges do not damage the following:


heating elements in the rear window,



elements of the aerial integrated in the rear window (Laura),



elements of the aerial integrated in the rear side windows (Combi).

Notice
Tyre pressure must be adjusted to the load ⇒ page 193.



Vehicles of category N1
On vehicles of the category N1, which are not fitted with a protective grille, a lashing set which complies with the standard EN 12195 (1 - 4) must be used for fastening the load.



Lashing eyes

● Loose objects in the passenger compartment can be thrown forward during a sudden manoeuvre or in case of an accident and can injure the occupants
or other oncoming traffic. This risk is still increased, if the objects which are
flying around are hit by a deployed airbag. In this case, the objects which are
thrown back can injure the occupants - hazard.
● Please note that the handling properties of your vehicle may be affected
when transporting heavy objects as a result of the displacement of the centre
of gravity. The speed and style of driving must be adjusted accordingly.
● The items carried in the luggage compartment should be stored in such a
way that no objects are able to slip forward if there are any sudden driving or
braking manoeuvres undertaken - risk of injury!
● Never drive with the boot lid fully opened or slightly ajar otherwise exhaust gases may get into the interior of the vehicle - risk of poisoning!
● On no account exceed the permissible axle loads and the permissible gross
weight of the vehicle - risk of accident!


Never transport occupants in the luggage compartment!

Fig. 52 Luggage compartment: Lashing eyes Laura / Combi

Eyes are located on the sides of the luggage compartment for lashing the goods
to be loaded.
You can also attach a floor fixing net to these eyes for holding small objects.
The floor fixing net and the installation instruction are located in a container under the floor covering of the luggage compartment behind the spare wheel.

£

Seats and Stowage

69

CAUTION

WARNING

Do not place any objects with sharp edges in the nets - risk of net damage.

● The load to be transported must be fixed in place in such a way that it cannot move during the journey and when braking.



Fixing nets - Net programme Estate

● If the items of luggage or objects are attached to the lashing eyes with unsuitable or damaged lashing straps, injuries can occur in the event of braking
manoeuvres or accidents. In order to prevent the items of luggage being
thrown forward, always use suitable lashing straps which are firmly attached
to the lashing eyes.

Notice
The upper front lashing eyes are located underneath the folding rear seat backrest ⇒ fig. 52 .



Fixing nets - Net programme Laura
Fig. 54 Fixing net: Vertical pocket/division of the luggage compartment

Fixing examples of the fixing net as a horizontal pocket ⇒ fig. 54 - left and as a
division of the luggage compartment with the aid of the net ⇒ fig. 54 - right.
The fixing net is stowed in a storage compartment behind the spare wheel under
the floor covering of the luggage compartment.

WARNING
● The whole strength of the net makes it possible to load the pocket with
objects of up to 1.5 kg in weight. Heavy objects are not secured sufficiently risk of injury and net damage!

Fig. 53 Fixing net: Horizontal pocket/vertical pocket

Fixing examples of the fixing net as a horizontal pocket ⇒ fig. 53 - left and a vertical pocket ⇒ fig. 53 - right.
The fixing net is stowed in a storage compartment behind the spare wheel under
the floor covering of the luggage compartment.

● The load to be transported must be fixed in place in such a way that it cannot move during the journey and when braking.

CAUTION
Do not place any objects with sharp edges in the nets - risk of net damage.

WARNING
● The whole strength of the net makes it possible to load the pocket with
objects of up to 1.5 kg in weight. Heavy objects are not secured sufficiently risk of injury and net damage!
● The load to be transported must be fixed in place in such a way that it cannot move during the journey and when braking.
Using the system

Safety

Driving Tips

General Maintenance

Breakdown assistance

Technical data



70

Seats and Stowage

Fixing floor covering of the luggage compartment

Folding double hooks (Laura)

Fig. 55 Luggage compartment: Folding
double hooks
Fig. 57 Luggage compartment: Fixing of the floor covering Laura / Combi

Folding double hooks for attaching small items of luggage, such as bags etc. are
provided on one or both sides of the luggage compartment depending on the
equipment installed in the vehicle ⇒ fig. 55 .

There is a loop (Laura) or there are hooks (Combi) located on the floor covering of
the luggage compartment. You can fix the raised floor cover with a hook to the
luggage compartment cover (Laura) ⇒ fig. 57 - left, as if one needs to reach the
spare wheel or to the frame of the boot lid (Combi) ⇒ fig. 57 - right.

CAUTION
An item of luggage weighing up to 5 kg can be attached to each side of the double

hook.



Luggage net (Laura)

Folding hooks (Combi)

Fig. 58 Luggage compartment: Luggage
net
Fig. 56 Luggage compartment: folding
hooks

The luggage net is designed for the tranportation of lighter objects.

Folding hooks for attaching small items of luggage, such as bags etc., are provided
on both sides of the luggage compartment ⇒ fig. 56 .

WARNING
● In the storage net you must only stow objects (up to a total weight of 1.5
kg). Heavy objects are not secured sufficiently - risk of injury!

CAUTION
An item of luggage weighing up to 7.5 kg can be attached to the hook.



● No objects with sharp edges should be stored in the luggage net, because
they can damage the luggage net.



Seats and Stowage

Luggage compartment cover (Laura)

71

Foldable luggage compartment cover (Combi)

You can use the luggage compartment cover behind the head restraints for storing light and soft items.

Fig. 60 Luggage compartment: foldable luggage compartment cover/removing foldable luggage compartment cover

Fig. 59 Removing the luggage compartment cover

Pulling out
– Pull the foldable luggage compartment cover in direction of arrow 1 as far as
the stop into the secured position ⇒ fig. 60 .

The luggage compartment cover can be removed as required if one must transport bulky goods.


Unhook the support straps 1 ⇒ fig. 59 .



Place the cover in the horizontal position.



Pull the cover out of the holder 2 horizontally to the rear.



Install again by pushing the luggage compartment cover forwards into the
holder 2 and hanging the support straps 1 on the boot lid.

Folding
– Press the cover in the handle area in direction of arrow 2 , the cover rolls up
automatically.
Removing
– Have the completely rolled up luggage compartment cover removed to transport bulky goods by pressing on the side of the cross rod in direction of arrow
3 and taking it out by moving it in direction of arrow 4 .

You can stow the removed luggage compartment cover behind the rear seat backrest.

WARNING

WARNING

No objects should be placed on the luggage compartment cover.

No objects should be placed on the luggage compartment cover, the vehicle
occupants could be endangered if there is sudden braking or the vehicle collides with something.

CAUTION
Please ensure that the heating elements of the rear window heater are not damaged as a result of objects placed in this area.

Notice
Opening the tailgate also lifts up the luggage compartment cover.

Using the system

Safety

Driving Tips



General Maintenance

Breakdown assistance

Technical data



72

Seats and Stowage

Division of the variable loading floor in the boot

WARNING
Pay attention when installing the variable loading floor that the carrier rails
and the variable loading floor are correctly attached. If this is not the case,
there is a risk of injury for the occupants.

CAUTION
The maximum load of the variable loading floor is 75 kg.
Fig. 61 Luggage compartment: Dividing
the luggage compartment with variable
loading floor

Net partition (Estate)
Use the luggage net partition behind the rear seats

The luggage compartment can be divided with the variable loading floor.


Lift up the part with the holder and secure it by sliding it into the grooves
⇒ fig. 61 .





Removing variable loading floor in the luggage compartment

Fig. 63 Folding down the storage compartment cover/pulling out the luggage net partition

Pulling out
– Fold down the storage compartment cover behind the rear seats ⇒ fig. 63 left.
Fig. 62 Luggage compartment: Remove variable loading floor/remove carrier rails



The variable loading floor makes handling of bulky items of luggage easier. You
can remove the variable loading floor if necessary.

Pull the luggage net partition at the bracket A out of the housing B in direction of the holders C .



Insert the cross rod into one of the mounts C and push the cross rod forward.



In the same way, fix the cross rod to the other side of the vehicle, mount C .



Fold the stowage compartment cover downwards.



Unlock the variable loading floor by turning the safety eyes A ⇒ fig. 62 to the
left by around 90°.



Fold together the loading floor and take it out by moving in direction of arrow.



Unlock the carrier rails B by turning the arbor-mounted fixing eyes C to the
right by approx. 90°.

Folding
– Fold down the stowage compartment cover behind the rear seats ⇒ fig. 63 .

£

Seats and Stowage


Pull the cross rod back slightly, first on the one side then on the other side and
take the cross rod out of the mounts C .



Hold the cross rod in such a way that the luggage net partition can roll up
slowly and without damage into the housing B .



Fold the stowage compartment cover downwards.

Folding
– Pull the cross rod back slightly, first on the one side then on the other side and
take the cross rod out of the mounts C .

If you wish to use the entire luggage compartment, you can remove the foldable
luggage compartment cover ⇒ fig. 60 .

Hold the cross rod in such a way that the luggage net partition can roll up
slowly and without damage into the housing B .



Fold the rear seats back into its original position.

● The belt locks and the belts must be in their original position after folding
back the seat cushions and the seat backrests - they must be ready to use.

● First check for yourself that the cross road is inserted into the mounts C
in the front position!

Use the luggage net partition behind the front seats



WARNING

WARNING

● Pay attention that the rear seat backrest is correctly interlocked. It is only
then that the three-point seat belt for the middle seat can reliably fulfil its
function.

73

● The seat backrests must be securely interlocked in position so that no objects in the luggage compartment can slide forwards if there is sudden braking - risk of injury!


● Pay attention that the rear seat backrest is correctly interlocked. It is only
then that the three-point seat belt for the middle seat can reliably fulfil its
function.
● First check for yourself that the cross road is inserted into the mounts C
in the front position!



Removing and installing the luggage net partition housing

Fig. 64 Pull out the luggage net partition

Pulling out
– Fold the rear seats forwards ⇒ page 65

Fig. 65 Rear seats: Luggage net partition housing



Pull the net partiton at the bracket A ⇒ fig. 64 out of the housing B



Insert the cross rod into the mount C first on the one side and push the cross
rod forward.

Removing
– Fold the rear seats forwards ⇒ page 65



In the same way, fix the cross rod to the other side of the vehicle, mount C .



Open the right rear door.



Push the luggage net partition housing A ⇒ fig. 65 in the direction of arrow
1 and take it out of the mount of the rear seats in the direction of arrow 2 .

Using the system

Safety

Driving Tips

General Maintenance

Breakdown assistance

Technical data

£

74

Seats and Stowage

Lashing points (Laura)

Install
– Position the luggage net partition housing into the mounts in the rear seat
backrests.


Push the luggage net partition housing in the opposite direction of arrow 1
as far as the stop.



Fold the rear seats back into its original position.

WARNING
Pay attention that the rear seat backrest is correctly interlocked. It is only
then that the three-point seat belt for the middle seat can reliably fulfil its
function.

Fig. 66 Attachment points for base roof
carrier



Perform the assembly and the disassembly according to the attached instructions.

The roof rack

Notice

Description
CAUTION


If you have any questions, please contact a specialist garage.



The figure is not valid for an estate car.



Roof load

Only use roof racks approved by ŠKODA.
Distribute the weight evenly over the roof luggage rack system. The maximum
permissible roof load (including roof rack system) of 75 kg and the maximum permissible total weight of the vehicle should not be exceeded.

● If you use other roof rack systems or if the roof bars are not properly fitted,
then any damage which may result to your car is not covered by the warranty
agreements. It is therefore essential to pay attention to the fitting instructions
supplied with the roof luggage rack system.

You cannot make full use of the permissible roof load if you use a roof luggage
rack system with a lower load carrying capacity. The load transported on the roof
luggage rack system must not exceed the weight limit which is stated in the fitting instructions.

● On models fitted with a power sliding/tilting roof, ensure that the opened sliding/tilting roof does not strike any items of luggage transported on the roof.




Ensure that the opened boot lid does not collide with the roof load.

For the sake of the environment

WARNING

The increased aerodynamic drag results in a higher fuel consumption.

● The items which you transport on the roof bar system must be reliably attached - risk of accident!

Notice
If a vehicle is not factory-equipped with a roof rack, it can be purchased from the
ŠKODA Original Accessories



● You must on no account exceed the permissible roof load, the permissible
axle loads and the permissible gross weight of your vehicle - risk of accident!
● Please note that the handling properties of your vehicle change when you
transport heavy or bulky items on the roof bar system as a result of the displacement of the centre of gravity and the increased wind attack area - risk of
accident! You must absolutely adapt your style of driving and the speed of the
vehicle to the specific circumstances.



Seats and Stowage

Cup holder

75

Cup holder in rear centre console

Cup holder in front centre console

Fig. 68 Centre console at rear: Cup
holder
Fig. 67 Front centre console: Cup holder

You can place two cups or beverage cans into the recesses ⇒ fig. 67 .

WARNING

Driving Tips

Adjust the cup holder by moving the locking plate B .

● Do not use any cups or beakers which are made of brittle material (e.g.
glass, porcelain). This could lead to injuries in the event of an accident.

CAUTION

Safety



● Do not place any hot beverages into the cup holder. If the vehicle moves,
they may spill - risk of scalding!

● Do not use any cups or beakers which are made of brittle material (e.g.
glass, porcelain). This could lead to injuries in the event of an accident.

Using the system

Press on the panel in the area A ⇒ fig. 68 - the cup holder comes out.
Pull the cup holder out as far as the stop.

WARNING

● Do not place any hot beverages into the cup holder. If the vehicle moves,
they may spill - risk of scalding!

Do not open the beverages in the cup holder while driving. There is a risk of spilling e.g. when braking and therefore the electrical components or the seat upholstery can be damaged.




CAUTION


Do not open the beverages in the cup holder while driving. They may spill when
braking and while doing so damage the vehicle.

General Maintenance

Breakdown assistance

Technical data



76

Seats and Stowage

Note holder

Removing ashtray insert
– Press on the ashtray insert in the area B (the insert comes out) and you can
take it out.
Insert ashtray insert
– Insert the ashtray insert into the mount and press it in.

WARNING
Never lay flammable objects in the ashtray basin - risk of fire!



Rear ashtray - low centre console

Fig. 69 Windscreen: Note holder

The parking ticket holder is designed e.g. for attaching a car park ticket in parking
areas.
The attached note has to always be removed before starting off in order not to
restrict the driver's vision.



Ashtray
Front ashtray

Fig. 71 Low centre console: Rear ashtray

Opening ashtray
– Grasp the ashtray cover at the lower edge A and fold it open in the direction
of arrow ⇒ fig. 71 .
Removing ashtray
– Grasp the ashtray at the handle B and pull it out in an upward direction.
Replacing ashtray
– Insert the ashtray into the console and press it in.
Fig. 70 Centre console: Front ashtray/remove front ashtray insert

Opening ashtray
– Press on the bottom part of the cover of the ashtray - refer to A ⇒ fig. 70 .

WARNING
Never lay flammable objects in the ashtray basin - risk of fire!



Seats and Stowage

77

Cigarette lighter, power sockets

Rear ashtray - high centre console

Cigarette lighter
You can also use the socket on the cigarette lighter for other electrical appliances.

Fig. 72 High centre console: Rear ashtray

Opening ashtray
– Press on the top part of the cover of the ashtray in area A ⇒ fig. 72 .
Removing ashtray insert
– Press the cover of the ashtray down slightly as far as the stop.


Fig. 73 Centre console: Cigarette lighter

Using the cigarette lighter
– Press in the button of the cigarette lighter ⇒ fig. 73 .

Grasp the ashtray insert at the cover B and pull it out.

Insert ashtray insert
– Insert the ashtray insert into the mount and press it in.

WARNING
Never lay flammable objects in the ashtray basin - risk of fire!





Wait until the button jumps forward.



Remove the cigarette lighter immediately and use it.



Insert the cigarette lighter again into the socket.

Using the socket
– Remove the cigarette lighter or the cover of the power socket.


Connect the plug of the electrical appliance to the socket.

The 12 volt power socket can also be used to supply power to additional electrical
accessories with a power uptake up to 120 watts.

WARNING
● Take care when using the cigarette lighter! Not paying proper attention or
incorrect use the cigarette lighter in an uncontrolled manner may result in
burns.
● The cigarette lighter and the power socket also operates when the ignition
is switched off or the ignition key withdrawn. You should therefore never
£
leave children unattended in the vehicle.
Using the system

Safety

Driving Tips

General Maintenance

Breakdown assistance

Technical data

78

Seats and Stowage
CAUTION

Storage compartment on the front passenger side

Always use matching plugs to avoid damaging the power socket.

Storage compartment on the driver's side
Storage compartment on the dash panel

Notice

Stowage compartment in front centre console

● Connecting electrical components when the engine is not running will drain
the battery of the vehicle - risk of battery draining!
● Further information ⇒ page 198, Accessories, changes and replacement of
parts.

Storage net on the front centre console
Stowage compartment for spectacles


Storage compartment in the front doors
Stowage compartment below front passenger seat

Power socket in the luggage compartment (Estate)

Front seat armrest with stowage compartment
Rear armrest with stowage compartment
Stowage compartment in rear centre console
Seat backrest with opening for skis
Removeable through-loading bag
Side compartment

Fig. 74 Luggage compartment: Power
socket



Open the cover of the power socket ⇒ fig. 74 .



Connect the plug of the electrical appliance to the socket.

Overview
You will find the following storage facilities in your vehicle:

⇒ page 80
⇒ page 80
⇒ page 81
⇒ page 81
⇒ page 81
⇒ page 81

⇒ page 82
⇒ page 82

⇒ page 83
⇒ page 83

⇒ page 84

Stowage compartment behind the rear seats (estate
car)

⇒ page 84

Clothes hooks

⇒ page 84

WARNING

● Ensure that when driving no objects from the centre console of from other
storage possibilities may get into the footwell of the driver. You would then
no longer be able to apply the brakes, operate the clutch or accelerator - risk
of accident!

The same remarks apply here as for ⇒ page 77, Cigarette lighter, power sockets.

Storage compartments

⇒ page 79

⇒ page 80

● Please do not place anything on top of the dash panel. Such objects might
slide or fall down when driving (when accelerating or cornering) and may distract you from concentrating on the traffic situation - risk of accident!

You can only use the power socket for the connection of approved electrical accessories with a power uptake up to 120 watts. The vehicle battery will be discharged in the process if the engine is stationary.
Further information ⇒ page 198, Accessories, changes and replacement of parts.

⇒ page 79





Seats and Stowage

Storage compartment on the front passenger side



79

Open or close the air supply using the control dial ⇒ fig. 76 .

Opening the air supply when the air conditioning system is switched on allows
cooled air to flow into the storage compartment.
Opening the air inlet when the air conditioning system is on causes fresh or interior air to flow into the storage compartment.
We recommend that you close the air supply if it is operating in the heating mode
or if you are not using the cooling system for the storage compartment.



Storage compartment on the driver's side

Fig. 75 Dash panel: Storage compartment on the front passenger side

Opening and closing the storage compartment on the front passenger side
– Press the handle of the lid ⇒ fig. 75 - the lid folds down.


Raise the lid and press it until the catch is heard to engage.

There is a holder for a pen and note book on the inside of the lid.

WARNING

Fig. 77 Dash panel: Storage compartment on the driver's side

● The storage compartment must always be closed when driving for safety
reasons.
● Do not place any beverages into the cup holder while driving. Spilled beverages can damage the electrical system and the upholstery. Hot beverages
may result in burns.



The storage compartment is opened by lifting the handle and folding open in
the direction of arrow ⇒ fig. 77 .



WARNING
Cooling of storage compartment on front passenger side

The storage compartment must always be closed when driving for safety reasons.

Fig. 76 Storage compartment: Using
cooling system

Using the system

Safety

Driving Tips

General Maintenance

Breakdown assistance

Technical data



80

Seats and Stowage

Storage compartment on the dash panel



Press on the bottom part of the storage compartment in the area A ⇒ fig. 79
- the lid opens.

WARNING
The storage compartment is not a substitute for the ashtray and must also
not be used for such purposes - risk of fire!



Storage net on the front centre console
Fig. 78 Dash panel: Storage compartment



Press in the middle of the storage compartment ⇒ fig. 78 - the lid folds open

Certain model versions are equipped without lid for the storage compartment.

WARNING
● The storage compartment is not a substitute for the ashtray and must also
not be used for such purposes - risk of fire!

Fig. 80 Front centre console: Storage
net

● The storage compartment must always be closed when driving for safety
reasons.
● Do not put any highly inflammable objects or objects which are sensitive to
heat (e.g. lighters, sprays, spectacles, carbonated drinks) in the storage compartment.

Stowage compartment in front centre console

Fig. 79 Front centre console: Storage
compartment

The storage net in the front center console ⇒ fig. 80 is designed for the transport
of smaller objects.


WARNING
● In the storage net you must only stow objects (up to a total weight of 0.5
kg). Heavy objects are not secured sufficiently - risk of injury!
● No objects with sharp edges should be stored in the luggage net, because
they can damage the luggage net.



Seats and Stowage

Stowage compartment for spectacles

81

WARNING
Use the area A ⇒ fig. 82 of the storage compartment only for storing objects
which do not project so that the effectiveness of the side airbag is not impaired.



Stowage compartment below front passenger seat

Fig. 81 Detail of the headliner: Stowage
compartment for spectacles



Press on the lid of the storage compartment, the storage compartment opens
downwards ⇒ fig. 81 .

CAUTION

Fig. 83 Front passenger seat: Storage
compartment

● The compartment must only be opened when removing or inserting the spectacles and otherwise must be kept closed.
● Do not put any heat-sensitive objects in the stowage compartment - they may
be damaged.

Storage compartment in the front doors





Tilt the lock to open the flap and pull out the flap ⇒ fig. 83 .



Tilt the lock to close the flap and press flap close.

CAUTION
The storage compartment is foreseen for storing small objects of up to 1,5 kg. in
weight.



Front seat armrest with storage compartment

Fig. 82 Storage compartment in the
front doors

A bottle holder is located in the area B of the storage compartment for the front
doors.
Fig. 84 Armrest: Storage compartment/cooling of storage compartment

Using the system

Safety

Driving Tips

General Maintenance

Breakdown assistance

Technical data

£

82

Seats and Stowage

Rear seat armrest with storage compartment

The armrest is adjustable for height and length.
Opening stowage compartment
– Open the lid of the armrest in the direction of arrow ⇒ fig. 84 - left.
Closing stowage compartment
– Open the lid up to the stop, then you can fold it downwards.
Setting height
– First of all fold the lid to the bottom and lift it in the direction of arrow into one
of the 4 fixed positions.

Fig. 85 Armrest of rear seats:

Adjusting in forward/back direction
– Push the lid into the desired position.

The armrest includes a stowage compartment. You open the compartment by
pressing the button on the front side and raising the cover ⇒ fig. 85 .

Opening air inlet
– Pull the lock A in upward direction.



Stowage compartment in rear centre console

Closing air inlet
– Push the lock A as far as the stop downwards.
On vehicles fitted with air conditioning, the storage compartment is equipped
with a lockable inlet for thermally treated (warmed-up) air.
At open air supply, air flows into the storage with a temperature which is as high
as the one out of the air outlet nozzles, depending on temperature setting.
The air inlet in the storage compartment is connected to position  through adjustment of the control dial for air distribution. This position causes the maximum
amount of air to flow into the storage compartment (depending on the rotary regulator position for the fan).

Fig. 86 Centre console at rear: Storage
compartment

You can use the storage compartment, for example, to temper drinks cans, etc.

The storage compartment is equipped with a removeable insert.

If you do not use the air inlet in the storage compartment, the end cover should
always be kept closed.



Notice
Push the lid of the armrest up to stop to the rear before operating the handbrake.



Open the storage compartment by pulling on the upper edge of the storage
compartment A in the direction of arrow ⇒ fig. 86 .

WARNING
The storage compartment is not a substitute for the ashtray and must also
not be used for such purposes - risk of fire!



Seats and Stowage

Seat backrest with opening for skis

83

Through-loading bag
The removeable through-loading bag is solely used for transporting
skis.

Fig. 87 Rear seats: Handle of lid/luggage compartment: Unlock button
Fig. 88 Securing the removeable
through-loading bag

After folding open the armrest and the lid, an opening in the seat backrest becomes visible through which you can push the removeable through-loading bag
with skis. You can fold open the armrest and the lid from the passenger or luggage compartment.

Loading
– Open the boot lid/luggage compartment door.

Opening from passenger compartment
– Fold down the armrest of the rear seat at the loop ⇒ page 67.


Pull the handle up to the stop in upward direction and fold open the lid downwards ⇒ fig. 87 - left.

Opening from luggage compartment
– Push the unlock button downwards ⇒ fig. 87 - right and fold the lid (with armrest) to the front.

Ensure that the armrest is always locked into place after closing. You can recognize this on the fact that the red field above the unlocking button A of the luggage compartment is not visible.

WARNING

Using the system

Safety

Driving Tips

Fold the rear armrest and the cover in the seat backrest downwards
⇒ page 83, Seat backrest with opening for skis.



Place the empty removable through-loading bag in such a way that the end of
the bag with the zip lies in the boot.



Push the skis into the removeable through-loading bag from the luggage compartment ⇒  .

Securing
– Tighten the strap A on the free end around the skis in front of the bindings
⇒ fig. 88 .

Closing
– Fold the lid and the armrest up to the stop in upward direction - the lid must
click into place audibly.

The opening for the skis is solely used for transporting skis which are placed
in a properly secured removeable through-loading bag ⇒ page 83.







Fold the seat backrest a little forward.



Guide the securing strap B through the opening in the seat backrest around
the upper part of the seat backrest.



Then push the seat backrest back into the upright position until the locking
button clicks into place - check by pulling on the seat backrest.



Insert the securing strap B into the lock C until it is heard to lock in place.

On vehicles fitted with a luggage net partition, guide the securing strap B around
the housing when the net partition is rolled up. After fixing the luggage net parti£
tion in place, it is not longer possible to unroll the luggage net partition.
General Maintenance

Breakdown assistance

Technical data

84

Seats and Stowage

Stowage compartment behind the rear seats (estate car)

WARNING
● After placing skis into the through-loading bag, you must secure the bag
with the securing strap B .


The strap A must hold the skis tight.

● Make sure that the strap A holds the skis in front of the binding (see also
imprint on the removeable through-loading bag).

Notice
● The through-loading bag is foreseen for four pairs of skis. The total weight of
the skis which are transported must not exceed 17 kg.

Fig. 90 Removing the storage compartment

● You must put the skis and the sticks in the removeable through-loading bag
with the tips facing the rear.

Removing
– First remove the foldable luggage compartment cover ⇒ page 71.

● If there are several pairs of skis in the removeable through-loading bag, ensure that the bindings are positioned at the same height.
● Carefully fold the empty (dry) through-loading bag together, place it in the luggage compartment and secure it to prevent it slipping. The removeable throughloading bag must never be folded together or stowed when moist.




Side compartment

Grasp the housing with both hands and remove it by pulling in direction of arrow ⇒ fig. 90 .

Install
– Push the housing up to the stop into the catch.


Re-insert the foldable luggage compartment cover.

WARNING
Only place small and light objects up to a total weight of 3 kg into the stowage
compartment. In the event of a vehicle collision heavy objects could be thrown
out of the compartment - risk of injuries! For this reason, the front part of the
luggage compartment cover must always cover over the stowage compartment.
Fig. 89 Luggage compartment: Side
compartment



Clothes hooks
The clothes hooks are located on the middle pillar and on the handle of the head£
liner above each of the rear doors.

You can open the compartment by turning the locks in the direction of arrow.

The CD changer is housed in this compartment.





Seats and Stowage

WARNING
● Ensure that any clothes hanging from the hooks do not impair your vision
to the rear.
● Use the hooks for hanging only light items of clothing and ensure that
there are no heavy or sharp-edged objects in the pockets.


The maximum permissible load of the hooks is 2 kg.

● Do not use clothes hangers for hanging up items of clothing otherwise this
will interfere with the protection offered by the head airbag.

Using the system

Safety

Driving Tips



General Maintenance

Breakdown assistance

Technical data

85

86

Heating and air conditioning system

Heating and air conditioning system
Introduction

tem. This produces a permanent odour when the air conditioning system is operating which can only be eliminated through considerable effort and expense (replacement of compressor).

Description and information

● Please refer to the information regarding the recirculated air mode for heating
⇒ page 89 and/or for air-conditioning system ⇒ page 91 or Climatronic
⇒ page 94.

The heating effect is dependent upon the coolant temperature, thus full heat output only occurs when the engine has reached its operating temperature.
If the cooling system is switched on, the temperature and air humidity drops in
the vehicle. The wellbeing of the occupants of the car is enhanced as a result of
this particularly at high outside temperatures and a high air humidity. The system
prevents the windows misting up during the cold season of the year.

● To ensure the heating system, air conditioning system or Climatronic work per
fectly, the air outlet vents must not be covered by any objects.

Using the air conditioning system economically

It is possible to briefly activate recirculated air mode in order to enhance the cooling effect - air-conditoining system ⇒ page 91, Climatronic ⇒ page 94.

The compressor on the air conditioning system uses power from the engine when
in cooling mode which will effect the fuel consumption.

The air inlet in front of the windscreen must be free of ice, snow or leaves in order
to ensure that the heating and cooling systems operate properly.

It recommended to open the windows or the doors of a vehicle for which the interior has been strongly heated through the effect of direct sunlight in order to allow the heated air to escape.

After switching on the cooling Condensation from the evaporator of the air conditioning may drip down and form a puddle below the vehicle. This is quite normal
and not an indication of a leak!

WARNING
● For your own safety and that of other road users, ensure that all the windows are free of ice, snow and misting. Please familiarize yourself about how
to correctly operate the heating and ventilation systems, how to demist and
defrost the windows, as well as with the cooling mode.
● You should not leave recirculated air mode on over a longer period of time,
as “stale” air may result in fatigue in the driver and occupants, divert your attention and also cause the windows to mist up. The risk of having an accident
increases. Switch recirculated air mode off as soon as the windows begin
misting up.

Notice
● The used air streams out through the air removal openings in the luggage
compartment.
● We recommend that you do not smoke in the vehicle when the recirculating air
mode is operating since the smoke which is drawn at the evaporator from the interior of the vehicle forms deposits in the evaporator of the air conditioning sys-

The cooling system should not be switched on while travelling when the window
is open.
The desired interior temperature can also be achieved without switching in the
cooling system just by switching to fresh air mode.

For the sake of the environment
When you economize on fuel, you also reduce pollutant emissions.



Operational problems
If the cooling system does not operate at outside temperatures higher than +5 °C,
there is a problem in the system. The reasons for this may be:
● The fuse on the air conditioning system has blown. Check the fuse, replace it if
necessary ⇒ page 212.
● The cooling system has switched off automatically for a short time because
the coolant temperature of the engine is too hot ⇒ page 11.
If you are not able to rectify the operational problem yourself, or if the cooling capacity decreases, switch the cooling system off. Contact a specialist garage.



Heating and air conditioning system

Air outlet vents

87

Redirecting air flow
– Swivel upward or downward the grille of the vents in order to change the direction of the air flow using the vertically arranged thumbwheel.


Turn the horizontal thumbwheel on the vent to the right or left in order to
change the air flow to the appropriate side.

The air outlet vents 3, 4 ⇒ fig. 91 and 6 ⇒ fig. 92 can be closed and opened individually.
The air outlet vents 6 are only fitted on vehicles with higher centre console.
Warmed, unwarmed or cooled air will flow out of the air outlet vents according to
the setting of the regulator of the heating or the air conditioning system and the
atmospheric conditions.

Notice
The air outlet vents 2 ensure in the ventilation and cooling mode for a comfortable (no-draught) ventilation of the interior of the vehicle, also if the air outlet
vents 4 are closed.

Fig. 91 Air vents at the front

Fig. 92 Air vents at the rear

Open air outlet vents
– Turn the vertical thumbwheel (not when in the end position).
Close air outlet vents
– Turn the vertical wheel into the end position.

Using the system

Safety

Driving Tips

General Maintenance

Breakdown assistance

Technical data



88

Heating and air conditioning system

Heating
Using the system



Turn the blower switch B into position 0 in order to switch the blower off.



If you wish to shut off the fresh air supply, use the button 1 - recirculated air
mode ⇒ page 89.

Control for air distribution
– You can adjust the direction of the inlet air flow ⇒ page 87 using air distribution regulator C .

The heating system delivers air into the interior of the vehicle and
warms it as required.

Rear window heater
– Press button 2 . Further information ⇒ page 53, Rear window heater.
Auxiliary heating (auxiliary heating)
– Press the button 3 in order to directly switch on/off the auxiliary heating
(auxiliary heating and ventilation). Further information ⇒ page 95, Auxiliary
heating (auxiliary heating and ventilation).
All controls apart from the control dial B can be set to any desired intermediate
position.
The blower should aways be on to prevent the windows from misting up.

Notice

Fig. 93 Heating: Control elements

If the air distribution is positioned towards the windows, the total amount of air is
used to defrost the windows and thus no air will be fed to the footwell. This can
lead to restriction of the heating comfort.

Setting temperature
– Turn the control dial A ⇒ fig. 93 to the right in order to increase the temperature.


Turn the control dial A to the left in order to increase the temperature.

Controlling blower
– Turn the blower switch B into one of the positions, 1 to 4, in order to switch
the blower on.

Set heating
Recommended basic settings of heating controls for:

£



Heating and air conditioning system
Setting of the control dial

Set-up

A

B

C

Defrosting the windscreen and side
windows

To the right up to the
stop

3

Free windscreen and side windows
from mist

Desired temperature

2 or 3

The fastest heating

To the right up to the
stop

3

Comfortable heating

Desired temperature

2 or 3

Fresh air mode - ventilation

To the left up to the
stop

Desired position







Notice


Controls A , B , C and the button 1 ⇒ fig. 93 .



Air outlet vents 3 ⇒ fig. 91 .

89

Button 1

Air outlet vents 3

Do not switch on

Open and align with the side window

Do not switch on

Open and align with the side window

Briefly switched on

Opening

Do not switch on

Opening

Do not switch on

Opening

WARNING

● We recommend that you leave the air outlet vents 4 ⇒ fig. 91 in the opened
position.



You should not leave recirculated air mode on over a longer period of time, as
“stale” air may result in fatigue in the driver and occupants, divert your attention and also cause the windows to mist up. The risk of having an accident increases. Switch recirculated air mode off as soon as the windows begin misting up.



Recirculated air mode
In recirculated air mode air is sucked out of the interior of the vehicle and then fed back into the interior.

Air conditioning system (manual air conditioning
system)

Recirculated air mode prevents polluted air outside the vehicle from getting into
the vehicle, for example when driving through a tunnel or when standing in a traffic jam.

Description

Switching recirculated air mode on
– Press the button  - the warning light lights up in the button ⇒ fig. 93 .
Switching recirculated air mode off
– Press again the button  - the warning light in the button goes out.
The recirculated air mode is switched off automatically if the air distribution control C is in position  ⇒ fig. 93 . You can also switch recirculated air mode on
again from this setting by repeatedly pressing pushbutton  .

Using the system

Safety

Driving Tips

The air conditioning system is a combined cooling and heating system. It makes it possible to optimally control the air temperature at
any season of the year.
Description of the air conditioning system
It is important for your safety and for your driving comfort that the air conditioning
£
system is operating properly.

General Maintenance

Breakdown assistance

Technical data

90

Heating and air conditioning system

The cooling only operates if button
conditions are met:




AC

⇒ fig. 94 1 is pressed, and the following

engine running,
outside temperature above approx. +2 °C and
blower switch switched on (positions 1 to 4).

If you wish to shut off the fresh air supply, use the button
air mode ⇒ page 91.



4 - recirculated

switching cooling on and off
– Press the button AC 1 ⇒ fig. 94 . The warning light lights up in the button.


Notice

Using the system

Turn the blower switch B into position 0 in order to switch the blower off.



Control for air distribution
– You can adjust the direction of the inlet air flow ⇒ page 87 using air distribution regulator C .

Air at a temperature of about 5°C may flow out of the vents under certain circumstances when the cooling system is operating. Lengthy and uneven distribution of
the air flow out of the vents and large differences in temperature, for example
when getting out of the vehicle, can result in chills in sensitive persons.

● We recommend that you have the air conditioning system cleaned by a specialist garage once every year.





When you again press the switch AC , the cooling system is switched off. The
warning light in the button goes out.

Rear window heater
– Press button  2 . Further information ⇒ page 53, Rear window heater.
Auxiliary heating (auxiliary heating)
– Press the button  3 in order to directly switch on/off the auxiliary heating
(auxiliary heating and ventilation. Further information ⇒ page 95, Auxiliary
heating (auxiliary heating and ventilation).

Notice
● The whole heat output will be needed to unfrost the windscreen and side windows. No warm air will be fed to the footwell. This can lead to restriction of the
heating comfort.
● The warning light AC lights after activation, even if not all of the conditions for
the function of the cooling system have been met. As a result, the readiness for
cooling is signalled when all conditions are satisfied ⇒ page 89, Description of the

air conditioning system.
Fig. 94 The air conditioning system: Control elements

Setting temperature
– Turn the control dial A ⇒ fig. 94 to the right in order to increase the temperature.


Turn the control dial A to the left in order to increase the temperature.

Controlling blower
– Turn the blower switch B into one of the positions, 1 to 4, in order to switch
the blower on.

Heating and air conditioning system

91

Setting air conditioning system
Recommended basic settings of the control elements of the air conditioning system for the respective operating modes:
Setting of the control dial

Set-up

Button

Air outlet vents 3

A

B

C

1

4

Defrost windscreen and side
windows - free from mista)

Desired temperature

3 or 4

Is activated automaticallyb)

Do not switch on

Open and align with the side
window

The fastest heating

To the right up to
the stop

3

Switched off

Briefly switched on

Opening

Comfortable heating

Desired temperature

2 or 3

Switched off

Do not switch on

Opening

The fastest cooling

To the left up to
the stop

briefly 4, then
2 or 3

Activated

Briefly switched on

Opening

Optimal cooling

Desired temperature

1, 2 or 3

Activated

Do not switch on

Open and align to the roof

Fresh air mode - ventilation

To the left up to
the stop

Desired position








Switched off

Do not switch on

Opening

a)

In countries with high humidity, we recommend you do not use this setting. This can result in heavy cooling of the window glass and the following fogging from outside.

b)

The warning light in the 1 button lights after activation, even if not all of the conditions for the function of the cooling system have been met. As a result, the readiness for cooling is signalled when all conditions
are satisfied ⇒ page 89, Description of the air conditioning system.

Switching recirculated air mode on
– Press the button  4 ⇒ fig. 94 the warning light lights up in the button.

Notice


Controls A , B , C and the 1 button and 4 ⇒ fig. 94 .



Air outlet vents 3 ⇒ fig. 91 .

● We recommend that you leave the air outlet vents 4 ⇒ fig. 91 in the opened
position.



Switching recirculated air mode off
– Press again the button  - the warning light in the button goes out.
The recirculated air mode is switched off automatically if the air distribution control C is in position  ⇒ fig. 94 . You can also switch recirculated air mode on
£
again from this setting by repeatedly pressing pushbutton  .

Recirculated air mode
In recirculated air mode air is sucked out of the interior of the vehicle and then fed back into the interior.
Recirculated air mode prevents polluted air outside the vehicle from getting into
the vehicle, for example when driving through a tunnel or when standing in a traffic jam.

Using the system

Safety

Driving Tips

General Maintenance

Breakdown assistance

Technical data

92

Heating and air conditioning system
Notice

WARNING
You should not leave recirculated air mode on over a longer period of time, as
“stale” air may result in fatigue in the driver and occupants, divert your attention and also cause the windows to mist up. The risk of having an accident increases. Switch recirculated air mode off as soon as the windows begin misting up.

● We recommend that you have Climatronic cleaned by a specialist garage once
every year.



● On vehicles equipped with a factory-fitted radio or radio navigation system,
the information of the Climatronic is also shown on the display. This function can
be switched off, see operating instructions of the radio or the radio navigation
system.

Climatronic (automatic air conditioning)

Overview of the control elements

Description

The controls enable a separate setting of the temperature for the
left and right side.



The Climatronic system is an automatic heating, fresh air and cooling system which provides optimal comfort for the occupants of the
car.
The Climatronic maintains fully automatically a convenience temperature. This is
achieved by automatically varying the temperature of the outflowing air, the
blower stages and the air distribution. The system also takes into account sunlight which eliminates the need to alter the settings manually. The automatic
mode ⇒ page 93 ensures maximum wellbeing of the occupants at all times of
the year.
Description of Climatronic system
The cooling operates only if the following conditions are met:
● engine running,
● outside temperature above approx. +2 °C,
● AC switched on.
The AC compressor is switched off at a high coolant temperature in order to provide cooling at a high load of the engine.
Recommended setting for all periods of the year:
● Set the desired temperature, we recommend 22 °C.
● Press the button AUTO ⇒ fig. 95 .
● Move the air outlet vents 3 and 4 so that the air flow is directed slightly upwards.

Fig. 95 Climatronic: Control elements

The buttons
1
2
3
4
5
6

Defrost windscreen intensively 
Air flow to the windows 
Air flow to head 
Air flow in the footwell 
Recirculated air mode  with air quality sensor
Rear window heater 

£

Heating and air conditioning system
Buttons / control dial
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14

By pressing again the button

Setting of the temperature for the left side, operation of the seat heating of
the left front seat
Automatic mode AUTO
Switching off Climatronic OFF
Setting the blower speed 
Button for direct switching on/off of auxiliary heating (auxiliary heating) 
⇒ page 95
Switching on/off of the temperature setting in dual mode DUAL
Switching cooling on and off AC
Setting of the temperature for the right side, operation of the seat heating of
the right front seat

you change into the “HIGH” mode.

The automatic mode is switched off by pressing the button for the air distribution
or increasing or decreasing the blower speed. The temperature is nevertheless
regulated.

switching cooling on and off
– Press the button AC ⇒ fig. 95 . The warning light lights up in the button.


When you again press the switch AC , the cooling system is switched off. The
warning light in the button goes out. Only the function of the ventilation remains active when no lower temperature than the outside temperature can be

reached.

Setting temperature


You can separate the interior temperature for the left and right side separately.

Automatic mode



The automatic mode is used in order to maintain a constant temperature and to demist the windows in the interior of the car.

You can set the temperature for both sides after switching on the ignition
with the control dial 7 ⇒ fig. 95 .



If you wish to set the temperature for the right side, turn the control dial 14 .
The warning light in the button DUAL lights up, this indicates that differing
temperatures for the left and right side can be set.

Switching automatic mode on
– Set a temperature between +18 °C and +26 °C.


Move the air outlet vents 3 and 4 ⇒ fig. 91 , so that the air flow is directed
slightly upwards.



Press the button AUTO . In the right or left top corner a warning light lights up,
depending on which unit was last selected.

If the warning light in the top right corner of the button AUTO lights up, the Climatronic operates in “HIGH” mode. The “HIGH” mode is the standard setting of the
Climatronic.
When pressing again the button AUTO , the Climatronic changes into the “LOW”
mode and the warning light in the top left corner lights up. The Climatronic uses
only in this mode the lower blower speed. However taking into account the noise
level, this is more comfortable, yet be aware that the effectiveness of the air conditioning system is reduced particularly if the vehicle is fully occupied.
Using the system

Safety

Driving Tips



switching cooling on and off

Notice
Below the top row of buttons is located the interior temperature sensor. Do not
glue or cover over the sensor, otherwise it could have an unfavourable effect on
the Climatronic.

AUTO ,

93

If the warning light in the button DUAL lights up, the temperature for both sides
cannot be set with the control dial 7 . You can reinitiate this function by pressing
the button DUAL . The warning light in the button which indicates the possibility to
set differing temperatures for the left and right side, goes out.
You can set the interior temperature between +18°C and +26 °C. The interior temperature is regulated automatically within this range. If you chose a temperature
lower than +18 °C, a blue symbol lights up at the start of the numerical scale. If you
chose a temperature higher than +26 °C, a red symbol lights up at the end of the
numerical scale. In both limit positions the Climatronic operates at maximum cooling or heating capacity, respectively. The temperature is not controlled in this
case.
Lengthy and uneven distribution of the air flow out of the vents (in particular at
the leg area) and large differences in temperature, for example when getting out
of the vehicle, can result in chills in sensitive persons.

General Maintenance

Breakdown assistance

Technical data



94

Heating and air conditioning system

Recirculated air mode

Notice

In recirculated air mode air is sucked out of the interior of the vehicle and then fed back into the interior. When the automatic air distribution control is switched on, an air quality sensor measures the
concentration of pollutants in the drawn in air.
Recirculated air mode prevents polluted air outside the vehicle from getting into
the vehicle, for example when driving through a tunnel or when standing in a traffic jam. If a considerable increase in concentration of pollutants is recognized by
the air quality sensor, when the automatic air distribution control is switched on,
the air distribution control will temporarily be switched off. If the concentration of
pollutants decreases to the normal level, the air distribution control is automatically switched off so that fresh air can be guided into the vehicle interior.
Switching recirculated air mode on
– Press the button repeatedly  until the warning light on the left side of the
button lights up.
Switch on automatic air distribution control
– Press the button repeatedly  until the warning light on the right side of the
button lights up.
Switch off automatic air distribution control temporarily
– If the air quality sensor does not switch on the air distribution control automatically when there is a nauseating smell, you can switch it on yourself by
pressing the button  . The warning light lights up in the button on the left
side.
Switching recirculated air mode off
– Press the button AUTO or press the button
lights in the button go out.



repetitively, until the warning

WARNING
You should not leave recirculated air mode on over a longer period of time, as
“stale” air may result in fatigue in the driver and occupants, divert your attention and also cause the windows to mist up. The risk of having an accident increases. Switch recirculated air mode off as soon as the windows begin misting up.

● If the windscreen mists up, press the button  1 ⇒ fig. 95 . After the windscreen has been demisted, press the button AUTO .
● The automatic air distribution control operates only if the outside temperature
is higher than approx. 2 °C.



Controlling blower
There are a total of seven blower stages available.
The Climatronic system controls the blower stages automatically in line with the
interior temperature. You can also, however, adapt the blower stages manually to
suit your particular needs.


Press again the button  on the left side (reduce blower speed) or on the
right side (increase blower speed).

If you switch off the blower, the Climatronic is switched off.
The set blower speed is displayed above the button
ber of warning lights come on.



when the respective num-

WARNING
● “Stale air” may result in fatigue in the driver and occupants, reduce attention levels and also cause the windows to mist up. The risk of having an accident increases.


Do not switch the Climatronic system off for longer than necessary.



Switch the Climatronic system on as soon as the windows mist up.



Defrosting windscreen
Defrosting windscreen - switching on
– Press the button  ⇒ fig. 95 .
Defrosting windscreen - switching off
– Once again press the button  or the button

AUTO .

The temperature control is controlled automatically. More air flows out of the air
outlet vents 1.



Heating and air conditioning system

Auxiliary heating (auxiliary heating and ventilation)
Description and important information
The auxiliary heating (auxiliary heating and ventilation) heats or
supplies the interior of the vehicle with fresh air independent of the
engine.
Auxiliary heating (auxiliary heating)
The auxiliary heater (parking heater) functions in connection with the air-conditioning system or Climatronic.
It can be used when stationary, when engine is switched off for preheating of the
vehicle as well as while driving (e.g. during the heating phase of the engine).

95

Notice
If the auxiliary heating runs, the fuel consumption comes from the vehicle tank.
The auxiliary heating automatically controls the filling level in the fuel tank. If only
a low quantity of fuel is present in the fuel tank, the function of the auxiliary heating is blocked.
● The exhaust pipe of the auxiliary heating, which is located on the underside of
the vehicle, must not be clogged and the exhaust flow must not be blocked.
● If the auxiliary heating and ventilation is running, the vehicle battery discharges. If the auxiliary heating and ventilation has been operated several times over a
longer period, the vehicle must be driven a few kilometers in order to recharge the
vehicle battery.
● The auxiliary heating only switches the blower on, if it has achieved a coolant
temperature of approx. 50 °C.

The engine is also preheated when the vehicle is stationary and the engine is
switched off, if the auxiliary heating is switched on.

● At low outside temperatures, this can result in a formation of water vapour in
the area of the engine compartment. This is quite normal and is not an operating
problem.

The auxiliary heating (auxiliary heating) warms up the coolant during the combustion of fuel from the vehicle tank. The coolant warms up the air, which (if the
blower speed is not set to zero) flows into the occupant compartment.

● After switching off the auxiliary heating, the coolant pump runs for a short period.

Auxiliary ventilation
The auxiliary ventilation enables fresh air to flow into the vehicle interior by
switching off the engine, whereby the interior temperature is effectively decreased (e.g. with the vehicle parked in the sun).

WARNING
● The auxiliary heating must never be operated in closed rooms - risk of poisoning!


The auxiliary heating must not be running during refueling - risk of fire.

● The exhaust pipe of the auxiliary heating is located on the underside of
the vehicle. Therefore do not place the vehicle, if you wish to operate the auxiliary heating, in such a way that the exhaust gases of the auxiliary heating
can come easily into contact with inflammable materials (e.g. dry grass) or
easily inflammable substances (e.g. fuel run out).

Using the system

Safety

Driving Tips

● The auxiliary heating and ventilation does not switch on or comes on, if the
vehicle battery indicates a low loading state ⇒ page 191, Automatic consumer
shut-off.
● The auxiliary heating (auxiliary heating) does not switch on, if the following
was shown in the information display or before switching off the ignition: Please
refuel!
● The air inlet in front of the windscreen must be free of ice, snow or leaves in
order to ensure that the auxiliary heating operates properly.
● So that warm air can flow into the vehicle interior after switching on the auxiliary heating, you must maintain the comfort temperature normally selected by you
and leave the air outlet vents in an open position. It is recommended to put the air

flow in the position  or .

General Maintenance

Breakdown assistance

Technical data

96

Heating and air conditioning system

Direct switching on/off



In the menu Mode select the desired mode Heating or Ventilation.



Programming
For the programming of the auxiliary heating (auxiliary heating and ventilation) in
the menu Aux. heating there are three pre-set times:
● Starting time 1
● Starting time 2
● Starting time 3

Fig. 96 Button for direct switching on/
off of the auxiliary heating (auxiliary
heating and ventilation) on the operating part of the air conditioning system

In each pre-set time, the day and the time (hour and minute) can be set for
switching on the auxiliary heating and/or ventilation.

The auxiliary heating (auxiliary heating and ventilation) can be switched on or off
directly with the  button on the air conditioning system, Climatronic- or heating
⇒ fig. 96 .

An empty position can be found between Sunday and Monday when selecting the
day. If this empty position is selected, the activation is performed without taking
into account the day.

If the auxiliary heating and ventilation is not switched off earlier, it switches off
automatically after the expiration of the set operating period, in the menu Running time.

If you leave the pre-set menu by selecting the menu Back or do not make changes
on the display for longer than 10 seconds, the set values are stored, but the preset time is not active.



Both other pre-set times can be programmed and stored in the same way.

Using the system
So that the auxiliary heating (auxiliary heating and ventilation)
functions according to your expectations, it is necessary to carry
out the basic setting before its programming.
Basic setting
– On the information display, select in the Main menu the menu point Aux. heating.


In the menu Aux. heating select the menu point Day of the wk. and set today's date.



By selecting the menu point Back, you will reach one level higher in the menu
Aux. Heating.



In the menu Aux. heating select the menu point Running time and set the desired operating time in steps of 5 minutes. The running time can be 10 to 60
minutes.



By selecting the menu point Back, you will reach in the menu Aux. heating.



In the menu Aux. heating select the menu point Mode.

Only one programmed pre-set time can be active.
The last programmed pre-set time remains active.
After the auxiliary heating activates at the set time, it is necessary to pre-set a
time again.
Changing the active pre-set time is carried out after selecting the menu point Activate in the menu Aux. heating by selecting a pre-set time.
The prerequisite for the correct switching on of the auxiliary heating (auxiliary
heating and ventilation) according to the programmed pre-set time is the correct
setting of the current time and the weekday ⇒ page 96.
If the system is running, a warning light in the button for direct switching on/off
of the auxiliary heating  lights up.
The running system deactivates after expiration of the operating period or is deactivated earlier by pressing the button for direct switching on/off of the auxiliary
heating  ⇒ page 96.
A random pre-set time can be deactivated by selecting the menu point Deactivate
£
in the menu Activate.

Heating and air conditioning system
After selecting the menu Factory setting in the menu Aux. heating, it is possible
to return to the factory setting.

Radio remote control
The auxiliary heating (auxiliary heating and ventilation) can be
switched on or off with the remote control.

Fig. 97 Auxiliary heating: Radio remote control/bottom of the radio remote control with the
battery cover

.



For switching on, press the button

ON



For switching off, press the button

OFF .

If the battery is properly charged, the effective range is up to 600 m. For switching
on or off the auxiliary heating, hold the remote control vertically with the antenna
A ⇒ fig. 97 towards the top. You must not cover over the antenna with the fingers or the palm of the hand. Obstacles between the radio remote control and the
vehicle, bad weather conditions and a weaker battery can clearly reduce the
range.
The auxiliary heating can only be switched on or off with the radio remote control,
if the distance between the radio remote control and the vehicle is at least 2 m.
Warning light in the radio remote control
The warning light in the radio remote control ⇒ fig. 97 indicates after a keystroke
if the remote control signal was received by the auxiliary heating and if the battery is adequately charged.

Safety

Display warning light

Description

Lights up green for 2 seconds.

The auxiliary heating was switched on.

Lights up red for 2 seconds.

The auxiliary heating was switched off.

Slowly flashes green for 2 seconds.

The ignition signal was not received.

Quickly flashes green for 2 seconds.

The auxiliary heating is blocked, e. g
because the tank is nearly empty or
there is a fault in the auxiliary heating.

Flashes red for 2 seconds.

The switch off signal was not received.

Lights up orange for 2 seconds, then
green or red.

The battery is weak, however the
switching on or off signal was received.

Lights up orange for 2 seconds, then
flashes green or red.

The battery is weak, however the
switching on or off signal was not received.

Flashes orange for 5 seconds.

The battery is discharged, however the
switching on or off signal was not received.

CAUTION
There are electronic components in the radio remote control, protect the remote
control against water, severe shocks and direct sun rays.



Changing the battery of the radio remote control

The transmitter and the battery are housed in the housing of the remote control.
The receiver is located in the interior of the car.

Using the system



97

Driving Tips

If the warning light of the radio remote control indicates a weak or discharged
battery, ⇒ fig. 97 , it must be replaced. The battery is located under a cover on the
back of the radio remote control.


Insert a flat, blunt object, such as a coin, into the gap of the battery cover, turn
it against the direction of the arrow up to the mark, and unlock the cover
⇒ fig. 97 - right.



Change the battery, replace the battery cover and lock it by moving it in the
direction of the arrow.

For the sake of the environment
Dispose of a used battery in accordance with environmental regulations.

General Maintenance

Breakdown assistance

Technical data

£

98

Heating and air conditioning system
Notice



Pay attention to the correct polarity when changing the battery.

● The replacement battery must have the same specification as the original battery.



Starting-off and Driving

99

Starting-off and Driving
Setting steering wheel position

WARNING (Continued)

● If you adjust the steering wheel further towards the head, you will reduce
the protection offered by the driver airbag in the event of an accident. Check
that the steering wheel is aligned to the chest.
● When driving, hold the steering wheel with both hands firmly on the outer
edge in the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock position. Never hold the steering wheel
firmly in the 12 o'clock position or in another way (e.g. in the middle of the
steering wheel or at the inner steering wheel edge). In such cases, injuries to
the arms, the hands and the head can occur when the driver airbag is deployed.

Fig. 98 Adjustable steering wheel: Lever below the steering wheel/safe distance to the
steering wheel



Ignition lock

You can set the height and the forward/back position of the steering wheel to the
desired position.


Adjust the driver seat ⇒ page 61, Adjusting the front seats.



Pull the lever below the steering wheel down ⇒ fig. 98 - left ⇒ 



Set the steering wheel to the desired position (concerning height and forward/
back position).



Push the lever upwards as far as the stop.

.

Fig. 99 Ignition lock positions

WARNING


You must not adjust the steering wheel when the vehicle is moving!

● The driver must maintain a distance of at least 25 cm to the steering wheel
⇒ fig. 98 - right. Not maintaining this minimum distance will mean that the
airbag system will not be able to properly protect you - hazard!
● For safety reasons the lever must always be firmly pushed up to avoid the
steering wheel altering its position unintentionally when driving - risk of accident!

Petrol engines
1 - ignition switched off, engine off, the steering can be locked.
2 - ignition switched on
3 - start engine

Diesel engines
1 - interruption of fuel supply, ignition switched off, engine off, the steering can
be locked.
2 - heating glow plugs on, ignition switched on

● You should not switch on any major electrical components during the heating
£
period otherwise the vehicle battery will be drained unnecessarily.
Using the system

Safety

Driving Tips

General Maintenance

Breakdown assistance

Technical data

100

Starting-off and Driving

Starting the engine

3 - start engine

Applies to all models:
Position 1

General
You can only start the engine only using an original ignition key.

To lock the steering, with the ignition key withdrawn, turn the steering wheel until the steering locking pin is heard to engage. You should always lock the steering
as a general rule if you leave your vehicle. This acts as a deterrent against possible
theft of your vehicle ⇒  .

Manual gearbox
– Place the gearshift lever into neutral and put on the handbrake firmly before
starting the engine.

Position 2



Move the steering wheel back and forward a little if the ignition key cannot, or
cannot easily be turned into this position, in order to release the steering lock.
Position 3
The engine is started in this position. At the same time switched on low beam or
main beam or other electrical components with major power consumption are
briefly switched off. The ignition key moves back into position 2 when one releases the key.



Let go of the key as soon as the engine starts otherwise there may be damage
to the starter.

Automatic gearbox
– Place the gearshift lever into P or N before starting the engine, and apply the
handbrake firmly.

The ignition key must be turned back into position 1 each time before starting
the engine again. The starter repeat lock in the ignition lock prevents the starter
being engaged when the engine is running and thus getting damaged.



Ignition key withdrawal lock (automatic gearbox)
You can only withdraw the ignition key after switching off the ignition if the selector lever is in position P.

Let go of the key as soon as the engine starts otherwise there may be damage
to the starter.

The engine running noises may louder at first be louder for a short time after
starting the cold engine until oil pressure can be built up in the hydraulic valve
clearance compensation. This is quite normal and is not an operating problem.

WARNING

If the engine does not start ...
You can use the battery of another vehicle as a jump-start aid ⇒ page 207.

● When driving, the ignition key must always be in the position 2 (ignition
switched on) without the engine running. This position is indicated by the
warning lights coming on. If this is not the case, it could result in unexpected
locking of the steering wheel - risk of accident!

WARNING

● Only remove the ignition key from the ignition lock when the vehicle has
come to a standstill (by applying the handbrake or moving the selector lever
into the position P). The steering lock can engage immediately - risk of accident!
● Always withdraw the ignition key if you are going to leave the vehicle,
even for a short time. This is particularly important if children are left in the
vehicle. The children might otherwise start the engine or switch on electrical
equipment (e.g. power windows) - risk of accident or injury!

Engage the clutch pedal and keep it depressed until the engine starts.

If you start the engine without depressing the clutch pedal, the engine does not
start and the following message appears in the Information display Depress
clutch! (Depress clutch!) or CLUTCH in the display of the instrument cluster.

● Never run the engine in non ventilated or enclosed areas. The exhaust
gases of the engine contain besides the odorless and colourless carbon monoxide a poisonous gas - hazard! Carbon monoxide can cause unconsciousness
and death.



Never leave your vehicle unattended with the engine running.

£

Starting-off and Driving
You should not switch on any major electrical components during the heating
period otherwise the vehicle battery will be drained unnecessarily.

CAUTION
● The starter may only be operated (ignition key position 3 ), if the engine is not
running. If the starter is immediately operated after switching off the engine, the
starter or the engine can be damaged.

● You should start the engine immediately after the glow plug warning light 
has gone out.
● The glow plug warning light will come on for about one second if the engine is
at a normal operating temperature or if the outside temperature is above +5°C.
This means that you can start the engine right away.
● Interrupt the attempt at starting after 10 seconds if the engine does not start
right awayand wait for about 30 seconds before repeating the attempt.
● It is possible that the fuse on the diesel preglow system is defect if the engine
still does not start. Check the fuse and replace it if necessary ⇒ page 212.
● Contact the nearest specialist garage to obtain professional assistance.

● Avoid high engine revolutions, full throttle and high engine loads as long as
the engine has not yet reached its normal operating temperature - risk of damaging the engine!
● Do not tow start the engine - danger of damaging the engine. On vehicles with
a catalytic converter, unburnt fuel may get into the catalytic converter where it
may ignite. This in turn may damage or destroy the catalytic converter. You can
use the battery of another vehicle as a jump-start aid ⇒ page 207, Jump-starting.

For the sake of the environment
Never warm up the engine when the vehicle is standing. Drive off right away.
Through this the engine reaches its operating temperature more rapidly and the
pollutant emissions are lower.

101



Starting the engine after the fuel tank has run dry
It may take longer than normal to start the engine after refuelling if the fuel tank
has run completely dry - up to one minute. This is because the fuel system must
first of all be filled while the attempting to start the engine.



Petrol engines

Switching off the engine

These engines are fitted with a starter system which selects the correct fuel-air
mixture for every external air temperature.



● Do not operate accelerator before and when starting engine.
● Interrupt the attempt at starting after 10 seconds if the engine does not start
right awayand wait for about 30 seconds before repeating the attempt.
● It is possible that the fuse on the electrical fuel pump is defect if the engine
still does not start. Check the fuse and replace it if necessary ⇒ page 212.
● Contact the nearest specialist garage to obtain professional assistance.
It may be necessary, if the engine is very hot, to slightly depress the accelerator
after the engine has started.

Diesel engines

The engine can be switched off by turning the ignition key from position
⇒ fig. 99 into position 1 .

WARNING
● Never switch off the engine before the vehicle is stationary - risk of accident!


● The brake booster only operates when the engine is running. Greater
physical effort for braking is required when engine is switched off. Because if
you do not stop as normal, this can cause an accident and severe injuries.

CAUTION

Glow plug system
Diesel engines are equipped with a glow plug system, the preglow period being
controlled automatically in line with the coolant temperature and outside temperature.

you should not switch the engine off right away at the end of your journey after
the engine has been operated for a lengthy period at high loads but should be allowed it to run at idling speed for about 2 minutes. This prevents any accumula£
tion of heat when the engine is switched off.

The preglow indicator light  comes on after the ignition has been switched on.

Using the system

Safety

Driving Tips

General Maintenance

Breakdown assistance

Technical data

102

Starting-off and Driving

Pedals

Notice
● The radiator fan may continue running for a further 10 minutes or so after the
engine and the ignition have been switched off. The coolant fan may, however, also switch on again after some time if the coolant temperature rises because of an
accumulation of heat in the engine or if the engine is warm and the engine compartment is additionally heated by strong sunlight.
● This is why particular care is required when carrying out any work in the engine compartment ⇒ page 182, Working in the engine compartment.

Operation of the pedals must not be hindered!
WARNING


Shifting (manual gearbox)

● In the driver's footwell, only a footmat, which is attached to the two corresponding attachment points, may be used.
● No objects are allowed in the driver's footwell – risk of obstruction or limitation in operating the pedal!

Notice
● Greater brake pedal distances may be needed when there is a fault in the
brake system.
● Use only footmats from the range of ŠKODA Original Accessories, which are at
tached at two attachment points.

Handbrake
Fig. 100 The shift pattern: 5-speed or 6speed manual gearbox

Shift into reverse only when the car is stationary. Depress the clutch pedal and
hold it fully depressed. Wait a moment before engaging reverse gear in order to
avoid any shift noises.
The reversing lights will come on once reverse gear is engaged, provided the ignition is on.

WARNING
Never engage the reverse gear when driving - risk of accident!

Notice
● One should not lay the hand on the shift lever while driving the vehicle. The
pressure of the hand will be transferred to the gearshift forks in the gearbox. This
can, over a period of time, lead to early wear of the gearshift forks.
● Depress the clutch pedal fully when changing gears, in order to avoid unneces
sary wear and damage.

Fig. 101 Centre console: Handbrake

Applying the handbrake
– Pull the handbrake lever up fully.
Releasing the handbrake
– Pull the handbrake lever up slightly and at the same time press in the locking
button ⇒ fig. 101 .


Hold the button pressed and push the handbrake lever down fully ⇒ 

.

£

Starting-off and Driving
The handbrake warning light  lights up when the handbrake is applied, provided
the ignition is on.

The audible parking aid determines the distance from the rear bumper to an obstacle behind the car with the aid of ultrasound sensors. The tones of the parking
aid can be adapted in the menu of the Information display ⇒ page 19. The sensors
are integrated in the rear bumper.

A warning signal sounds and the following text appears in the Information display
if you have inadvertently driven off with the handbrake applied:

Range of sensors
The clearance warning begins at a distance of about 160 cm from the obstacle
(area A ⇒ fig. 102 ). The interval between the warning signals becomes shorter as
the clearance is reduced.

Release parking brake! (Release parking brake!)
The handbrake warning is activated if you drive at a speed of more than 6 km/h
for more than 3 seconds.

A continuous tone sounds from a distance of approx. 30 cm (area B ) - danger
area. You should not reverse any further after this signal sounds! If the vehicle is
equipped with a factory-fitted towing device, the indication threshold of the danger area starts - continuous tone - 5 cm further behind the vehicle. The vehicle
can be extended through an installed detachable towing device.

WARNING
● Please note that the handbrake must be fully released. A handbrake which
is only partially released can result in the rear brakes overheating which will
have a negative effect on the operation of the brake system - risk of accident!
In addition this can result in premature wear of the rear brake pads.
● Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. The children might, for example, release the handbrake or take the vehicle out of gear. The vehicle
might then move off - risk of accident!

CAUTION
After the car has come to a stop, always first of all apply the handbrake firmly before then additionally engaging a gear (manual gearbox) or moving the selector
lever into position P (automatic gearbox).



On factory-fitted radio navigation systems and car stereos, the distance to the obstruction can also be shown graphically in the display. On vehicles with a factoryfitted towing device, the rear sensors are deactivated when towing a trailer. The
driver is informed about this by a graphic display (vehicle towing a trailer) in the
radio or the radio navigation display. In some factory fitted radios or radio navigation systems, you can configure the system to reduce the playback volume when
the parking aid is active, see the owner's manual for the radio or radio navigation
system. This makes it easier to hear the parking aid.
Activating
The parking aid is activated automatically when reverse gear is engaged and the
ignition is turned on. This is confirmed by a brief audible signal.

Rear parking aid
The parking aid provides a warning of obstacles behind the vehicle.

Deactivating
The parking aid is deactivated by removing the reverse gear.

Fig. 102 Parking aid: Detection range of
rear sensors

Using the system

103

Safety

Driving Tips

General Maintenance

Breakdown assistance

Technical data

£

104

Starting-off and Driving
The audible parking aid determines the distance between the front or rear bumper and an obstacle with the aid of ultrasound sensors. The sensors are integrated
in the front and rear bumper. The signal tones for the front parking aid sound
higher as standard than for the rear parking aid. The tones of the parking aid can
be adapted in the menu of the Information display ⇒ page 19.

WARNING
● The parking aid is not a substitute for the driver paying proper attention
and it is always the driver's responsibility to take care when parking the vehicle or carrying out similar manoeuvres.
● You should therefore satisfy yourself, before reversing, that there is no
small obstacle, such as a rock, thin post, trailer drawbar etc., behind your vehicle. Such an obstacle might not be within the range detected by the sensors.

Range of sensors
The distance warning begins at a distance of about 120 cm from the obstacle in
front of the vehicle (area A ⇒ fig. 103 ) and about 160 cm from the obstacle behind the vehicle (area A ⇒ fig. 102 ). The interval between the warning signals becomes shorter as the clearance is reduced.

● Under certain circumstances, surfaces of certain objects and types of
clothing cannot reflect the signal of the parking aid. Thus, these objects or
people who wear such clothing are not recognised by the sensors of the parking aid.

A continuous tone sounds from a distance of approx. 30 cm (area B ) - danger
area. From this moment on do not continue driving!If the vehicle is equipped with
a factory-fitted towing device, the border of the danger area starts - continuous
tone - 5 cm further away from the vehicle. The vehicle can be extended through
an installed detachable towing device.

Notice
● The parking aid does not operate if you are towing a trailer (applies to models
which feature a factory-fitted towing device).
● If a warning signal sounds for about 3 seconds after switching the ignition on
and engaging reverse gear, and there is no obstacle close to your car, this indicates a system fault. Have the fault rectified by a specialist workshop.
● The sensors must be kept clean and free of ice to enable the parking aid to
operate properly.

Front and rear parking aid
The parking aid provides a warning of obstacles in front and behind
the vehicle.



On factory-fitted radio navigation systems and car stereos, the distance to the obstruction can also be shown graphically in the display. On vehicles with a factoryfitted towing device, the rear sensors are deactivated when towing a trailer. The
driver is informed about this by a graphic display (vehicle towing a trailer) in the
radio or the radio navigation display. In some factory fitted radios or radio navigation systems, you can configure the system to reduce the playback volume when
the parking aid is active, see the owner's manual for the radio or radio navigation
system. This makes it easier to hear the parking aid.
Activating
The parking aid is activated when the reverse gear is engaged and the ignition is
switched on or by pressing the button ⇒ fig. 103 - left, the symbol  lights up in
the button. The activation is confirmed by a brief acknowledgement signal.
Deactivating
The parking aid is deactivated after pressing the button  ⇒ fig. 103 - left, or at a
speed of more than 10 km/h - the symbol  in the button is no longer illuminated. £

Fig. 103 Activating the parking aid/detection range of the front sensors

Starting-off and Driving

105

WARNING

WARNING
● The parking aid is not a substitute for the driver paying proper attention
and it is always the driver's responsibility to take care when reversing the vehicle or carrying out similar manoeuvres.

● For safety reasons, the cruise control system must not be used in dense
traffic or on unfavourable road surfaces (such as icy roads, slippery roads,
loose gravel) - risk of accident!

● You should therefore satisfy yourself, before reversing, that there is no
small obstacle, such as a rock, thin post, trailer drawbar etc., in front or behind
your vehicle. Such an obstacle might not be within the range detected by the
sensors.

● In order to prevent unintentional use of the cruise control system, always
switch off the system after use.

Notice

● Under certain circumstances, surfaces of certain objects and types of
clothing cannot reflect the signal of the parking aid. Thus, these objects or
people who wear such clothing are not recognised by the sensors of the parking aid.

● Models fitted with a manual gearbox: Always depress the clutch pedal if you
switch on the cruise control system when the gearbox is in Neutral! Otherwise the
engine can rev up unintentionally.
● The cruise control system is not able to maintain a constant speed when driving on steep downhill sections. The weight of the vehicle increases the speed at
which it travels. One should shift down in good time to a lower gear or slow the
vehicle down by applying the foot brake.

Notice
● Only the front parking aid operates if you are towing a trailer (applies only to
models which feature a factory-fitted towing device).

● It is not possible on vehicles fitted with an automatic gearbox to switch on the
cruise control system if the selector lever is in the position P, N or R.

● If a warning signal sounds for about 3 seconds after activating the system and
there is no obstacle close to your car, this indicates a system fault. The fault is
confirmed additionally when the symbol  flashes in the button ⇒ fig. 103 - left.
Have the fault rectified by a specialist workshop.



Storing a speed

● The sensors must be kept clean and free of ice to enable the parking aid to
operate properly.
● If the parking aid is activated and the selector lever of the automatic gearbox
is in the position P , warning signal indicates interruption (vehicle can no longer
move).



Cruise control system (CCS)
Fig. 104 Operating lever: Rocker button
and switch of the cruise control system

Introduction
The cruise control system (CCS) maintains a constant speed, more than 30 km/h
(20 mph), once it has been set, without you having to depress the accelerator
pedal. This is only possible within the range which is permitted by the power output and braking power of the engine. The cruise control system makes it possible
- particularly on long journeys - for you to rest your “accelerator foot”.

Using the system

Safety

Driving Tips

The cruise control system is operated by means of the switch A ⇒ fig. 104 and
the rocker button B in the left lever of the multi-functional switch.


Press the switch A into the position ON.



After the desired speed has been reached, press the rocker button B into the
£
SET position.

General Maintenance

Breakdown assistance

Technical data

106

Starting-off and Driving

Switching off the cruise control system temporarily

After you have released the rocker button B out of the position SET, the speed
you have just stored is maintained at a constant speed without having to depress
the accelerator.



You can switch off the cruise control system temporarily by depressing the
brake pedal or clutch pedal, on vehicles fitted with an automatic gearbox only
with the brake pedal.



You can switch off temporarily the cruise control system, if you press the
switch A in the middle position.

You can increase the speed by depressing the accelerator. Releasing the accelerator will cause the speed to drop again to the set speed.
This does not apply, however, if you drive at a speed which is more than 10 km/h
higher than the set speed for a period of longer than 5 minutes. The stored speed
will be cancelled in the memory. You then have to re-store the desired speed.

The set speed remains stored in the memory.

One can reduce the speed in the usual manner. The system is switched off temporarily by actuating the brake or clutch pedal ⇒ page 106.

The Resumption of the stored speed is achieved by releasing the brake or clutch
pedal, on vehicles fitted with automatic gearbox only after releasing the brake
pedal and after shortly pressing the rocker button B ⇒ fig. 104 into the position
RES.

WARNING
First ensure that it is not too high for the traffic conditions which exist at that
moment before resuming the stored speed.

First ensure that it is not too high for the traffic conditions which exist at that
moment before resuming the stored speed.

Changing a stored speed
You can also change the speed of the vehicle without depressing
the accelerator.



Switching off the cruise control system completely


Faster
– You can increase the stored speed without depressing the accelerator, by
pressing the rocker button B ⇒ fig. 104 in the RES position.


WARNING



Press the switch A ⇒ fig. 104 to the right into position OFF.



“(START-STOP)”

The speed of the car will increase continuously if you hold the rocker button
pressed in the RES position. Once the car has reached the desired speed, release the rocker button. The set speed is then stored in the memory.

Slower
– You can decrease the stored speed by pressing the rocker button B in the
SET- position.




Holding down the rocker button pressed in the SET position will cause the
speed of the vehicle to reduce continuously. Once the car has reached the desired speed, release the rocker button. The set speed is then stored in the
memory.
If you release the rocker button when the car is travelling at a speed of less
than 30 km/h, the speed is not stored, the memory is erased. It is then necessary to again store the speed with the rocker button B in the position SET
after an increase in speed of the vehicle to more than 30 km/hour.

Fig. 105 Dash panel: START-STOP System button

The “START-STOP” system helps you to save fuel while at the same time reducing
£
harmful exhaust emissions and CO2 emissions.


Starting-off and Driving
The function is automatically activated each time the ignition is switched on.

The engine speed is less than 1200 1/min.

In the start-stop mode, the engine automatically switches to the vehicle's idle
phase, e.g. when stopped at traffic lights.

The temperature of the vehicle battery is not too low or too high.

Information regarding the current state of the “START-STOP” system is indicated
in the display of the instrument cluster.

The difference between the outdoor- and the set temperature in the interior is
not too great.

Automatic engine shut down (stop phase)
– Stop the vehicle (where necessary, apply the handbrake).


Take the vehicle out of gear.



Take your foot off the clutch.

The pressure in the brake system is sufficient.

The vehicle speed since the last time the engine was switched off was greater
than 3 km/h.
No cleaning of the diesel particle filter takes place ⇒ page 23
The front wheels are not turned excessively (the steering angle is less than 3/4
of a steering wheel revolution).
Conditions for an automatic restart (start phase)

Automatic engine restart (start phase).
– Push down on the clutch.

The clutch is pressed.

Switching the “START-STOP” system on and off
You can switch the “START STOP” system on/off by pressing the button
⇒ fig. 105 .
When start-stop mode is deactivated, the warning light in the button lights up.
If the vehicle is in the stop phase when manually switching off the system, the engine starts immediately.

The max./min. temperature is set.
The Defrost function for the windscreen is switched on.
A high blower stage has been selected.
The “START STOP” button is pressed.
Conditions for an automatic restart without driver intervention
The vehicle moves at a speed of more than 3 km/h.

The “START-STOP” system is very complex. Some of the procedures are hard to
check without servicing. The general conditions for the proper functioning of the
“START-STOP” system are listed in the following overview.

The difference between the outdoor- and the set temperature in the interior is
too great.

Conditions for the automatic engine shut down (stop phase)

The pressure in the brake system is not sufficient.

The gearshift lever is in Neutral.

ERROR: START STOP
(ERROR: START STOP)

The driver has fastened the seat belt.
The driver's door is closed.
The bonnet is closed.
The vehicle is at a standstill.
The factory-fitted towing device is not electrically connected to a trailer.
The engine is at operating temperature.
The stationary vehicle is not on a steep slope or a steep downhill section.

Driving Tips

Error in the START-STOP system

START STOP NOT POSSIBLE

Automatic engine shut down is not
possible

START STOP ACTIVE

Automatic engine shut down (stop
phase)

SWITCH OFF IGNITION

The charge state of the vehicle battery is sufficient.

Safety

The charge state of the vehicle battery is not sufficient.

Messages in the instrument cluster display (valid for vehicles without
Information display)

The clutch pedal is not pressed!

Using the system

107

START MANUALLY

General Maintenance

Switch off the ignition
Start the engine manually
Breakdown assistance

Technical data

£

108

Starting-off and Driving

WARNING
● The brake servo unit and power steering only operate if the engine is running.


Never let the vehicle roll with the engine switched off.

CAUTION
If the “START-STOP” system is used at very high outside temperatures over a very
long period of time, the vehicle battery can be damaged.

Notice
● Changes to the outdoor temperature can have an effect on the internal temperature of the vehicle battery even after several hours. If the vehicle remains
outdoors for a long time in minus temperatures or in direct sunlight, it can take
several hours until the internal temperature of the vehicle battery reaches a suitable temperature for proper operation of the “START STOP” system.
● In some instances it may be necessary to start the engine manually with the
ignition key (e.g. when the seat belt is not inserted or the driver's door is opened
for more than 30 seconds). Follow the messages in the instrument cluster display.
● If the Climatronic is running in automatic mode, under certain conditions, the
engine may not switch off automatically.



Automatic gearbox

109

Automatic gearbox
Information for driving with the 6-speed automatic
gearbox
The maximum speed is reached in the 5th gear. The 6th gear serves as an economic driving programme, which is intended to reduce the fuel consumption.
Shifting up and down through the gears is performed automatically. You can also,
however, switch the gearbox over into the Tiptronic mode. This mode makes it
possible for you to also shift gears manually ⇒ page 113.
Starting-off and Driving
– Depress the brake pedal fully and keep it depressed.


Press the Shiftlock button (button in handle of the selector lever), move the
selector lever into the desired position, e.g. D ⇒ page 111, and then release
the Shiftlock button.



Wait a moment until the gearbox has shifted (a slight engagement nudge can
be felt).



Release the brake pedal and depress the accelerator ⇒ 

.

Stop
– The selector lever position N does not have to be selected when stopping just
for a short time, such as at a cross roads. It is absolutely sufficient to hold the
stopped vehicle stationary by depressing the foot brake. The engine can, however, be allowed just to idle.
Parking
– Depress the brake pedal and hold it depressed.
Apply the handbrake firmly.



Press and Shiftlock button in the selector lever, move the selector lever to P
and then release the Shiftlock button.

The engine can only be started when the selector lever is in position P or N . If the
selector lever is not in the P or N positions when locking the steering, switching
the ignition on or off or when leaving the engine on, the following message will
appear in the Information display Move selector lever to position P/N! or, in the
instrument cluster display:  P/N.

Safety

If the selector lever position N is selected by accident while driving it is first necessary to release pressure on the accelerator pedal and wait for idling speed of
the engine to be reached before engaging a drive position in the selector lever.

WARNING
● Do not depress the accelerator when changing the position of the selector
lever if the car is stationary and the engine is running - risk of accident!
● Never move the selector lever into position R or P when driving - risk of an
accident!
● When the engine is running and the vehicle is stationary, it is necessary to
hold the car with the brake pedal in all the positions of the selector lever (except P and N) since the power transmission is never completely interrupted,
also not when the engine is idling - the vehicle creeps.



Information for driving with the automatic gearbox
DSG



Using the system

It is sufficient to engage selector lever position P when parking on a flat surface.
When parking on a slope you should first apply the handbrake firmly and then
move the selector lever into position P. This is to ensure that there is no excessive
pressure acting on the lock mechanism and that it is easier to subsequently move
the selector lever out of position P. If the selector lever is not in the P positin
when the driver's door is open and the ignition is switched off, or if it is not in the
P position when the ignition is switched off and the driver's door is opened, the
following message will appear in the Information display: Move selector lever to
position P! or, in the instrument cluster display:  P. The message disappears after a few seconds by switching on the ignition or by moving the selector lever into
the position P.

Driving Tips

The abbreviation DSG means Direct shift gearbox (Direct shift gearbox).
Two independent clutches are needed for the power transmission between the
engine and the gearbox. These replace the torque converter of the conventional
automatic gearbox. Their shifting is matched in such a way that there are no jerks
when shifting the gear and the power transmission of the engine to the front
wheels is not interrupted. Shifting up and down through the gears is performed £
General Maintenance

Breakdown assistance

Technical data

110

Automatic gearbox

automatically. You can also, however, switch the gearbox over into the Tiptronic
mode. This mode makes it possible for you to also shift gears manually
⇒ page 113.
Starting-off and Driving
– Depress the brake pedal fully and keep it depressed.




WARNING

Press the Shiftlock button (button in handle of the selector lever), move the
selector lever into the desired position, e.g. D ⇒ page 111, and then release
the Shiftlock button.
Release the brake pedal and depress the accelerator ⇒ 

If the selector lever position N is selected by accident while driving it is first necessary to release pressure on the accelerator pedal and wait for idling speed of
the engine to be reached before engaging a drive position in the selector lever.

.

Stop
– The selector lever position N does not have to be selected when stopping just
for a short time, such as at a cross roads. It is absolutely sufficient to hold the
stopped vehicle stationary by depressing the foot brake. The engine can, however, be allowed just to idle.
Parking
– Depress the brake pedal and hold it depressed.


Apply the handbrake firmly.



Press and Shiftlock button in the selector lever, move the selector lever to P
and then release the Shiftlock button.

The engine can only be started when the selector lever is in position P or N . If the
selector lever is not in the P or N positions when locking the steering, switching
the ignition on or off or when leaving the engine on, the following message will
appear in the Information display Move selector lever to position P/N! or, in the
instrument cluster display:  P/N. At temperatures below -10 °C the engine can
only be started in the selector lever position P.
It is sufficient to engage selector lever position P when parking on a flat surface.
When parking on a slope you should first apply the handbrake firmly and then
move the selector lever into position P. This is to ensure that there is no excessive
pressure acting on the lock mechanism and that it is easier to subsequently move
the selector lever out of position P. If the selector lever is not in the P positin
when the driver's door is open and the ignition is switched off, or if it is not in the
P position when the ignition is switched off and the driver's door is opened, the
following message will appear in the Information display: Move selector lever to
position P! or, in the instrument cluster display:  P. The message disappears after a few seconds by switching on the ignition or by moving the selector lever into
the position P.

● Do not depress the accelerator when changing the position of the selector
lever if the car is stationary and the engine is running - risk of accident!
● Never move the selector lever into position R or P when driving - risk of an
accident!
● If you are stopping at a hill (downhill section), never try to hold the car stationary with the gear engaged by means of the “accelerator”, this means by
letting the clutch slip. This can lead to overheating of the clutch. If there is a
risk of overheating of the clutch due to overload, the clutch is opened automatically and the vehicle rolls backward - risk of accident!
● If you must stop at a slope, depress and hold the brake pedal, so that you
can prevent the vehicle from rolling back.

CAUTION
● The double clutch on the automatic gearbox DSG is equipped with an overload
protection. If you make use of the uphill function on a vehicle which is stationary
or driving slowly uphill, it will result in an increase of thermal stress of the clutches.
● In the event that they overheat, the symbol  appears in the information display with the warning text ⇒ page 29. In such a case bring the vehicle to a stop,
switch off the engine and wait until the warning light and the warning go out risk of gearbox damage! You can continue the trip as soon as the symbol and the
warning go out.



Automatic gearbox

Selector lever positions

111

The brake pedal must be depressed (if the lever is in its position for longer than 2
seconds) in order to move the selector lever out of the position N into the position
D or R, with the ignition switched on, on a vehicle travelling at less than 5 km/
hour or on a stationary vehicle.
D - Position for driving forward
When the selector lever is in this position, the forward gears are shifted up and
down automatically in line with engine load, vehicle speed and the dynamic shift
programme.

You must depress the brake pedal ⇒  if you wish to move the selector lever into
position D from N when the vehicle is travelling at less than 5 km/hour or is stationary.
Fig. 106 Selector lever/information display: Selector lever positions

The current selector lever position is indicated in the information display of the instrument cluster ⇒ fig. 106 - right. In the positions D and S the gear you have already engaged will be additionally displayed on the display.
P - Parklock

The driven wheels are locked mechanically in this position.
The Parklock must only be engaged when the vehicle is stationary ⇒ 

.

If you wish to move the selector lever into or out of this position, you must press
the Shiftlock button in the handle of the selector lever and at the same time depress the brake pedal.
If the battery is used, the selector lever cannot be moved out of the position P.
R - Reverse gear
Reverse gear must only be engaged when the vehicle is stationary and the engine
idling ⇒  .

The brake pedal must be depressed and at the same time the Shiftlock must be
pressed, if you wish to obtain the selector lever positions R, P or N.
When the ignition is switched on and the selector lever is in position R, the reverse lights will come on.

In certain circumstances (e.g. when driving in mountainous regions or when towing a trailer) it may be beneficial to select the manual shift programme ⇒ page 113
for a short time in order to adapt the gearbox ratios manually to the driving situations.
S - Position for sporty style of driving
Shifting up later into a higher gear makes it possible to fully exploit the power potential of the engine. The gearbox also then shifts down at higher engine speeds
as in the position D.

The gearbox does not shift into the 6th gear in the position S, because the maximum speed is reached with the 5th gear1).
The Shiftlock on the selector lever grip must be pressed when moving the selector lever out of the position D into the position S.

WARNING
● Never move the selector lever into position R or P when driving - risk of an
accident!
● When the engine is running and the vehicle is stationary, it is necessary to
hold the car with the brake pedal in all the positions of the selector lever (except P and N) since the power transmission is never completely interrupted,
also not when the engine is idling - the vehicle creeps.

N - Neutral
The transmission is in Neutral in this position.

1)

Not valid for vehicles with automatic gearbox DSG.

Using the system

Safety

Driving Tips

General Maintenance

Breakdown assistance

Technical data

£

112

Automatic gearbox

Kickdown function

WARNING (Continued)

● You must on no account unintentionally operate the throttle (e.g. by hand
from the engine compartment) if a drive position is engaged when the car is
stationary. The vehicle would otherwise immediately start off - also when the
handbrake is firmly applied - risk of an accident!
● You must move the selector lever into position P and firmly apply the
handbrake first before you or any other person opens the bonnet and starts
working on the engine when it is running - risk of accident! It is also essential
to observe all warnings ⇒ page 182, Working in the engine compartment.

The kickdown function provides you with maximum acceleration
power.



Selector lever lock
Automatic selector lever lock 
With the ignition on, the selector lever is locked when it is in the positions P and
N. You must first of all depress the brake pedal in order to move the selector lever
out of this position. The warning light  ⇒ page 27 lights up in the instrument
cluster as a reminder for the driver when the selector lever is in the positions P
and N.
A time delay element ensures that the selector lever is not blocked when rapidly
switching over the position N (e.g. from R to D). This does, for example, allow one
to seesaw out a stuck vehicle. The selector lever lock will click into place if the lever is in the N position for more than 2 seconds without the brake pedal being
pressed.

Fully depressing the accelerator pedal allows the kickdown function to be activated in the desired driving program. This function has precedence over the driving
programme and serves for maximum acceleration of the vehicle when exploiting
the maximum power potential of the engine without taking into account the current selector lever position (D, S or Tiptronic). The gearbox shifts down to one or
several gears in line with the driving state and the vehicle accelerates. The gearbox does not shift up into the highest gear until the engine has reached its maximum revolutions for this gear range.

WARNING
Please note that using the kickdown function can result in the driven wheels
spinning on a smooth or slippery road surface - risk of skidding!

Dynamic shift programme
The automatic gearbox of your vehicle is controlled electronically. Shifting up and
down through the gears is performed automatically on the basis of pre-defined
driving programmes.

The selector lever lock is only active if the vehicle is stationary or moving at speed
of less than 5 km/hour. The lock is switched off automatically into position N
when the car is travelling at a higher speed.

Adopting a moderate style of driving will cause the gearbox to select the most
economical driving programme. Shifting up into a higher gear as soon as possible
and shifting down as late as possible will have a favourable effect on your fuel
consumption.

Shiftlock button
The Shiftlock button in the handle of selector lever prevents certain selector lever
positions being engaged inadvertently. The selector lever lock is cancelled when
you press the Shiftlock button.

Adopting a sporty style of driving with rapid movements of the accelerator pedal
combined with sharp acceleration and frequent changes in speed, exploiting the
top speed of the car or depressing the accelerator pedal (kickdown function), will
cause the gearbox to switch over to this style of driving and shift down earlier
with frequent changes in gears in comparison to the moderate style of driving.

Keylock - Ignition key withdrawal lock
You can only withdraw the ignition key after switching off the ignition if the selector lever is in position P. If the ignition key is withdrawn, the selector lever is

blocked in position P.



Selecting the most appropriate driving programme for the particular style of driving is a continuous process. Irrespective of this it is, however, possible to switch or
shift down into a dynamic shift programme by depressing the accelerator rapidly.
The gearbox shifts down into a lower gear matching the speed of the car and this
allows you to accelerate rapidly (e.g. when overtaking) without having to depress £

Automatic gearbox
the accelerator pedal fully into the kickdown range. The original programme will
be reactivated to match your particular style of driving once the gearbox has shifted up again.
When driving in hilly regions, the gears are selected to match uphill and downhill
sections. This avoids the gearbox frequently shifting up and down when negotiating an uphill stretch. When driving downhill, it is possible to shift down into the
Tiptronic position, in order to exploit the engine brake torque.

113

When you accelerate, the gearbox shifts up automatically into the higher gear just
before the maximum permissible engine speed is reached.
If you select a lower gear, the automatic gearbox does not shift down until there
is no risk of the engine overrevving.



If you operate the kickdown function, the gearbox shifts into a lower gear in line
with the vehicle speed and engine speed.



Manual shifting on the multifunction steering wheel

Tiptronic
The Tiptronic allows the driver to also shift gears manually.

Fig. 108 Multifunction steering wheel:
Manual shifting of gears

Fig. 107 Selector lever: manual shifting/information display: Manual shifting of gears

The selector lever position you have engaged is indicated in the information display of the instrument cluster together with the engaged gear ⇒ fig. 107 - right.
Switching over to manual shifting
– Push the selector lever to the right out of position D. After switching over, the
current engaged gear is indicated in the display.
Shifting up gears
– One-touch forward of the selector lever (in the Tiptronic position) ⇒ fig. 107
+ .
Shifting down gears
– One-touch back of the selector lever (in the Tiptronic position) - .
It is possible to switch over to manual both when the car is stationary and also
when driving.

Using the system

Safety

Driving Tips

Switching over to manual shifting
– Push the selector lever to the right out of position D. After switching over, the
current engaged gear is indicated in the display.
Shifting up gears
– Press the right rocker switch
wheel.
Shifting down gears
– Press the left rocker switch

-

+

⇒ fig. 108 for the multifunction steering

⇒ fig. 108 for the multifunction steering wheel.

Temporarily switching over to manual shifting
– If the selector lever is in position D or S, press the left rocker switch
right rocker switch + for the multifunction steering wheel.


-

or the

If the rocker switches - or + are not pressed for some time, the manual shifting switches off. You can also switch off the temporary switch over to manual
shifting by pressing the right rocker switch + for more than 1 second.

General Maintenance

Breakdown assistance

Technical data



114

Automatic gearbox

Emergency programme
An emergency programme exists in the event of a fault in the system.
The gearbox operates in a corresponding emergency programme if there are functional faults in the gearbox electronics. This is indicated by all of the segments in
the display lighting up or going out.
A functional fault can have the following effect:
● The gearbox only shifts into certain gears.
● The reverse gear R cannot be used.
● The manual shift programme (Tiptronic) is switched off in the emergency
mode.
If the gearbox has switched over to emergency mode, drive to the nearest specialist garage in order to have the fault rectified.

Selector lever-emergency unlocking

Fig. 109 Selector lever-emergency unlocking

In case of interruption of the power supply (e.g. flat vehicle battery, defective
fuse) or defect of the selector lever lock, the selector lever can no longer be shifted from the position P in the normal way and the vehicle can no longer be moved.
The selector lever must be unlocked in case of emergency.


Apply the handbrake firmly.



Open the stowage compartment in front centre console or the front ashtray.



Carefully pull up the front left and right cover.





Pull up rear cover.



Use a finger to press the yellow plastic part in direction of arrow ⇒ fig. 109 .



Simultaneously press the shiftlock button in the handle of the selector lever
and shift the lever into the position N (if the selector lever is shifted again into
the position P, it is once again blocked).



Communication

115

Communication
Multifunction steering wheel
Operate radio and radio navigation system on the multifunction steering wheel
You can of course operate the radio and radio navigation system at the appliance.
You will find a description in the relevant Owner's manual.
If the side lights are switched on, the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel
are illuminated.
The buttons apply for the respective operating mode of the current radio or radio
navigation system.
By pressing or turning the buttons, you can carry out the following functions.
Fig. 110 Multifunction steering wheel:
control buttons

The buttons for setting the basic functions of the factory-fitted radio and radio
navigation system are located on the multifunction steering wheel ⇒ fig. 110 .

Using the system

Safety

Driving Tips

General Maintenance

Breakdown assistance

Technical data

£

116

Communication
Button

Action

1

press briefly

1

press button for a
long period of time

CD/CD changer/MP3

Navigation

Switch off/on tone/activation and deactivation of the voice control a)
without
function

switch off/on

1

 turn upwards

Increase volume

1

 turn downwards

Decrease volume

2

 press briefly

Changing to the next stored radio station
Changing to the next stored traffic information
Interrupting the traffic report

Changing to the next title

2

 press button for a
long time

Interruption of the traffic report

Fast forward

3

 press briefly

Changing to the previously stored radio station
Changing to the previously stored traffic information
Interrupting the traffic report

Changing to the previous title

3

 press button for a
long time

Interruption of the traffic report

Fast rewind

4

 press briefly

5

 press briefly

6

press briefly

Interruption of the traffic report

 turn upwards

Display of the stored/accessible stations
scroll upwards
Interruption of the traffic report

Changing to the previous title

 turn downwards

Display of the stored/accessible stations
scroll downwards
Interruption of the traffic report

Changing to the next title

6

6
a)

Radio, traffic information

Changing the audio source
Call up the main menu
without function

without
function

Valid for the radio navigation system Columbus.

ŠKOSA permits the operation of mobile phones and two-way radio systems with a
professionally installed external aerial and a maximum transmission power of up
to 10 watts.

Notice
● The loudspeakers in the vehicle are matched to a power output of the radio
and radio navigation system of 4x 20 W.
● For the equipment sound system, the loudspeakers are matched to a power
output of the amplifier of 4x40°W + 6x20 W.

Mobile phones and two-way radio systems
The installation of a mobile phone and two-way radio system in a vehicle should
be carried out by a specialist garage.



It is essential that you inform a specialist garage about the possibilites to assemble and operate mobile phones and two-way radio sets which have a power output of more than 10 W. They will inform you which technical possibilities exist for
retrofitting mobile phones.
When using a mobile phone inside the vehicle, which is not inserted into the
phone adapter, and thus has no connection to the external aerial, the electromagnetic radiation can exceed the current limit value. If a suitable adapter is available £

Communication
for your mobile phone, use your mobile phone exclusively in the adapter so that
the radiation in the vehicle drops to a minimum. This also improves the quality of
the connection.

To ensure an optimum signal transmission, always leave the telephone with the
adapter in the telephone mount.
Furthermore the volume can be changed individually during the call at any time
with the button for setting the radio or radio navigation system or with the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel.

Operation of mobile phones or two-way radio systems may interfere with functioning of the electronic systems of your vehicle. The reasons for this may be:




no external aerial,
external aerial incorrectly installed,
transmission power greater than 10 watts.

WARNING
Concentrate fully at all times on your steering! As the driver you are fully responsible for road safety. Use the telephone system only to such an extent, so
that you are in full control of your vehicle at any time.

WARNING
● If a mobile phone or a two-way radio system is operated in the vehicle
without using an external aerial or an external aerial which has been incorrectly installed, this can increase the strength of the electromagnetic field in
the interior of the vehicle.


Notice
● Please refer to the following guidelines ⇒ page 116, Mobile phones and twoway radio systems.
● Should you have any questions, please contact an authorised ŠKODA Service
Partner.

Please concentrate fully at all times on your driving!

● You must not install two-way radio systems, mobile phones or mounts on
the covers of the airbags or within the immediate deployment range of airbags. This might result in injuries to the occupants in the event of an accident.

A phone phonebook is part of the mobile phone preinstallation with voice control.
In the phone phonebook there are 2500 free memory locations available. Each
contact can contain up to 4 numbers. This phone phonebook can be used in line
with the mobile telephone.

Notice
Observe the country-specific regulations for the use of mobile phones in vehicles.

Universal telephone preinstallation GSM II
Introduction
The universal telephone preinstallation GSM II is a built-in “hands-free system”, it
provides a voice operated convenience mode via the multifunction steering wheel
or the radio navigation system.
All communication between a telephone and the hands-free system of your vehicle can only be established with the help of the Bluetooth® technology. The
adapter serves only for charging the telephone and for transmitting the signal to
the external aerial of the vehicle.

Safety

Driving Tips



Phone Phonebook

● Never leave a mobile phone on a seat, on the dash panel or in another
area, from which it can be thrown during a sudden braking manoeuvre, an accident or a collision. In this case, the occupants of the vehicle might be injured.

Using the system

117



On vehicles fitted with the radio navigation system Columbus, a maximum of 1200
telephone contacts are shown in the display of this appliance.
After the first connection of the telephone, the system begins to load the phone
book from the phone and the SIM card into the memory of the control unit.
Each time the telephone has established a new connection with the hands-free
system, an update of the relevant phone book is performed. The updating can
take a few minutes. During this time the phone book, which was stored after the
last update was completed, is available. Newly stored telephone numbers are only
shown after the updating has ended.
If the number of contacts loaded exceeds 2 500, the phone book is not complete.
If a telephone event (e.g. incoming or outgoing call, dialogue of the voice control)
occurs during the updating procedure, the updating is interrupted. After the telephone event has ended, the updating starts anew.

General Maintenance

Breakdown assistance

Technical data



118

Communication

Connection of the mobile phone with the hands-free system
In order to connect a mobile phone with the hands-free system, it is necessary to
connect the telephone to the hands-free system. Detailed information on this is
provided in the operating instructions of your mobile phone. The following steps
must be carried out for the connection:


Activate the Bluetooth® in your telephone and the visibility of the mobile
phone.



Switch on the ignition.



Select the menu Phone - Phone search in the information display and wait until the control unit has ended the search.



Select your mobile phone in the menu of the units found.



Confirm the PIN (as standard 1234).



If the hands-free system announces (as standard Skoda UHV) on the display of
the mobile phone, enter the PIN (as standard 1234) within 30 seconds and wait
until the connection is established1).



After ending the connection, confirm in the information display that a new
user profile was created.

If no more free space is available for creating a new user profile, delete an existing
user profile.

Connection with an already paired mobile phone
After switching on the ignition, the connection is automatically established for the
already paired mobile phone1). Check on the mobile unit if the automatic connection was established.
Disconnecting the connection
● By withdrawing the ignition key.
● By disconnecting the device in the information display.
● By disconnecting the device in the mobile phone.
Solving connection problems
If the system announces No paired phone found, check the operating state of the
telephone:
● Is the telephone switched on?
● Is the PIN code entered?
● Is Bluetooth® active?
● Is the visibility of the mobile phone active?
● Was the telephone already paired with the hands-free system?

WARNING
In the event of air transport, the Bluetooth® function of the hands-free system must be switched off by a specialist garage!

If you have not managed to connect your mobile phone with the hands-free system within 3 minutes after switching on the ignition, switch the ignition off and
then again on. The visibility of the hands-free system is established again for 3
minutes. The visibility of the Bluetooth® device is automatically switched off if the
vehicle starts off or if the mobile phone connects to the device.

● Not valid for all mobile phones which enable a communication via Bluetooth®.
You can ask at an authorised ŠKODA Service Partner if your telephone is compatible with the universal telephone preinstallation GSM II.

During the connecting procedure, no other mobile phone may be connected with
the hands-free system.

● If a suitable adapter is available for your mobile phone, use your mobile phone
exclusively in the adapter so that the radiation in the vehicle drops to a minimum. £

Up to four mobile phones can be paired to the hands-free system, whereby only
one mobile phone can communicate with the hands-free system.

1)

Some mobile phones have a menu, in which the authorization for establishing a Bluetooth® connection is performed via the input of a code. If the input for the authorization is necessary, it must always be performed when re-establishing the Bluetooth connection.

Notice

Communication
● Inserting the mobile phone into the adapter ensures an optimal sending and
receiving power and offers at the same time the advantage of the battery charging.
● The range of the Bluetooth® connection to the hands-free system is restricted
to the vehicle interior. The range is dependent on local factors, e.g. obstacles between the devices and mutual interferences with other devices. If your mobile
phone is e.g. in a jacket pocket, this can lead to difficulties when establishing the
Bluetooth® connection with the hands-free system or the data transfer.

119

CAUTION
Taking the mobile phone out of the adapter during the call can lead to interruption of the connection. When taking out the mobile phone, the connection to the
factory-fitted antenna is interrupted, this reduces the quality of the transmitting
and receiving signal. The charging of the mobile phone battery is also interrupted.




Operating telephone calls with the aid of the adapter.

Inserting the mobile phone and adapter

Fig. 112 Illustration image: Single-button adapter/two-button adapter
Fig. 111 Universal preparation for the
mobile phone

Only one telephone mount is factory-fitted. An adapter for the telephone can be
purchased from the range of the ŠKODA Original Accessories.
Inserting the mobile phone and adapter
– First of all push the adapter A in the direction of arrow ⇒ fig. 111 up to the
stop into the mount. Press the adapter slightly downwards, until it locks securely into position.


Insert the mobile phone into the adapter A (as specified in manufacturer's instructions).

Removing the mobile phone and adapter
– Press simultaneously the side locks of the mount ⇒ fig. 111 and remove the
mobile phone and adapter .

Using the system

Safety

Driving Tips

Function overview of the





(PTT - “push to talk”) button on the adapter ⇒ fig. 112 :

Activating/deactivating voice control
Reject/end a call

On some adapters, aside from the  button, the SOS ⇒ fig. 112 button also appears- on the right. After pressing the button for 2 seconds, the number 112
(Emergency call) is dialed.

Notice


The adapters illustrated are only prime examples.

● On vehicles fitted with the radio navigation system Columbus, the
buttons do not operate.

General Maintenance

Breakdown assistance



and

Technical data

SOS


120

Communication

Operation of the telephone on the multifunction steering wheel
This applies only if your vehicle has been equipped with the telephone preinstallation at the factory.
If the side lights are switched on, the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel
are illuminated.
Overview of the different functions in contrast to the multifunction steering
wheel without mobile phone operation ⇒ page 115.
Fig. 113 Multifunction steering wheel:
Control buttons for the telephone

The driver can set the basic functions of the telephone by simply operating the
buttons located on the steering wheel so that he can concentrate on the traffic
situation without being distracted as little as possible by operating the telephone
⇒ fig. 113 .
Button

Action

Operation

1

press briefly

Activation and deactivation of the voice control (Button PTT - Push to talk)
Cancellation of the played message

1

 turn upwards

Increase volume

1

 turn downwards

Decrease volume

2

 press briefly

Accept call, end call, entry in the main menu of the telephone, list of the dialed numbers, call the dialed contact

2

 press button for a long
time

Reject call, private call

3

 press briefly

Reach one level higher in the menu (according to the current position in the menu)

3

 press button for a long
time

Leave the phone menu

4

press briefly

Selection of menu point

4

press button for a long period of time

To the next initial letter in the telephone book

4

 turn upwards

The last chosen menu selection, name

4

 turn downwards

The next menu selection, name

4

 quickly turn upwards

To the previous initial letter in the telephone book

4

 quickly turn downwards

To the next initial letter in the telephone book

£

Communication
The buttons operate the functions for the operating mode of the current telephone.

Operate the telephone via the information display
In the menu Phone you can select the following menu points:
Phone book
■ Dial number1)
■ Call register
■ Voice mailbox
■ Bluetooth1 )
■ Settings2)
■ Back


Phone book
In the menu point Phone book is the list of the loaded contacts from the telephone memory and the SIM card of the mobile phone.
Dial number
In the menu point Dial number, you can write any telephone number. Select in sequence the desired digits with the aid of the handwheel and confirm it by pressing
the handwheel. You can choose the numbers 0 - 9, symbols , , # and the functions Cancel, Call, Delete.
Call register

Bluetooth


In the menu Bluetooth you can select the following menu points:
■ User - the overview of the stored users
■ New user - Search for new telephones which are in the reception range
■ Visibility - Switching on the visibility of the telephone unit for other devices
■ Media player
■ Active device
■ Paired devices
■ Search
■ Phone name - the possibility to change the name of the telephone unit (preset SKODA UHV)
Settings
In the menu Settings you can select the following menu points:
Phone book
■ Update1 )
■ List
■ Surname
■ First name
■ Ring tone



Back
Return in the basic menu of the telephone.



In the menu point Call register, you can select the following menu points:
Missed calls
■ Dialled numbers
■ Received calls


Voice mailbox
In the menu Voice mailbox, it is possible to set the number of the voice mailbox1 )
and then dial the number.

1)

On vehicles fitted with the radio navigation system Amundsen+, this function can be accessed via
the menu of the radio navigation system, see the operating instructions for the Amundsen+.

2)

This function is not available in vehicles fitted with the radio navigation system Amundsen+.

Using the system

Safety

Driving Tips

121

General Maintenance

Breakdown assistance

Technical data

122

Communication

Voice control
Dialogue
On vehicles which are factory-fitted with the navigation system Columbus, it is only possible to operate the voice control via this device, see the operating instructions for Columbus.
The period of time in which the system is ready to receive voice commands and to
carry them out is called a dialogue. The system gives audible feedback and guides
you if necessary through the relevant functions.
Optimum understanding of the commands depends on several factors:
● Speak with a normal tone of voice without intonation and excessive pauses.
● Avoid a bad pronunciation.
● Close the doors, windows and sliding roof, in order to reduce or stop disturbing
exterior noise.
● It is recommended to speak louder at higher speeds, so that the tone of your
voice is louder than the increased surrounding noise.
● During the dialogue limit additional noise in the vehicle, e.g. simultaneously
talking occupants.
● Do not speak, if the system makes an announcement.
● The microphone for voice control is inserted in the moulded headliner and directed to the driver and front passenger. Therefore the driver and the front passenger can operate the equipment.
If a voice command is not detected, the system answers with “Sorry?” and a new
entry can be performed. After the 2nd error the system repeats the aid. After the
3rd error the answer “Procedure cancelled” is given and the dialogue is ended.
Switch on voice control (dialogue)
● by briefly pressing the  button on the adapter1) ⇒ fig. 112 ;
● by pressing the 1 button on the multi-function steering wheel for a longer
time ⇒ fig. 113 .

Switching off voice control (dialogue)
If the system is currently playing a message, you will need to end the message
currently being played:
● by briefly pressing the  button on the adapter 1);
● by pressing the 1 button on the multi-function steering wheel for a longer
time.
If the system expects a voice command, you can end the dialogue yourself:
● Do some with the CANCEL voice command;
● by pressing the  button on the adapter1);
● by pressing the 1 button on the multi-function steering wheel for a longer
time.

Notice


The dialogue of an incoming call is immediately interrupted.

● The voice control is only possible in vehicles fitted with a multi-function steering wheel with telephone control or a phone holder and adapter.

Voice commands
Basic voice commands for operating the telephone control unit
Voice command

Not valid for vehicles which are fitted with the radio navigation system Columbus.

Action

HELP

After this command the system repeats all possible
commands.

CALL XYZ

With this command you call up the contact from the
phone book ⇒ page 123.

PHONE BOOK

After this command, for example the phone book can
be repeated, a voice entry for the contact can be updated or deleted etc.

CALL HISTORY

Lists of dialed numbers, missed calls etc.

DIAL NUMBER

After this command a phone number can be entered
which establishes a connection to the requested party.

REDIAL

1)



After this command the system selects the last selected number.

£

Communication
Voice command
MUSICa)
FURTHER OPTIONS
SETTINGS
CANCEL
a)

Music playback via Bluetooth®

Action
Play music from the mobile phone or another paired
device.

The universal telephone preinstallation GSM IIl makes it possible to play back music via Bluetooth® from the devices such as MP3 player, mobile phone or notebook.

After this command the system offers additional context-dependent commands.

In order to enable the music playback via Bluetooth®, it is necessary to connect
the terminal device with the hands-free system in the menu Phone - Bluetooth Media player.

Selection for setting Bluetooth®, dialogue etc.
The dialogue is ended.

On vehicles fitted with the radio navigation system Amundsen+, this function can be accessed via
the menu of the radio navigation system, see the operating instructions for the Amundsen+.

The operation of the music playback from the connected device can be performed
via the hands-free system with the voice control ⇒ page 122, Voice commands or
directly via the connected device.

After giving the command DIAL NUMBER, the system requests the entry of a telephone number. You can enter the telephone number as a continuous row, as individually spoken digits (the whole number at once) or in the form of digital blocks
(separated by short pauses). After each order of digits (separation through brief
voice pause) all of the digits detected up to now are repeated by the system.
The digits 0 - 9, symbols +, , # are permitted. The system detects no continuous
digit combinations such as twenty-three, but only individually spoken digits (two,
three).

Notice
● The device to be connected must support the Bluetooth® profile A2DP, see
Owner's manual of the device to be coupled.


This function is not available in vehicles fitted with the car radio Blues.





Universal telephone preinstallation GSM IIl

Call name


Switch on the voice operation ⇒ page 122, Voice control.



Give the command CALL XYZ after the signal tone.

Voice command

Announcement

CALL XYZ

“Say home, work, mobile”

e.g. WORK

“XYZ work is dialed.”

CALL XYZ WORK

“XYZ work is dialed.”

Store voice recording of a contact
If automatic name recognition does not work reliably for some contacts, you will
can choose to save your own voice entry for the contact in the menu point Phone
book - Voice Tag - Record.
You can also store your own voice entry using voice control in the menu FURTHER

OPTIONS.

Safety

Introduction
The universal telephone preinstallation GSM III is a built-in “hands-free system”, it
provides a voice operated convenience mode via the multifunction steering wheel
or the radio navigation system.

Example for calling the name from the phone book

Using the system

123

Driving Tips

The following functions are included in the universal telephone preinstallation
GSM III:
● Phone Phonebook ⇒ page 124.
● Convenience mode with the multifunction steering wheel ⇒ page 126 and display in the information display ⇒ page 127.
● Voice control of the telephone, including the language selection of the telephone contacts ⇒ page 129.
● Internet connection ⇒ page 130.
● Music playback from the telephone or other multimedia units ⇒ page 130.
● Display of SMS ⇒ page 127.
All communication between a telephone and the hands-free system of your vehicle can only be established with the help of the following profiles of Bluetooth®
£
technology.
General Maintenance

Breakdown assistance

Technical data

124

Communication

rSAP - Remote SIM access profile
After connecting the telephone with the hands-free system via the rSAP profile,
the telephone deregisters from the GSM network, the control unit ensures the
communication with the network via the internal antenna. In the telephone only
the interface for Bluetooth® remains active. In this case, you can only separate
from the control unit, switch off the Bluetooth® connection or select the number
of the emergency call 112 (only valid for some countries).

If the telephone book of the mobile phone contains more than 2 000 entries, the
system announces Phone book not fully loaded.

HFP - Hands Free Profile
After connecting the telephone with the hands-free system via the HFP profile,
the telephone continues to use its GMS module and internal antenna to communicate with the GSM network.

If a telephone event (e.g. incoming or outgoing call, dialogue of the voice control)
occurs during the updating procedure, the updating is interrupted. After the telephone event has ended, the updating starts anew.

Each time the telephone has established a new connection with the hands-free
system, an update of the relevant phone book is performed. The updating can
take a few minutes. During this time the phone book, which was stored after the
last update was completed, is available. Newly stored telephone numbers are only
shown after the updating has ended.

Connection of the telephone with the hands-free system

WARNING

In order to connect a mobile phone with the hands-free system, it is necessary to
connect the telephone to the hands-free system. Detailed information on this is
provided in the operating instructions of your mobile phone. The following steps
must be carried out for the connection.

Concentrate fully at all times on your steering! As the driver you are fully responsible for road safety. Use the telephone system only to such an extent, so
that you are in full control of your vehicle at any time.

Notice

Connecting the telephone with the hands-free system via the HFP profile
– Activate the Bluetooth® in your telephone and the visibility of the mobile
phone.

● The volume can be changed individually during the call at any time with the
button for setting the radio or radio navigation system or with the buttons on the
multifunction steering wheel.
● Please refer to the following guidelines ⇒ page 116, Mobile phones and twoway radio systems.
● Should you have any questions, please contact an authorised ŠKODA Service
Partner.

Phone Phonebook
A phone phonebook is part of the mobile phone preinstallation with voice control.
In the phone phonebook there are 2000 free memory locations available. Each
contact can contain up to 5 numbers. This phone phonebook can be used in line
with the mobile telephone.
On vehicles fitted with the radio navigation system Columbus, a maximum of 1000
telephone contacts are shown in the display of this appliance.
After the first connection of the telephone, the system begins to load the phone
book from the phone and the SIM card into the memory of the control unit.







Switch on the ignition.



Select the menu Phone - Phone search in the information display and wait until the control unit has ended the search.



Select your mobile phone in the menu of the units found.



Within 30 seconds enter the 16 digit PIN of your control unit as indicated in the
information display and confirm it according to the instructions on the display
of your telephone.



To store a new user or to download the telephone book and the identification
data of the SIM card into the control unit, follow the instructions in the information display and on the mobile phone.

Connecting the telephone with the hands-free system via the rSAP profile
– Activate the Bluetooth® in your telephone and the visibility of the mobile
phone. For certain mobile phones it is necessary to switch on first the rSAP
function.


Switch on the ignition.

£

Communication


Select the menu Phone - Phone search in the information display and wait until the control unit has ended the search.



Select your mobile phone in the menu of the units found.



Within 30 seconds enter the 16 digit PIN of your control unit as indicated in the
information display and confirm it according to the instructions on the display
of your telephone.






If your SIM card is blocked by a PIN code, enter the PIN of the SIM card of your
telephone. The telephone connects to the control unit (during the first connection you can only enter it in the information display and when the vehicle is
stationary, since you can only choose whether the PIN should be stored in this
situation).
For the first storage of a new user follow the instructions in the information
display.
To download the telephone book and the indentification data of the SIM card
into the new control unit, confirm again the command rSAP in your mobile
phone.

The telephone connects preferentially via the rSAP profile.
If the PIN was stored, the telephone is automatically detected and connected with
the hands-free system when the ignition is switched on the next time. Check on
your mobile phone if it was automatically connected.
Disconnecting the connection
The connection to the hands-free system is disconnected:
● When removing the key from the ignition lock (during a telephone call, the
connection is disconnected).
● After disconnecting the connection in the telephone.
● After disconnecting the connection in the information display in the Bluetooth
- User - Select user - Disconnect menu.

1)

On vehicles which are fitted out with radio or radio navigation system at the factory, it is possible to terminate the telephone call after removing the key from the
ignition lock by pressing the icon on the touch-screen of the radio1) or the radio
navigation system, see operating instructions for radio or radio navigation system.

WARNING
● Concentrate fully at all times on your steering! As the driver you are fully
responsible for road safety. Only use the system so that you are in full control
of your vehicle in every traffic situation - risk of accident!
● In the event of air transport, the Bluetooth® function of the hands-free
system must be switched off by a specialist garage!

Notice
● In the memory of the control unit, up to three users can be stored, whereby
the hands-free system can only communicate actively with one user. In the case
of mutual connection with a fourth mobile phone, you must erase one user.
● Not valid for all mobile phones which enable a communication via Bluetooth®.
You can ask at an authorised ŠKODA Service Partner if your telephone is compatible with the universal telephone preinstallation GSM IIl.
● When connecting to the control unit, follow the instructions on your mobile
phone.
● The range of the Bluetooth® connection to the hands-free system is intended
for the vehicle interior. The range is dependent on local factors, e.g. obstacles between the devices and interferences with other devices.

Does not apply for Radios Swing and Blues.

Using the system

Safety

Driving Tips

125

General Maintenance

Breakdown assistance

Technical data



126

Communication

Operation of the telephone on the multifunction steering wheel
This applies only if your vehicle has been equipped with the telephone preinstallation at the factory.
If the side lights are switched on, the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel
are illuminated.
Overview of the different functions in contrast to the multifunction steering
wheel without mobile phone operation ⇒ page 115.
Fig. 114 Multifunction steering wheel:
Control buttons for the telephone

The driver can set the basic functions of the telephone by simply operating the
buttons located on the steering wheel so that he can concentrate on the traffic
situation without being distracted as little as possible by operating the telephone
⇒ fig. 114 .
Button

Action

Operation

1

press briefly

Activation and deactivation of the voice control (Button PTT - Push to talk)
Cancellation of the played message

1

 turn upwards

Increase volume

1

 turn downwards

Decrease volume

2

 press briefly

Accept call, end call, entry in the main menu of the telephone, list of the dialed numbers, call the dialed contact

2

 press button for a long
time

Reject call, list of the last calls, entry in the main menu of the telephone, list of dialed numbers

3

 press briefly

Reach one level higher in the menu (according to the current position in the menu)

3

 press button for a long
time

Leave the phone menu

4

press briefly

Confirm menu selection

4

press button for a long period of time

To the next initial letter in the telephone book

4

 turn upwards

The last chosen menu selection, name

4

 turn downwards

The next menu selection, name

4

 quickly turn upwards

To the previous initial letter in the telephone book

4

 quickly turn downwards

To the next initial letter in the telephone book

£

Communication
The buttons operate the functions for the operating mode of the current telephone.

Operate the telephone via the information display
If no telephone is connected with the hands-free system, after you select the
Phone menu, the No paired phone found message will appear and the following
menu points:
■ Help this menu point appears when no paired phone is stored in the memory
of the control unit.
■ Connect this menu point appears when one or more paired phones are stored
in the memory of the control unit.
■ Phone search
■ Media player
■ Active device
■ Paired devices
■ Search
■ Visibility
■ SOS
If a telephone is coupled with the hands-free system, you can choose the following menu points in the Phone menu:









Phone book
Dial number
Call register
Voice mailbox
Messages1)
Bluetooth
Settings
Back

The following functions are available for each phone contact:





Display telephone number
Voice Tag
■ Replay
■ Record

Dial number
In the menu point Dial number, you can write any telephone number. Select in sequence the desired digits with the aid of the handwheel and confirm it by pressing
the handwheel. You can select the numbers 0 - 9, the symbols +, , # and the
functions Delete, Call, Back.
Call register
In the menu point Call register, you can select the following menu points:
■ Missed calls
■ Received calls
■ Dialled numbers
■ Delete lists
Voice mailbox
In the menu Voice mailbox, it is possible to set the number of the voice mailbox
and then dial the number. Select in sequence the desired digits with the aid of the
handwheel and confirm it by pressing the handwheel. You can select the numbers
0 - 9, the symbol + and the functions Delete, Call, Save, and Back.
Messages

Phone book
In the menu point Phone book is the list of the loaded contacts from the telephone memory and the SIM card of the mobile phone.

1)

In the menu point Messages there is a list of received text messages. After calling
a message, the following functions appear:
■ Show
■ Read - the system reads out the selected message through the vehicle's
speakers
■ Send time
■ Callback
■ Copy - copies the incoming message to the SIM card
■ Delete
£

Only when connecting the telephone with the hands-free system via the rSAP profile.

Using the system

127

Safety

Driving Tips

General Maintenance

Breakdown assistance

Technical data

128

Communication

Bluetooth
In the menu Bluetooth you can select the following menu points:
■ User - the overview of the stored users
■ Connect
■ Disconnect
■ Rename
■ Delete
■ New user - Search for users who are in the reception range
■ Visibility - Switching on the visibility of the hands-free system for other devices
■ Media player
■ Active device
■ Paired devices
■ Connect
■ Rename
■ Delete
■ Authorisation
■ Search - search for available media players
■ Visibility - Switching on the visibility of the media player hands-free system in the environment
■ Extras
■ Modem - overview of the active and paired devices for the connection to
the internet
■ Active device
■ Paired devices
■ Phone name - the possibility to change the name of the hands-free system
(pre-set SKODA UHV)











Settings
In the menu Settings you can select the following menu points:
■ Phone book
■ Update - scan the telephone book
■ Select memory
■ SIM & phone
■ SIM card
■ Mobile phone - Initial setting which allows contacts on the SIM card to
be scanned, it is necessary to switch to the menu point SIM & phone

List
Surname
■ First name
Own number - optionally display your own telephone number on the display of
the device of the person you are calling (this function is network-dependent)
■ Network depnd. .
■ Yes
■ No
Signal settings
■ Ring tone
■ Volume
■ Turn vol. up
■ Turn vol. down
Phone settings
■ Select operator
■ Automatic
■ Manual
■ Network mode
■ GSM
■ Automatic
■ SIM mode - valid for telephones with the rSAP profile, in which the operation of two SIM cards simultaneously is supported - you can choose which
SIM card you want to associate with the hands-free system
■ Change
■ Phone Mode - Toggle between rSAP and HFP mode
■ Premium - rSAP mode
■ Handsfree - HFP mode
Off time - Setting in five-minute steps
Data - Settings for the Internet access point - ask network operator for details
Switch off ph. (Switch off ph.) - switches off the phone unit (phone remains
coupled)





Back
Return in the main menu of the information display.



Communication

Voice control

If the system expects a voice command, you can end the dialogue yourself:



Dialogue
On vehicles which are factory-fitted with the navigation system Columbus, it is only possible to operate the voice control via this device, see the operating instructions for Columbus.
The period of time in which the system is ready to receive voice commands and to
carry them out is called a dialogue. The system gives audible feedback and guides
you if necessary through the relevant functions.
Optimum understanding of the commands depends on several factors:
● Speak with a normal tone of voice without intonation and excessive pauses.
● Avoid a bad pronunciation.
● Close the doors, windows and sliding roof, in order to reduce or stop disturbing
exterior noise.
● It is recommended to speak louder at higher speeds, so that the tone of your
voice is louder than the increased surrounding noise.
● During the dialogue limit additional noise in the vehicle, e.g. simultaneously
talking occupants.
● Do not speak, if the system makes an announcement.
● The microphone for voice control is inserted in the moulded headliner and directed to the driver and front passenger. Therefore the driver and the front passenger can operate the equipment.
Switch on voice control (dialogue)
You can start the dialogue at any time by pressing the 1 button on the multifunction steering wheel ⇒ page 126.
If the system does not recognise your command, it repeats the first part of the aid
and thus a new entry is possible. After the 2nd error the system repeats the second part of the aid. After the 3rd error the answer “Procedure cancelled” is given
and the dialogue is ended.
Switching off voice control (dialogue)
If the system is currently playing a message, you will need to end the message
currently being played by pressing the 1 button on the multi-function steering
wheel.

Using the system

129

Safety

Driving Tips

Do some with the CANCEL voice command;
by pressing the 1 button on the multi-function steering wheel.

Notice
The dialogue of an incoming call is immediately interrupted.



Voice commands
Basic voice commands for operating the telephone control unit
Voice command
HELP

Action
After this command the system repeats all possible
commands.

CALL NAME

After this command a name can be entered which establishes a connection to the requested partner.

DIAL NUMBER

After this command a phone number can be entered
which establishes a connection to the requested party.

REDIAL

The last selected telephone number is selected.

READ ADDRESSBOOK

The system reads the contacts in the telephone
book.

READ MESSAGES

The system reads the messages which were received
while the telephone was connected with the handsfree system.

SHORT DIALOGUE

Help is clearly reduced (good operating knowledge
provided).

LONG DIALOGUE
CANCEL

Help is not reduced (suitable for beginners).
The dialogue is ended.

Store voice recording of a contact
If automatic name recognition does not work reliably for some contacts, you will
can choose to save your own voice entry for the contact in the menu point Phone
book - Voice Tag - Record.
You can also store your own voice entry using voice control in the menu FURTHER

OPTIONS.

General Maintenance

Breakdown assistance

Technical data

130

Communication

Internet connection

The music playback process is performed on the connected device.

Notice

An Internet connection can be established via a PC or PDA.

● The device to be connected must support the Bluetooth® profile A2DP, see
Owner's manual of the device to be coupled.

The control unit on the hands-free system supports the GPRS, EDGE and UMTS/3G
technologies.



This function is not available in vehicles fitted with the car radio Blues.



An Internet is only possible via a telephone which is connected via the rSAP profile.

Multimedia

The procedure for connecting to the Internet can vary depending on the type and
version of the operating system as well as the type of the device to be connected.
Successfully connecting to the internet requires appropriate knowledge of the operating system for connecting the device .

AUX-IN and MDI inputs
The input AUX-IN is located below the armrest of the front seats and is marked
with .

Process of connection
– Connect the mobile phone with the hands-free system.


Set the access point (depending on the operator, usually the “Internet”) in the
menu Phone - Settings - Data .



Switch on the visibility of the hands-free system for the other devices in the
menu Phone - Bluetooth - Visibility.



Have the device to be connected search for available Bluetooth® devices.



From the list of found devices, choose the hands-free system (“SKODA_BT” by
default).



On the device to be connected, enter the password and follow any instructions
given on this device or in the information display.



Enter the required Internet address in the browser. The operating system requests the entry of the telephone number for the internet access (depending
on the operator, usually “*99#”).

Music playback via Bluetooth®
The universal telephone preinstallation GSM IIl makes it possible to play back music via Bluetooth® from the devices such as MP3 player, mobile phone or notebook.
In order to enable the music playback via Bluetooth®, it is necessary to first connect the device to be connected with the hands-free system in the menu Phone Bluetooth - Media player.

The input MDI is located in the glove box.
The inputs AUX-IN and MDI are used to connect external audio sources (e.g. iPod
or MP3 player) and play back music from these devices via your factory-fitted radio
or radio navigation system.
The description of the operation can be found in the relevant Owner's Manual of
your radio or your radio navigation system.

Notice
● The loudspeakers in the vehicle are matched to a power output of the radio
and radio navigation system of 4x 20 W.
● For the equipment sound system, the loudspeakers are matched to a power
output of the amplifier of 4x40°W + 6x20 W.




Communication

CD changer

131

Notice
● Always guide the CD into the CD-case B with the printed side pointing upwards.
● Never push the CD with force into the CD-case as the insertion is performed
automatically.
● After loading a CD into the CD-changer, you must wait until the LED of the corresponding button D lights up. Then the CD-case B is free to load the next CD.
● If you have selected a position, on which a CD is already located, this CD will be

ejected. Take out the ejected CD and load the desired CD.
Fig. 115 The CD changer

The CD changer for the radio and radio navigation system is located in the left
side compartment of the luggage compartment.
Inserting the CD
– Touch the button C ⇒ fig. 115 and guide the CD (compact disc) into the CDcase B . The CD is automatically loaded onto the lowest free position in the CD
changer. The LED in the corresponding button D stops flashing.
Fill CD changer with CDs
– Hold the button C pressed for longer than 2 seconds and guide the CDs one
after the other (maximum 6 CDs) into the CD case B . The LEDs in the buttons
D are no longer flashing.
Inserting a CD to one definite position
– Briefly touch the button C . The LEDs in the buttons D light up at the memory
spaces, which are already assigned and flash in the case of free memory
spaces.


Touch the desired button D and guide the CD into the CD-case B .

Ejecting CD
– Briefly touch the button A , in order to eject a CD. For assigned memory
spaces, now the LEDs light up in the buttons D .


Touch the corresponding button D . The CD is ejected.

Ejecting all CDs
– Hold the button A pressed for more than 2 seconds, in order to eject the CDs.
All CDs in the CD-changer are ejected consecutively.

Using the system

Safety

Driving Tips

General Maintenance

Breakdown assistance

Technical data

132

Passive Safety

Safety
Passive Safety
Basic information










Driving the safe way
Passive safety measures reduce the risk of injury in accident situations.
In this section you will find important information, tips and notes on the subject of
passive safety in your vehicle. We have combined everything here which you
should be familiar with, for example, regarding seat belts, airbags, child seats and
safety of children. It is therefore important, in particular, to comply with the notes
and warnings in this section for your own interest and in the interest of those
travelling with you.

The specified safety equipment works together, in order to optimally protect you
and those travelling with you in accident situations. The safety equipment does
not protect you or the people travelling with you, if you or your occupants adopt
an incorrect seated position or the equipment is not correctly adjusted or used.
For this reason you will be provided with information on why these equipment
components are very important, how it protects you and the occupants, what
should be observed when using the equipment and how you and the people travelling with you can make full use of the existing safety equipment. This Owner's
Manual contains important warning notes, which you and those travelling with
you should pay attention to in order to reduce a risk of injury.

WARNING
● This chapter contains important information on how to use the vehicle for
the driver and his occupants. You will find further information on safety, which
concerns you and those travelling with you, in the following chapters of this
Owner's Manual.
● The complete on-board literature should always be in the vehicle. This applies in particular, if you rent out or sell the vehicle.

seat belt height adjusters for front seats;
front airbag for the driver and front passenger;
side airbags;
head airbags;
anchoring points for child seat using the “ISOFIX” system;
anchoring points for child seat using the “Top Tether” system;
head restraints adjustable for height;
adjustable steering column.

Safety concerns everybody!





Before setting off
Safety equipment
The safety equipment is part of the occupant protection and it can
reduce the risk of injuries in accident situations.
“Do not put at risk” your safety and the safety of those travelling with you . In the
event of an accident, the safety equipment can reduce the risk of injuries.
The following list contains part of the safety equipment in your vehicle:




three-point seat belts for all the seats;
belt force limiter for front and outer rear seats;
belt tensioners for front seats;

The driver is always fully responsible for his occupants and for the
operating safety of the vehicle.
For your own safety and the safety of the people travelling with you, please pay
attention to the following points before setting off.
● Ensure that the lighting and the turn signal system are functioning properly.
● Inspect the tyre inflation pressure.
● Ensure that all the windows offer a good visibility to the outside.
● Safely attach the items of luggage ⇒ page 67, Loading the luggage compartment.

£

Passive Safety
● Ensure that no objects can obstruct the pedal.
● Adjust the mirror, the front seat and the head restraint to match your body
size.
● Point out to your occupants that the head restraints must be adjusted to
match their body size.
● Protect the children in suitable child seats with correctly fastened seat belts
⇒ page 148, Transporting children safely.
● Adopt the correct seated position ⇒ page 133, Correct seated position. Also
inform your occupants to adopt the correct seated position.
● Fasten the seat belt correctly. Also inform your occupants to properly fasten
the seat belts ⇒ page 138, How are seat belts correctly fastened?.

133

Correct seated position
Correct seated position for the driver
Correct seated position for the driver is important for safe and relaxed driving.



What influences the driving safety?
The driving safety is primarily determined by the style of driving
and the personal behaviour of all the occupants.
The driver is fully responsible for himself and his occupants. If your driving safety
is effected, you place yourself and the oncoming traffic at risk.

Fig. 116 The correct distance of the driver from the steering wheel/The correct head restraint
adjustment for the driver

Please refer to the following guidelines.

For your own safety and to reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accident, we
recommend the following setting.

● Do not get distracted from concentrating on the traffic situation, e.g. by your
occupants or mobile phone calls.
● Never drive when your driving ability is impaired, e.g. through medication, alcohol, drugs.
● Keep to the traffic regulations and the permissible speed limit.
● Adjust the driving speed at all times to the road condition as well as to the
traffic and weather conditions.

● Take regular breaks on long journeys - at the latest every two hours.

● Adjust the steering wheel so that the distance between the steering wheel
and your chest is at least 25 cm ⇒ fig. 116 - left.
● Position the driver seat in the forward/back direction so that you are able to
fully press the pedals with your legs at a slight angle.
● Adjust the seat backrest so that you are able to reach the highest point of the
steering wheel with your arms at a slight angle.
● Adjust the head restraint so that the top edge of the head restraint is at the
same level as the upper part of your head ⇒ fig. 116 - right.
● Fasten the seat belt correctly ⇒ page 138, How are seat belts correctly fastened?.
Manual driver seat adjustment ⇒ page 61, Adjusting the front seats.
Electrical driver seat adjustment ⇒ page 62, Adjusting front seats electrically.

Using the system

Safety

Driving Tips

General Maintenance

Breakdown assistance

Technical data

£

134

Passive Safety
Electrical front passenger seat adjustment ⇒ page 62, Adjusting front seats electrically.

WARNING
● The front seats and the head restraints must always be adjusted to match
the body size of the seat occupant as well as the seat belts must always be
correctly fastened in order to provide an optimal protection for you and your
occupants.

WARNING
● The front seats and the head restraints must always be adjusted to match
the body size of the seat occupant as well as the seat belts must always be
correctly fastened in order to provide an optimal protection for you and your
occupants.

● The driver must maintain a distance of at least 25 cm to the steering wheel
⇒ fig. 116 left. Not maintaining this minimum distance will mean that the airbag system will not be able to properly protect you - hazard!

● The front passenger must maintain a distance of at least 25 cm to the dash
panel. Not maintaining this minimum distance will mean that the airbag system will not be able to properly protect you - hazard!

● When driving, hold the steering wheel with both hands firmly on the outer
edge in the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock position. Never hold the steering wheel
firmly in the 12 o'clock position or in another way (e.g. in the middle of the
steering wheel or at the inner steering wheel edge). In such cases, injuries to
the arms, the hands and the head can occur when the driver airbag is deployed.

● Always keep your feet in the footwell when the car is being driven - never
place your feet on the instrument panel, out of the window or on the surfaces
of the seats. You will be exposed to increased risk of injury if it becomes necessary to apply the brake or in the event of an accident. If an airbag is deployed, you may suffer fatal injuries when adopting an incorrect seated position!

● The seat backrests must not be angled too far back when driving otherwise this will affect proper operation of the seat belts and of the airbag system - risk of injury!
● Ensure that there are no objects in the footwell as any objects may get behind the pedals during a driving or braking manoeuvre. You would then no
longer be able to operate the clutch, to brake or accelerate.

Correct seated position for the front passenger
The front passenger must maintain a distance of at least 25 cm
from the dash panel so that the airbag offers him the greatest possible safety it is deployed.
For the safety of the front passenger and to reduce the risk of injury in the event
of an accident, we recommend the following setting:
● Adjust the front passenger seat as far as possible to the rear.
● Adjust the head restraint so that the top edge of the head restraint is at the
same level as the upper part of your head ⇒ fig. 116 - right.
● Fasten the seat belt correctly ⇒ page 138, How are seat belts correctly fastened?.
In exceptional cases the front passenger airbag can be deactivated ⇒ page 146,
Deactivating an airbag.
Manual front passenger adjustment ⇒ page 61, Adjusting the front seats.



● The seat backrests must not be angled too far back when driving otherwise this will affect proper operation of the seat belts and of the airbag system - risk of injury!



Correct seated position for the occupants on the rear seats
Occupants on the rear seats must sit upright, keep the feet in the
footwell and must have their seat belts correctly fastened.
To reduce the risk of injury in the event of a sudden braking manoeuvre or an accident, the occupants on the rear seats must observe the following:
● Adjust the head restraints so that the top edge of the head restraints is at the
same level as the upper part of your head ⇒ fig. 116 - on the right.
● Fasten the seat belt correctly ⇒ page 138, How are seat belts correctly fastened?.
● If you are transporting ⇒ page 148, Transporting children safely children in the
£
vehicle, please use a suitable child restraint system.

Passive Safety






WARNING
● The head restraints must always be adjusted to match the body size, in order to offer an optimal protection for you and your occupants.
● Always keep your feet in the footwell when the car is being driven - never
put your feet out of the window or on the surfaces of the seats. You will be
exposed to increased risk of injury if it becomes necessary to apply the brake
or in the event of an accident. If the head airbag is deployed and when adopting an incorrect seated position, you are exposing yourself to an increased risk
of injury and in the event of an accident you may suffer fatal injuries!
● If the occupants on the rear seats are not sitting upright, the risk of injury
is increased due to incorrect routing of the seat belt.

Examples of an incorrect seated position

put the feet on the dash panel;
put the feet on the seat upholstery;
transport somebody in the footwell;
have the seat belt not fastened when driving;
occupy the luggage compartment.

WARNING
● If the occupant adopts an incorrect seated position, he is exposed to lifethreatening injuries, in case he is hit by a deployed airbag.


● Before setting off, please adopt the correct seated position and do not
change this seated position while the car is moving. Also advise your occupants to adopt the correct seated position and not to change this seated position while the car is moving.

An incorrect seated position can lead to severe injuries or death for
the occupants.
Seat belts offer their optimum protection only if the webbing of the seat belts is
properly routed. Incorrect seated positions considerably reduce the protective
functions of the seat belts and therefore increase the risk of injury due to an incorrect routing of the seat belt. The driver is fully responsible for himself and the
occupants, in particular for the children. Do not permit an occupant to adopt an
incorrect seated position when the car is moving.
The following list contains the examples of seated positions which are dangerous
for the occupants. This list is not complete, however we would like you to get interested in this subject.
Therefore, while the car is moving never:











stand up in the vehicle;
stand up on the seats;
kneel on the seats;
tilt the seat backrest fully to the back;
lean against the dash panel;
lie on the rear seat bench;
only sit on the front area of the seat;
sit to the side;
lean out of the window;
put the feet out of the window;

Using the system

Safety

Driving Tips

135

General Maintenance

Breakdown assistance

Technical data



136

Seat belts

Seat belts
Why seat belts?

WARNING
● Fasten your seat belt each time before setting off - also when driving in
town! This also applies to the people seated at the rear - risk of injury!
● Expectant women must also always wear a seat belt. This is the only way
of ensuring optimal protection for the unborn child ⇒ page 138, How are seat
belts correctly fastened?.
● It is important for the belt webbing to be properly routed if the seat belts
are to offer the maximum protection. You can see a description of how safety
belts should be fitted properly on the next pages.
Fig. 117 Driver wearing seat belt

It is a proven fact that seat belts offer good protection in accidents ⇒ fig. 117 .
Thus wearing a seat belt is a legal requirement in most countries.
Seat belts which have been correctly fastened and adjusted hold the occupants of
the car in the correct seated position ⇒ fig. 117 . The seat belts reduce the kinetic
energy (energy of motion) to a considerable extent. They also prevent uncontrolled movements which, in turn, may well result in severe injuries.

Notice
Please comply with any differing legal requirements when using the seat belts.



The physical principle of a frontal collision

The occupants of a vehicle who have fastened and correctly adjusted their seat
belt, profit to a major extent from the fact that the kinetic energy is optimally absorbed by the belts. The structure of the front end of the vehicle and other passive safety measures, such as the airbag system, also contribute to reducing the
kinetic energy. The energy produced is thus absorbed and there is less risk of injury.
Accident statistics prove that seat belts which are fastened and properly adjusted
reduce the risk of an injury and enhance the chance of survival in a major accident
⇒ page 136.
It is important that you pay attention to safety measures, particularly when transporting children in the vehicle ⇒ page 148, Transporting children safely.

Fig. 118 The driver is catapulted forward if not wearing a belt/The rear seat occupant is catapulted forward if not wearing a belt

The physical principle of a frontal accident can be explained quite simply:
Motion energy, so-called kinetic energy, is produced as soon as the vehicle is moving, both for the vehicle and its occupants. The magnitude of this kinetic energy
depends essentially on the speed at which the vehicle is travelling and on the
weight of the vehicle including the occupants. The greater the speed and weight
increase, the greater the amount of energy which has to be absorbed in the event
£
of an accident.

Seat belts
The speed of the vehicle is, nevertheless, the most important factor. Doubling the
speed of the vehicle from 25 km/h up to 50 km/hour increases the kinetic energy
four times.

WARNING (Continued)

● The belt webbing must not run across solid or fragile objects (e.g. spectacles, ball-point pens, keys etc.) as this may be a cause of injuries.

The common opinion that it is possible to support your body in a minor accident
with your hands, is incorrect. Even in a collision at only a low speed, the forces
acting on the body are such that it is no longer possible to support your body.

● Many layers of clothing and loose clothing (e. g. a winter coat over a jacket)
do not allow you to be correctly seated and impairs proper operation of the
seat belts.

Even if you only drive at a speed within the range from 30 km/hour to 50 km/hour,
the forces which are produced on your body in the event of an accident can easily
exceed 10.000 N (Newton). This equals a weight of one tonne (1 000 kg).

● It is prohibited to use clamps or other objects to adjust seat belts (e. g. for
shortening the belts for smaller persons).
● The lock tongue should only be inserted into the lock which is the correct
one for your seat. Wrong use of the safety belt will reduce its capacity to protect and the risk of injury increases.

In the event of a frontal collision, occupants of the vehicle not wearing a seat belt,
are thrown forward and strike in an uncontrolled way parts of the interior of the
vehicle, such as steering wheel, dash panel, windscreen, ⇒ fig. 118 - left. The occupants of a vehicle who have not fastened their seat belts may even be thrown out
of the vehicle. This can result in fatal injuries.
It is also important that rear seat occupants fasten their seat belts as they will
otherwise be thrown through the vehicle in an uncontrolled manner in the event
of an accident A rear seat passenger who has not fastened the seat belt is a danger not only to himself but also for those seated at the front ⇒ fig. 118 - right.

Important safety information regarding the use of
seat belts
The correct use of the seat belts considerably reduces the risk of
injury!

● The seat backrests of the front seats must not be tilted too far to the rear
otherwise the seatbelts can lose their effectiveness.
● The three-point seat belt for the rear middle seat can only fulfil its function reliably when the backrests are correctly locked into position ⇒ page 65.


● The belt webbing must always be kept clean. Soiled belt webbing may impair proper operation of the inertia reel ⇒ page 176, Seat belts.
● The slot of the belt tongue must not be blocked by paper or similar objects
otherwise the belt tongue will not lock in place properly.
● Inspect the seat belts regularly to ensure they are in good condition. If you
find seat belts which have damage to the belt, the seat belt connections, to
the inertia reel or to the lock, the relevant seat belt must be replaced by a
specialist garage.
● The seat belts must not be removed or changed in any way. Do not make
an attempt to repair the seat belts yourself.

● The belt webbing must not be jammed in-between at any point or twisted,
or chafe against any sharp edges.

● Damaged seat belts which have been subjected to stress in an accident
and were therefore stretched, must be replaced - this is best done by a specialist garage. The anchorage points of the belts must also be inspected. The
anchorage points for the belts should also be checked.

● It is important that the belt webbing is properly routed if the seat belts are
to offer their maximum protection ⇒ page 138, How are seat belts correctly
fastened?.

● In certain countries it is possible to use seat belts which differ in terms of
their operation from the seat belts which are described on the pages which
follow.

WARNING

● No two persons (also not children) should ever use a single seat belt together.
● The maximum protection which seat belts can offer is only achieved if you
are correctly seated ⇒ page 133, Correct seated position.

Using the system

Safety

Driving Tips

137

General Maintenance

Breakdown assistance

Technical data



138

Seat belts

How are seat belts correctly fastened?

WARNING
● The shoulder part of the seat belt must never run across your neck but
must run approximately over the middle of the shoulder and fit snugly against
the chest. The lap part of the belt must run across the hip and must never be
routed across the stomach. It must always fit snugly ⇒ fig. 119 - left. Adjust
the belt webbing as required.

Fastening three-point seat belts
Fasten your seat belt before starting!

● The lap part of the belt should be positioned as low as possible at the pelvis of an expectant mother in order to avoid exerting any pressure on the lower abdomen ⇒ fig. 119 - right.
● Always ensure that the webbing of the seat belts is properly routed. Seat
belts which are not correctly adjusted can themselves cause injuries even in
minor accidents.
● A seat belt which is hanging too loose can result in injuries as your body is
moved forward by the kinetic energy produced in an accident and is then suddenly held firm by the belt.
Fig. 119 Routing of belt webbing over the shoulders and the lap belt/Routing of belt webbing
for an expectant mother



Correctly adjust the front seat and the head restraint before fastening your
seat belt ⇒ page 133, Correct seated position.



Slowly pull the belt webbing at the tongue of the lock over your chest and pelvis ⇒  .



Insert the tongue of the lock into the seat belt buckle belonging to the seat
until it is heard to lock in place.



Pull on the seat belt to check that it has also reliably engaged in the lock.

● Only insert the lock tongue into the lock which is the correct one for your
seat. This will affect the protection which the belt offers and increase the risk
of an injury.

Seat belt height adjuster on the front seats

Each three-point seat belt is equipped with an inertia reel. This inertia reel offers
you complete freedom of movement if the belt is unreeled slowly. If the brakes
are applied suddenly, the inertia reel will block. The belts also block when the car
accelerates, when driving downhill and when cornering.
Expectant mothers must also wear the seat belt ⇒ 



Fig. 120 Front seat: Seat belt height adjuster

.

The seat belt height adjuster makes it possible for you to adapt the routing of the
front three-point seat belt in the area of the shoulder to match your body size.


Press and move the height adjuster in the desired direction up or down
⇒ fig. 120 .



Then pull firmly on the belt to ensure that the seat belt height adjuster has
correctly locked in place.

£

Seat belts
Belt tensioners are not activated in the event of minor frontal collisions, side and
rear-end collisions, in the case of a rollover and also not in accidents in which no
major forces are produced from the front.

WARNING
Adjust the height of the belt in such a way that the shoulder part of the belt is
positioned approximately across the middle of your shoulder - on no account
across your neck.

139



WARNING
● Any work on the system including removal and installation of system components because of other repair work, must only be carried out by a specialist
garage.

Taking seat belts off

● The protective function of the system is only adequate for a single accident. If the belt tensioners have been deployed, it is then necessary to replace
the entire system.
● The seller must pass on this Owner's manual to the buyer upon purchase
of the vehicle.

Notice
● Smoke is generated when the belt tensioners are deployed. This is not an indication of a fire in the vehicle.

Fig. 121 Releasing lock tongue from belt
lock



Press the red button in the belt lock ⇒ fig. 121 . The spring force causes the
tongue of the lock to jump out.



Guide the seat belt back with your hand to enable the inertia reel to wind up
the belt webbing more easily.

A plastic knob in the belt webbing holds the belt tongue in a position which is
easy to get hold of.

● It is essential to pay attention to relevant safety regulations if the vehicle or
individual parts of the system are scrapped. Specialist garages are familiar with
these regulations and will be able to provide you with detailed information in this
respect.
● When disposing of vehicle or parts of the system, it is important to comply
with the national legal requirements.


Belt tensioners
Safety for the driver and front passenger wearing their seat belts is enhanced by
the belt tensioners fitted to the inertia reels of the front three-point seat belts, in
addition to the protection afforded by the airbag system.
The three-point seat belts are automatically tensioned in the event of a frontal
collision of a certain severity. The belt tensioners can also be deployed if the seat
belts are not fastened.
The fastened three-point seat belts are automatically tensioned in the event of a
frontal or side collision of a certain severity.

Using the system

Safety

Driving Tips

General Maintenance

Breakdown assistance

Technical data



140

Airbag system

Airbag system
Description of the airbag system
General information on the airbag system
The front airbag system is complementary to the three-point seat belts and offers
additional protection for the head and chest area of the driver and passenger in
the event of a frontal collision.
In the event of a side collision, the side airbags reduce the risk of injury to the occupants to the part of their body facing the side of the accident.
The airbag system is only functional after the ignition has been switched on.
The operational readiness of the airbag system is monitored electronically. The
airbag warning light comes on for a few seconds each time the ignition is switched on.
The airbag system (according to vehicle equipment) consists of:
● an electronic control unit;
● the front airbags for the driver and front passenger ⇒ page 141;
● the side airbags ⇒ page 143;
● head airbags ⇒ page 145;
● an airbag indicator light in the instrument cluster ⇒ page 24;
● a front passenger airbag switch ⇒ page 147;
● an indicator light for a switched off front seat passenger airbag in the middle
of the dash panel ⇒ page 147.
A fault in the airbag system exists if:
● the airbag indicator light does not light up when the ignition is switched on;
● the warning light does not go out after about 4 seconds after the ignition is
switched on;
● the airbag indicator light goes out and comes on again after the ignition is
switched on;
● the airbag indicator light comes on or flickers when driving;
● the airbag indicator light showing a switched-off front passenger airbag in the
middle of the dash panel flashes.

WARNING
● To enable the occupants of a car to be protected with the greatest possible effect when the airbag is deployed, the front seats must be ⇒ page 133,
Correct seated position correctly adjusted to match the body size of the occupant.
● If you do not fasten the seat belts when driving, lean too far forward or
adopt an incorrect seated position, you are exposing yourself to increased risk
of injury in the event of an accident.
● Have the airbag system checked immediately by a specialist garage if a
fault exists. Otherwise, there is a risk of the airbag not being activated in the
event of an accident.


No modifications of any kind may be made to parts of the airbag system.

● It is prohibited to manipulate individual parts of the airbag system as this
might result in the airbag being deployed.
● The protective function of the airbag system is sufficient for only one accident. The airbag system must then be replaced if the airbag has been deployed.


The airbag system needs no maintenance during its working life.

● If you sell your car, please hand over the complete vehicle documentation
to the new owener. Please note that the documents relating to the possibility
of deactivating the front passenger airbag are also part of the vehicle documents!
● If the vehicle or individual parts of the airbag system are scrapped, it is essential to observe the relevant safety precautions. The authorised ŠKODA
Service Partners are familiar with these regulations.
● When disposing of vehicle or parts of the airbag system, it is important to
comply with the national legal requirements.



When are the airbags deployed?
The airbag system is designed in such a way that the driver and front passenger
airbag are deployed in the event of a violent frontal collision.
In the case of a violent side crash, the side airbag in the front seat and the head
airbag on the side on which the collision occurs are deployed.

£

Airbag system
It is also possible under certain special accident situations that the front as well as
the side airbags and head airbags are deployed simultaneously.

Front airbags

The airbags are not deployed in the case of minor frontal and side collisions, rearend collisions, tilting of the vehicle and vehicle rollover.

Description of the front airbags
The airbag system is not a substitute for the seat belt!

Deployment factors
It is not possible to state globally which deployment conditions apply to the airbag
system in every situation as the circumstances which exist in the case of accidents vary greatly. An important role in this case, for example, is played by factors
such as the type of object against which the vehicle impacts (hard, soft), the angle
of impact, the vehicle speed etc.
A decisive factor for the deployment of the airbags is the deceleration which occurs during a collision. The control unit analyses the nature of the collision and activates the relevant restraint system. If the vehicle deceleration which occurs and
is measured during the collision remains below the prescribed reference values
specified in the control unit, the airbags are not deployed although the vehicle
may well suffer severe damage to the bodywork as a consequence of the accident.

Fig. 122 Driver airbag in the steering wheel/front passenger airbag in the dash panel

The front airbag for the driver is housed in the steering wheel ⇒ fig. 122 - left. The
front airbag for the front passenger is housed in the dash panel above the storage
compartment ⇒ fig. 122 - right. The installation positions are each marked with
the “AIRBAG” logo.

The airbags are not deployed if:
● ignition is switched off;
● a minor frontal collision;
● a minor side collision;
● a rear-end collision;
● Rollover of the vehicle.

The front airbag system, in combination with three-point safety belts, offers additional protection for the head and chest area of the driver and front passenger in
the event of a frontal collision of major severity ⇒ page 142.
The airbag is not a substitute for the seat belt, but is part of the complete passive
vehicle safety concept. Please note that an airbag can only offer you optimal protection in combination with a seat belt which is fastened.

Notice
● A grey white or red, non harmful gas is released when airbag is inflated. This is
perfectly normal and is not an indication of a fire in the vehicle.


141

In the event of an accident in which the airbags are deployed:
– the interior lighting comes on (if the switch for the interior light is in the
door contact position),
– the hazard warning light is switched on;
– all the doors are unlocked;
– the fuel supply to the engine is interrupted.

Apart from their normal protective function, a further task of the seat belts is to
also hold the driver and front passenger in a correct seated position in the event
of a frontal collision so as to enable the front airbags to offer the maximum protection.



You should therefore always fasten the seat belts, not only because this is required by law, but also for safety reasons and for your own protection ⇒ page 136,
Why seat belts?.

Notice
The dash panel must be replaced after the front passenger airbag has been deployed.

Using the system

Safety

Driving Tips

General Maintenance

Breakdown assistance

Technical data



142

Airbag system

Function of the front airbags

Important safety information regarding the front airbag system

Risk of injury to the head and chest area is reduced by fully inflated
airbags.

Correct use of the airbag system considerably reduces the risk of
injury!

Fig. 123 Inflated airbags

The airbag system is designed in such a way that the airbags for the driver and
front passenger are deployed in the event of a violent frontal collision.
In certain accident situations, the front, side and head airbag are simultaneously
deployed.
If the airbags are deployed, the airbags are filled with a propellant gas and inflated
in front of the driver and front passenger ⇒ fig. 123 . The airbags inflate in fractions of a second and at a high speed in order to be able to offer that additional
protection in the event of an accident. The forward movement of the driver and of
the front passenger is cushioned when they make contact with the fully inflated
airbag and the risk of injury to head and chest is thus reduced.
The specially developed airbag allows the gas to flow out of the inflated airbag in
a controlled manner (depending on the load of the particular car occupant) in order to cushion head and chest areas. The airbag then deflates subsequently to
such an extent, after an accident, to again provide a clear view forward.
A grey white, non harmful gas is released when airbag is inflated. This is perfectly
normal and is not an indication of a fire in the vehicle.
The airbag develops enormous forces when triggered, which can lead to injuries if
the sitting position or seated position is not correct ⇒  in Important safety infor
mation regarding the front airbag system on page 142.

Fig. 124 Safe distance to steering wheel

WARNING
● Never transport children on the front seat of a vehicle without using a
proper restraint system. If airbags are deployed in the event of an accident,
the child might suffer severe or even fatal injuries!
● For the driver and front passenger it is important to maintain a distance of
at least 25 cm from the steering wheel or dash panel ⇒ fig. 124 . Not maintaining this minimum distance will mean that the airbag system will not be able to
properly protect you - hazard! The front seats and the head restraints must always also be correctly adjusted to match the body size of the occupant.
● It is essential to always switch off ⇒ page 146, Deactivating an airbag the
front passenger airbag when attaching a child safety seat on the front passenger seat where the child is seated with its back facing in direction of travel
(in some countries also when the child is facing the direction of travel). If this
is not done, there is a risk of the child suffering severe or even fatal injuries if
the front passenger airbag is deployed. In certain countries national legal provisions also require that the side or head passenger airbags be deactivated.
When transporting a child on the front passenger seat, please comply with the
appropriate national regulations regarding the use of child safety seats.
● There must not by any further persons, animals or objects positioned between the front seated occupants and the deployment area of the airbag.

£

Airbag system
Apart from their normal protective function, a further task of the seat belts is to
also hold the driver and front passenger in a correct seated position in the event
of a side collision so as to enable the side airbags to offer the maximum protection.

WARNING (Continued)

● The steering wheel and the surface of the airbag module in the dash panel
on the passenger side must not be stuck onto, covered or modified in any other way. These parts should only be cleaned with a dry cloth or a cloth moistened with water. No objects such as cup holders, mobile phone mounts, etc.
may be attached to the covers of the airbag modules or be located within the
immediate area.

You should therefore always fasten the seat belts, not only because this is required by law, but also for safety reasons and for your own protection.



Function of the side airbags

● No modifications of any kind may be made to parts of the airbag system.
Any work on the airbag system including installing and removing system components because of other repair work (e.g. removing the steering wheel) must
only be carried out by a specialist garage.


143

Risk of injury to the upper part of the body is reduced by fully inflated side airbags.

Never carry out changes on the front bumper or on the body.

● Never place any objects on the surface of the front passenger airbag module in the dash panel.



Side airbags
Description of side airbags
The side airbag increases protection of the passenger concerned in
the case of a side impact.

Fig. 126 Inflated side airbag

When the side airbags are deployed, the head airbag and the belt tensioner are
also automatically deployed on the relevant side .
In certain accident situations, the front, side and head airbag are simultaneously
deployed.
If an airbag is deployed, the airbag is filled with gas. The airbags inflate in fractions of a second and at a high speed in order to be able to offer that additional
protection in the event of an accident ⇒ fig. 126 .

Fig. 125 Driver seat: Installation position of airbag

The side airbags are housed in the upholstery of the seat backrests of the front
seats and are marked with the lettering “AIRBAG” ⇒ fig. 125 on the middle part.

A grey white, non harmful gas is released when airbag is inflated. This is perfectly
normal and is not an indication of a fire in the vehicle.
The load of the occupants is cushioned when plunging into the fully inflated airbag and the risk of injury to the entire upper body (chest, stomach and pelvis) is
reduced on the side facing the door.

The side airbag system in combination with the three-point seat belts, offers additional protection for the upper area of the body (chest, stomach and pelvis) of the
occupants of the vehicle in the event of severe side collisions ⇒ page 144.
Using the system

Safety

Driving Tips

General Maintenance

Breakdown assistance

Technical data



144

Airbag system

Important safety information on the side airbag
Correct use of the airbag system considerably reduces the risk of
injury!
WARNING
● It is essential to always switch off ⇒ page 146, Deactivating an airbag the
front passenger airbag when attaching a child safety seat on the front passenger seat where the child is seated with its back facing in direction of travel
(in some countries also when the child is facing the direction of travel). If this
is not done, there is a risk of the child suffering severe or even fatal injuries if
the front passenger airbag is deployed. When transporting a child on the front
passenger seat, please comply with the appropriate national regulations regarding the use of child safety seats.
● Your head should never be positioned in the deployment area of the side
airbag. You might suffer severe injuries in the event of an accident. This applies in particular to children who are transported without using a suitable
child safety seat ⇒ page 150, Child safety and side airbag.
● If children adopt an incorrect seated position when travelling, they may be
exposed to an increased risk of injury in the event of an accident. This can result in serious injuries ⇒ page 148, What you should know about transporting
children!.
● There must not be any further persons, animals as well as objects positioned between the occupants and the deployment area of the airbag. No accessories, such as a can holder, should be attached to the doors.
● The airbag control unit operates together with the pressure sensors,
which are attached in the front doors. For this reason no adjustments must be
carried out at the doors as well as at the door panels (for example additional
installation of loudspeakers). Resulting damages can have a negative affect
on the operation of the airbag system. All work on the front doors and their
panels must only be carried out by a specialist garage.

WARNING (Continued)

● In the event of a side collision, the side airbags will not function properly, if
the sensors cannot measure the increasing air pressure inside the doors, because the air can escape through large, non-sealed openings in the door panel.
– Never drive with removed inner door panels.
– Never drive, if parts of the inner door panel have been removed and the
remaining openings have not been properly sealed.
– Never drive, if the loudspeakers in the doors have been removed, only if
the loudspeaker openings have been properly sealed.
– Always make sure that the openings are covered or filled, if additional
loudspeakers or other equipment parts are installed in the inner door panels.
– Always work with an authorised ŠKODA Service Partner or have it carried out by a competent specialist workshop.
● Only hang light items of clothing on the clothes hooks to the vehicle. Never leave any heavy or sharp-edged objects in the pockets of the items of clothing.
● Ensure that there are no excessive forces, such as violent knocks, kicks
etc., impact on the backrests of the seats otherwise the system may be damaged. The side airbags would not be deployed in such a case!
● Any seat or protective covers which you fit to the driver or front passenger
seats must only be of the type expressly authorized by ŠKODA. In view of the
fact that the airbag inflates out of the backrest of the seat, use of non-approved seat or protective covers would considerably impair the protective
function of the side airbag.
● Any damage to the original seat covers in the area of the side airbag module must be repaired without delay by your specialist garage.
● The airbag modules in the front seats must not display any damage, cracks
or deep scratches. It is not permissible to use force in order to open the modules.
● Any work on the side airbag system including removing and installing system components because of other repair work (e.g. removing seats) must only
be carried out by a specialist garage.



Airbag system

Head airbags

Function of the head airbags

Description of the head airbags

The risk of injury to the head and neck area is reduced in the event
of a side collision by fully inflated head airbags.

145

The head airbag together with the side airbag offers enhanced occupant protection in the event of a side collision.

Fig. 128 Inflated head airbag
Fig. 127 Installation position of the head
airbags

In the case of a side collision the head airbag is deployed together with the relevant side airbag ⇒ fig. 128 and the belt tensioner on the side of the car on which
the accident occurs.

The head airbags are positioned above the doors on both sides in the interior of
the car ⇒ fig. 127 . The installation positions of the head airbags are each marked
with the “AIRBAG” logo.

If the system is deployed, the airbag is filled with propellant gas and covers the
entire area of the side window including the door pillars ⇒ fig. 128 .
The protection offered by the head airbags is thus available simultaneously both
to the front occupants of the car seated on the side on which the collision occurs,
as well as to the rear occupants. Any impact of the head against parts of the interior or objects outside of the car, is cushioned by the inflated head airbag. The reduction in any impact to the head and the resultant minimizing of any movements
of the head additionally reduce the risk of injuries to the neck area. The head airbag also offers additional protection in the case of an offset impact by covering
the front door pillar.

The head airbag together with the three-point seat belts and the side airbags, offers additional protection for the head and neck area of the occupants in the
event of a side collision of major severity ⇒ page 146, Important safety information on the head airbag.
Apart from their normal protective function, a further task of the seat belts is to
also hold the driver and the occupants in a correct seated position in the event of
a side collision so as to enable the head airbags to offer the maximum protection.
You should therefore always fasten the seat belts, not only because this is required by law, but also for safety reasons and for your own protection ⇒ page 136,
Why seat belts?.
Together with other elements (such as cross bars in the doors, stable vehicle
structure) the head airbags are the consequent further development of occupant
protection in the case of side collisions.

Using the system

Safety

Driving Tips

In certain accident situations, the front, side and head airbag are simultaneously
deployed.



The airbags inflate in fractions of a second and at a high speed in order to be able
to offer that additional protection in the event of an accident. A grey white, non
harmful gas is released when airbag is inflated. This is perfectly normal and is not
an indication of a fire in the vehicle.

General Maintenance

Breakdown assistance

Technical data



146

Airbag system

Important safety information on the head airbag
Correct use of the airbag system considerably reduces the risk of
injury!
WARNING
● It is essential to always switch off ⇒ page 146, Deactivating an airbag the
front passenger airbag when attaching a child safety seat on the front passenger seat where the child is seated with its back facing in direction of travel
(in some countries also when the child is facing the direction of travel). If this
is not done, there is a risk of the child suffering severe or even fatal injuries if
the front passenger airbag is deployed. When transporting a child on the front
passenger seat, please comply with the appropriate national regulations regarding the use of child safety seats.
● There must not be any objects in the deployment area of the head airbags
which might prevent the airbags from inflating properly.

WARNING (Continued)

sories fitted may in certain circumstances be thrown into the interior of the
car and cause injuries to the occupants ⇒ page 198, Accessories, changes and
replacement of parts.
● Any work on the head airbag system including installing and removing system components because of other repair work (e.g. removing headliner) must
only be carried out by a specialist garage.

Deactivating an airbag
Deactivating airbags
If any airbags have been deactivated, switch them on again as
soon as possible so that they are able to again provide their proper
protection.

● Only hang light items of clothing on the clothes hooks to the vehicle. Never leave any heavy or sharp-edged objects in the pockets of the items of clothing. In addition, it is not permitted to use clothes hangers for hanging up
items of clothing.

There is the technical means installed within your vehicle to switch off the front,
side or head airbag (take out of commission).

● The airbag control unit operates together with the sensors, which are attached in the front doors. For this reason no adjustments must be carried out
at the doors as well as at the door panels (for example additional installation
of loudspeakers). Resulting damages can have a negative affect on the operation of the airbag system. All work on the front doors and their panels must
only be carried out by a specialist garage.

On vehicles equipped with the switch for deactivation of the airbags, you can deactivate the front passenger airbag by means of this switch ⇒ page 147.

● There must not be any other persons (e.g. children) or animals between
the car occupant and the deployment area of the head airbag. In addition,
none of the occupants should lean their head out of the window when driving,
or extend their arms and hands out of the window.
● The sun visors must not be swivelled to the side windows into the deployment area of the head airbags if any objects, such as ball-point pens etc. are
attached to them. This might result in injuries to the occupants if the head airbag is deployed.
● Installing impermissible accessories in the area of the head airbags may
considerably impair the protection offered by the head airbag in the event of it
being deployed. When the deployed head airbag is inflated, parts of the acces-



This is why you should have the deactivation of the airbags carried out by a specialist garage.

Deactivation of airbags is envisaged only for particular instances, such as if:
● You must in exceptional cases use a child seat on the front passenger seat
where the child is seated with its back to the direction of travel (in some countries
this must be in the direction of travel due to other legal regulations applying)
⇒ page 148, Important safety information regarding the use of child safety seats;
● you are not able to maintain the distance of at least 25 cm between middle of
steering wheel and chest, despite the driver seat being correctly adjusted;
● special attachments are required in the area of the steering wheel because of
a physical disability;
● you have installed other seats (e.g. orthopaedic seats without side airbags).
Monitoring the airbag system
The functionality of the airbag system is also monitored electronically when one
airbag has been switched off.

£

Airbag system
If the airbag was switched off using diagnostic equipment:

Switching on an airbag
– Switch off the ignition.

● The warning light for the airbag system lights up for 4 seconds after switching
on the ignition and then flashes for 12 seconds afterwards in 2 second intervals.
The following situation applies if the airbag has been switched off using the
switch for the airbag in the storage compartment:
● the airbag indicator light in the instrument cluster comes on for about 4 seconds each time the ignition is switched on,
● if the airbags are switched off, this is indicated in the middle of the dash panel
by the lighting up of the indicator light   ⇒ fig. 129 - right.



Turn the slot of the airbag switch using the key in the position 1 (ON)
⇒ fig. 129 .



Check whether the airbag indicator light   in the middle of the dash
panel lights up when the ignition is switched on ⇒ fig. 129 - right.

The airbag should only be switched off under exceptional circumstances
⇒ page 146.
Indicator light   (airbag switched off)
The airbag indicator light is located in the middle of the dash panel ⇒ fig. 129 right.

Notice
Your authorised ŠKODA Service Partner will be able to advise you whether national legislation in your country allows airbags in your vehicle to be deactivated, and
which ones.

147



If the front passenger airbag is switched off, the warning light comes on about 4
seconds after the ignition is switched on.
There is a system fault present in the airbag switch off ⇒  if the indicator light
flashes. Please have the car inspected immediately by a specialist garage.

Switch for the front passenger airbag

WARNING
● The driver is responsible for whether the airbag is switched on or switched
off.
● Only switch off the airbag when the ignition is switched off! Otherwise a
fault can occur in the system for the airbag deactivation.


Fig. 129 Storage compartment: Switch for the front passenger airbag/indicator light for a
switched off front seat passenger airbag

If the warning light   (airbag switched off) flashes:
– Front passenger airbag is not deployed in the event of an accident!
– It is also important to have the system inspected without delay by a
specialist garage.

Only the front passenger airbag is deactivated with the switch.
Deactivating an airbag
– Switch off the ignition.


Turn the slot of the airbag switch using the key in the position 2 (OFF)
⇒ fig. 129 .



Check whether the indicator light   in the middle of the dash panel
lights up when the ignition is switched on ⇒ fig. 129 - right.

Using the system

Safety

Driving Tips

General Maintenance

Breakdown assistance

Technical data



148

Transporting children safely

Transporting children safely
What you should know about transporting children!
An introduction to the subject
Accident statistics have revealed that children are generally more
safely transported on the rear seats than on the front passenger
seat.
Children who are less than 1.50 m in height and who weigh less than 36 kg should,
under normal circumstances, sit on the rear seat (take note of any national legal
provisions which differ from this). They should be secured there by means of a
child restraint system or by using the existing seat belts depending on their body
size and weight. The child seat should be mounted behind the front passenger
seat for safety reasons.
The physical principle of an accident does, of course, also apply to children
⇒ page 136, The physical principle of a frontal collision. They differ from adults in
that their muscles and bone structure of children are not yet fully developed. Thus
children are exposed to increased risk of injury.
Children should be transported by using special child safety seats in order to reduce this risk of injury.
Only use child safety seats which are officially approved, suitable for children and
which comply with the standard ECE-R 44, which classifies child safety seats into
5 groups ⇒ page 150, Classification of child seats into groups. Child restraint systems which have been tested for conformity to ECE-R 44 standard have a non-detachable test seal (a large E within a circle and below this the test number) attached to the seat.
We recommend that you use child safety seats from the ŠKODA Original Accessories range. These child seats were developed and also tested for use in ŠKODA
vehicles. They fulfil the ECE-R 44 standard.

WARNING
Always comply with national legal provisions and instructions from the relevant child safety seat manufacturer when installing and using a child seat
⇒ page 148.

Notice
National legal provisions, which deviate from the information contained in these
operating instructions, take precedence over the information contained in the operating instructions.



Important safety information regarding the use of child safety
seats
Correct use of child safety seats considerably reduces the risk of injury!
WARNING
● All the occupants of the car - in particular children - must wear a seat belt
when the car is moving.
● Children who are less than 1.50 m in height and who weigh less than 36 kg
must not use a normal seat belt without a child restraint system, otherwise
this may result in injuries to the stomach and neck areas. Comply with the national legal requirements.


One should never carry children, and also not babies! - on one's lap.

● You can transport a child safely in a suitable child safety seat ⇒ page 150,
Child seat!


Only one child may be fastened with a seat belt into a child safety seat.



Never leave the child sitting unattended in the seat.

● Certain outside climatic conditions can cause life-threatening temperatures in the vehicle.
● Never allow your child to be transported in a vehicle without the use of a
suitable restraint system.
● Children should also never stand up in a vehicle or kneel on the seats
when the vehicle is moving. In the event of an accident the child will be
thrown through the vehicle and may as a result suffer fatal injuries, and also
injure other occupants.

£

Transporting children safely
We recommend, for safety reasons, that you always mount a child restraint systems on the rear seats whenever possible. If you still decide, however, to use a
child safety seat on the front passenger seat then you must pay attention to the
following warnings in connection with the use of the airbag system on the front
passenger seat.

WARNING (Continued)

● Children are exposed to an increased risk of injury in the event of an accident if they lean forward or adopt an incorrect seated position when the vehicle is moving. This particularly applies to children who are transported on the
front passenger seat if the airbag system deploys in the event of an accident.
This can result in severe or even fatal injuries.

WARNING

● It is important that the belt webbing is properly routed if the seat belts are
to offer their maximum protection ⇒ page 138, How are seat belts correctly
fastened?. Pay particular attention to the information provided by the manufacturer of the child safety seat regarding correct routing of the belt. Seat
belts which are not correctly adjusted can themselves cause injuries even in
minor accidents.

● Warning - particular hazard! Never use a child safety seat on the front passenger seat in which the child is seated with its back facing the direction of
travel. This child safety seat is positioned in the deployment area of the front
passenger airbag. The airbag may cause the child severe, or even fatal injuries,
in the event of it being deployed.
● This is also clearly stated on the sticker which is located on the centre column of the body on the front passenger side ⇒ fig. 130 . The sticker is visible
upon opening the front passenger door. For some countries, the sticker is also
affixed to the sun visor of the front passenger.

● Safety belts must be checked to ensure that they are running properly.
One should also ensure that the belt is not damaged by sharp-edged fittings.
● It is essential to always switch off the front passenger airbag when attaching a child safety seat to the front passenger seat where the child is seated
with its back facing in direction of travel ⇒ page 147. If this is not done, there
is a risk of the child suffering severe or even fatal injuries if the front passenger airbag is deployed. When transporting a child on the front passenger seat,
please comply with the appropriate national regulations regarding the use of
child safety seats.

Use of child safety seats on the front passenger seat
Child safety seats should always be attached to the rear seats.

149



● It is essential to always switch off the front passenger airbag when a child
safety seat is nevertheless attached to the front passenger seat where the
child is seated with its back facing in direction of travel ⇒ page 146, Deactivating an airbag. If this is not done, there is a risk of the child suffering severe or
even fatal injuries if the front passenger airbag is deployed. When transporting a child on the front passenger seat, please comply with the appropriate
national regulations regarding the use of child safety seats.
● If the front passenger airbag has been switched off by a specialist garage
using the vehicle system tester, the side and head passenger airbag remains
switched on. Please comply with any differing national legal regulations regarding the use of child safety seats.
● If a child safety seat in which the child faces in the direction of travel is
used on the front passenger seat, the front passenger seat must be moved
back and to the top fully. Move the seat backrest into the vertical position.
● You should have the front passenger airbag (or airbags) reactivated just as
soon as you no longer use a child safety seat on the front passenger seat.

Fig. 130 Sticker on the centre column of
the body on the front passenger side.

Using the system

Safety

Driving Tips

General Maintenance

Breakdown assistance

Technical data



150

Transporting children safely

Child safety and side airbag
Children must never be seated in the deployment area of the side
airbags and head airbags.

WARNING
● It is essential to always switch off ⇒ page 146 the front passenger airbag
when attaching a child safety seat on the front passenger seat where the
child is seated with its back facing in direction of travel (in some countries also
when the child is facing the direction of travel). If this is not done, there is a
risk of the child suffering severe or even fatal injuries if the front passenger
airbag is deployed. When transporting a child on the front passenger seat,
please comply with the appropriate national regulations regarding the use of
child safety seats.
● When transporting a child on the front passenger seat, please comply with
the appropriate national regulations regarding the use of child safety seats.
● Children must never be seated with their head in the deployment area of
the side airbag - risk of injury!

Fig. 131 Seated position of an unprotected child at risk from side airbag/Child properly protected by safety seat

● Do not place any objects within the deployment area of the side airbag risk of injury!

In the event of a side collision, the side airbags offer the vehicle occupants enhanced protection.

Child seat

The side airbags are inflated in fractions of a second in order to be able to provide
this protection ⇒ page 143, Function of the side airbags.

Classification of child seats into groups

The airbag develops such a strong force that an occupant who has not adopted an
upright seated position may suffer injuries from the airbag or as a result of objects
which are located within the deployment area of the side airbag.

Only child safety seats which have an official approval and are suitable for the child, may be used.

This applies particularly to children if they are not transported in accordance
with legal requirements.

ECE-R 44 standard applies to child safety seats. ECE-R means: Economic Commission for Europe - Regulation.

The child is protected when seated in a child safety seat matching its age. Adequate room is available between the child and the deployment area of the side
airbag and head airbag. The airbag offers optimal protection.

Child safety seats which have been tested for conformity to ECE-R 44 standard
have a non-detachable test seal (a large E within a circle and below this the test
number) attached to the seat.



Child safety seats are classified in 5 groups:
Group

Weight

0

0 - 10 kg

0+

up to 13 kg

1

9 - 18 kg

2

15 - 25 kg

3

22 - 36 kg

⇒ page 151
⇒ page 151
⇒ page 151

⇒ page 152
⇒ page 152

£

Transporting children safely
Children who are more than 1.50 m in height or who weigh more than 36 kg can
use normal seat belts without a seat bolster.



Use of child seats

U
+
T

Front passenger
seat

Rear seat
outside

● It is essential to always switch off the front passenger airbag at a specialist garage or with the switch for front passenger airbag when attaching in exceptional circumstances a child safety seat on the front passenger seat where
the child is seated with its back facing in direction of travel ⇒ page 147, Switch
for the front passenger airbag.

Rear seat
middle

0

U +

U +

T

U

0+

U +

U +

T

U

1

U +

U +

T

U

2 and 3

U

U

● Please comply with any differing national legal regulations regarding the
use of child safety seats.
● If this is not done, a child seated on the front passenger seat may suffer
severe or even fatal injuries if the front passenger airbag or airbags are deployed.

U

Universal category - seat is suitable for all approved types of child safety
seats.
The seat can be fitted with fixing eyes for the “ISOFIX”system.
The divided rear seat - seat can be fitted with fixing eyes for the system “Top
Tether” ⇒ page 154, Attaching child seat using the “Top Tether” system.

Child seats in which the child is facing with its back towards the direction of
travel should not be used on the front passenger seat when the vehicle is fitted
with a front passenger airbag ⇒ page 149, Use of child safety seats on the front
passenger seat.

WARNING

An overview of the usefulness of child seats on each of the seats according to the
ECE-R 44 standard:
Child seat
of the group

151

● You should have the front passenger airbag (or airbags) reactivated just as
soon as you no longer use a child safety seat on the front passenger seat.





Child safety seats in Group 1

Child seats of group 0/0+

Fig. 133 Child seat with padded table in
Group 1 installed on rear seat bench facing the direction of travel
Fig. 132 Child seats of group 0/0+

The optimal solution for babies of up to about 9 months old weighing up to 10 kg
or children up to about 18 months old weighing up to 13 kg is a child safety seat
which is fastened in the opposite direction of travel ⇒ fig. 132 .

Using the system

Safety

Driving Tips

Child seats in Group 1 are for babies and small children up to 4 years of age with a
weight of between 9 and 18 kilograms. It is best for children in the lower range of
this group, to use a child seat which allows the child to sit with its back to the direction of travel. It is best for children in the upper range of the Group 0+, to use a
£
child seat which allows the child to sit ⇒ fig. 133 in the direction of travel.

General Maintenance

Breakdown assistance

Technical data

152

Transporting children safely

Child seats in which the child is facing with its back towards the direction of
travel should not be used on the front passenger seat when the vehicle is fitted
with a front passenger airbag ⇒ page 149, Use of child safety seats on the front
passenger seat.

WARNING
● When transporting a child on the front passenger seat, please comply with
the appropriate national regulations regarding the use of child safety seats.
Switch off the front passenger airbag if necessary at a specialist garage or
switch it off with the switch for front passenger airbag ⇒ page 147, Switch for
the front passenger airbag.

WARNING
● It is essential to always switch off the front passenger airbag at a specialist garage or with the switch for front passenger airbag when attaching in exceptional circumstances a child safety seat on the front passenger seat where
the child is seated with its back facing in direction of travel ⇒ page 147, Switch
for the front passenger airbag.

● The shoulder part of the seat belt must run approximately across the middle of the shoulder and fit snugly against the chest. It must on no account run
across the neck. The lap part of the seat belt must run across the pelvis and
fits snugly; it must not run over the belly. Tighten the belt webbing over your
hip if necessary.

● Please comply with any differing national legal regulations regarding the
use of child safety seats.

● Please comply with any differing national legal regulations regarding the
use of child safety seats.

● If this is not done, a child seated on the front passenger seat may suffer
severe or even fatal injuries if the front passenger airbag or airbags are deployed.
● You should have the front passenger airbag (or airbags) reactivated just as
soon as you no longer use a child safety seat on the front passenger seat.



Child safety seats in Group 3


Child safety seats in Group 2

Fig. 135 Child seat in Group 3 installed
on the rear seat facing the direction of
travel

Fig. 134 Child seat in Group 2 installed
on the rear seat facing the direction of
travel

For children up to about 7 years of age weighing between 15 and 25 kg the optimal solution is a child safety seat in combination with the three-point seat belt
⇒ fig. 134 .

For children of about 7 years of age weighing between 22 and 36 kg and of a
height of less than 150 cm, the optimal solution is a child safety seat (seat bolster)
in combination with the three-point seat belt ⇒ fig. 135 .
Children who are more than 1.50 m in height or who weigh more than 36 kg can
use normal seat belts without a seat bolster.

£

Transporting children safely

WARNING
● When transporting a child on the front passenger seat, please comply with
the appropriate national regulations regarding the use of child safety seats.
Switch off the front passenger airbag if necessary at a specialist garage or
switch it off with the switch for front passenger airbag ⇒ page 147, Switch for
the front passenger airbag.

Attaching a child seat using the “ISOFIX” system

Push the notched arms of the child seat into the locking eyes in direction of
arrow 1 , until they are heard to lock in place ⇒ fig. 136 .



Pull on both sides of the child seat!

One can mount a child safety seat using the “ISOFIX” system quickly, easily and
reliably. Please pay close attention to instructions from the manufacturer of the
child safety seat when installing and removing the seat.

● The shoulder part of the seat belt must run approximately across the middle of the shoulder and fit snugly against the chest. It must on no account run
across the neck. The lap part of the seat belt must run across the pelvis and
fits snugly; it must not run over the belly. Tighten the belt webbing over your
hip if necessary.
● Please comply with any differing national legal regulations regarding the
use of child safety seats.



153

Child seats fitted with the “ISOFIX” system can only be mounted and fixed in a vehicle fitted with an “ISOFIX” system when these child seats have been released
for this type of vehicle according to the ECE-R 44 standard.
Child safety seats with the fixing system “ISOFIX” can be obtained from ŠKODA
Original Accessories.


Complete installation instructions are enclosed with the child safety seat.

WARNING
● The locking eyes have just been developed for child safety seats which use
the “ISOFIX” system. You should therefore never attach other child safety
seats, seat belts or objects to the locking eyes - hazard!
● Ask an authorised ŠKODA Service Partner whether a child seat which you
bought for another vehicle is recommended for use in your vehicle before using a child seat with “ISOFIX” system.
● Certain child seats which use the “ISOFIX” system can be attached with
standard three-point seat belts. Please pay close attention to instructions
from the manufacturer of the child safety seat when installing and removing
the seat.

Fig. 136 Locking eyes (ISOFIX system)/Push the ISOFIX child seat into the installed mounting
funnels

There are two fixing eyes between the seat backrest and the seat cushion of the
front passenger seat for fixing the “ISOFIX” system child seat in place. The locking
eyes on the rear outside seats are located below the upholstery. The places are
marked with signs with the logo “ISOFIX” ⇒ fig. 136 - left.

Notice
● Child seats which use the “ISOFIX” system are currently available for children
weighing up to about 18 kg. This corresponds to an age range up to 4 years.


The child seats can also be fitted with the “Top Tether” system ⇒ page 154.

Install child seat
– Open the zip fasteners between the seat cushion and the seat backrest of the
rear exterior seat.


Insert the mounting funnels A onto the locking eyes B between the seat
backrest and the seat cushion ⇒ fig. 136 .

Using the system

Safety

Driving Tips

General Maintenance

Breakdown assistance

Technical data



154

Transporting children safely

Attaching child seat using the “Top Tether” system

Fig. 137 Rear seat: Top Tether

IIn certain countries national legal provisions also require the equipment of the
rear seat with fixing eyes for child seat using the “Top Tether” system ⇒ fig. 137 .
Always perform the installation and removal of the child seat using the “Top Tether” system as stated in the instructions from the manufacturer of the child seat.

WARNING
● Attach the child seats with the “Top Tether” system only to the points provided for this purpose ⇒ fig. 137 .
● On no account should you equip your vehicle, e.g. mount screws or other
anchorage points.
● Pay attention to the important safety information regarding the use of
child seats.

Notice
Store the remaining part of the belt for the “Top Tether” system in a textile pocket, which is located at the child seat.



Intelligent Technology

155

Driving Tips
Intelligent Technology
General information




Brake Assist,
Uphill Start Assist.

The ESP system cannot be switched off with the  ⇒ fig. 138 button; only the
TCS system is switched off, the warning light  instrument cluster lights up.

WARNING
Lack of fuel can cause irregular engine running or lead to shut down the engine. Consequently, the systems described in this chapter may to lose their effectiveness, resulting in loss of vehicle control – risk of accident!

Electronic stability programme (ESP)



Operating principle
The ESP switches on automatically when the engine is started and then conducts
a self-test. The ESP control unit processes data from the individual systems. It also processes additional measurement data which are supplied by highly sensitive
sensors: the rotational velocity of the vehicle about its vertical axis, the lateral acceleration of the vehicle, the braking pressure and the steering angle.
The direction which the driver wishes to take is determined based on the steering
angle and the speed of the vehicle and is constantly compared with the actual behaviour of the vehicle. If differences exist, such as the car beginning to skid, the
ESP will automatically brake the appropriate wheel.

General

The car is stabilised again by the forces which take effect when the wheel is
braked. Intervention into the brake system takes place primarily on the outer front
wheel of a vehicle which tends to oversteer (tendency for the rear of the vehicle
to break away) while occurs this is on the inner rear wheel of a vehicle which
tends to understeer (tendency to shift out of the curve). This braking control cycle
is accompanied by noises.
Fig. 138 ESP system: Switch for TCS

The ESP aids you in maintaining control of your vehicle in situations in which the
vehicle is driving at its dynamic limits, such as entering a curve fast. The risk of
skidding is reduced and your car thus offers greater driving stability depending on
the conditions of the road surface. The system operates at all speeds.

During an intervention of the system, the warning light  flashes in the instrument cluster ⇒ page 26.
The ESP operates in combination with the ABS ⇒ page 159, Antilock brake system
(ABS). If there is a fault in the ABS system, the ESP also does not operate.
The ESP warning light lights up in the instrument cluster when there is a fault on
£
the ESP  ⇒ page 26.

The following systems are integrated into the electronic stability programme:





Electronic Differential Lock (EDL),
Traction control system (TCS),
active driver-steering recommendation (DSR),
Antilock brake system (ABS),

Using the system

Safety

Driving Tips

General Maintenance

Breakdown assistance

Technical data

156

Intelligent Technology

WARNING
It is also not possible for the ESP to overcome the physical limits of the vehicle. Even if a vehicle fitted with ESP you should still always adapt your style of
driving to the condition of the road surface and the traffic situation. This particularly applies when driving on slippery and wet roads. The increased safety
offered must not tempt you to take greater risks than otherwise - risk of an
accident!

Notice
● All four wheels must be fitted with the same tyres in order to achieve problem-free operation of the ESP. Differing rolling circumferences of the tyres can
lead to an undesirable reduction in the engine output.
● Changes to vehicle (e.g. on engine, on the brakes, on chassis or another combination of tyres and wheels) can influence the function of the ESP ⇒ page 198,

Accessories, changes and replacement of parts.

Electronic Differential Lock (EDL and XDL)
The electronic differential lock prevents an individual wheel from
slipping.
General
The EDL makes it much easier, and sometimes at all possible, to start off, accelerate and climb a steep hill when the conditions of the road surface are unfavourable.
Operating principle
The EDL is activated automatically, that is without any action on the part of the
driver. It monitors the speeds of the driven wheels with the aid of the ABS sensors. Should only one drive wheel begin spinning on a slippery surface there will
be an appreciable difference in the speed of the driven wheels. The EDL function
brakes the slipping wheel and the differential transmits a greater driving force to
the other driven wheel. This control process is also accompanied by noises.
Overheating of the brakes
The EDL switches off automatically if unusually severe stresses exist in order to
avoid excessive heat generation in the disc brake on the wheel which is being
braked. The vehicle can continue to be driven and has the same characteristics as
a vehicle not fitted with EDL.

The EDL switches on again automatically as soon as the brake has cooled down.
XDL function (only for Laura RS)
The XDL function is an extension to the electronic differential lock. The XDL function does not respond to traction, but to the relief of the inner front wheel during
fast cornering. An active brake intervention on the brake of the inner wheel prevents it from spinning. Thus, the traction is improved and the vehicle continues to
follow the desired track.

WARNING
● Depress the accelerator carefully when accelerating on uniformly slippery
road surfaces, such as ice and snow. The driven wheels might still spin despite
the EDL and affect the stability of the vehicle - risk of an accident!
● You should always adapt your style of driving to the condition of road surface and to the traffic situation even when your vehicle is fitted with EDL. The
increased safety offered must not tempt you to take greater risks than otherwise - risk of an accident!

Notice
● If the ABS or ESP warning light comes on, this may also indicate a fault in the
EDL. Have the vehicle inspected by your specialist garage as soon as you can.
● Changes to vehicle (e.g. on engine, on the brakes, on chassis or another combination of tyres and wheels) can influence the function of the EDL ⇒ page 198,

Accessories, changes and replacement of parts.

Intelligent Technology

Traction control system (TCS)
The traction control system prevents the driven wheels from spinning when accelerating.

157

The TCS should normally always be switched on. It may be good practice in certain
exceptional cases, such as when you wish to have wheel slip, to switch off the
system.
Examples:




when driving with snow chains,
when driving in deep snow or on a loose surface,
when it is necessary to rock a car free when it has become stuck.

then you should switch on the TCS again.

WARNING

Fig. 139 TCS switch

General
The TCS makes it much easier, and sometimes at all possible, to start off, accelerate and climb a steep hill when the conditions of the road surface are unfavourable.
Operating principle
The TCS switches on automatically when the engine is started and then conducts
a self-test. The system monitors the speeds of the driven wheels with the aid of
the ABS sensors. If the wheels are spinning, the force transmitted to the road surface is automatically adapted by reducing the engine speed. The system operates
at all speeds.
The TCS operates in combination with the ABS ⇒ page 159, Antilock brake system
(ABS). The TCS will not function if a fault exists in the ABS system.
The TCS warning light lights up in the instrument cluster when there is a fault on
the TCS  ⇒ page 26.
During an intervention of the system, the TCS warning light flashes  in the instrument cluster ⇒ page 26.
Switching off
You can also switch off the TCS system by pressing the ⇒ fig. 139 button, or, in
vehicles with ESP, by pressing the ⇒ fig. 138 button. The TCS warning light lights
up in the instrument cluster when the TCS is switched off .

Using the system

Safety

Driving Tips

You should always adjust your style of driving to the conditions of the road
surface and the traffic situation. The increased safety offered must not tempt
you to take greater risks than otherwise - risk of an accident!

Notice
● All four wheels must be fitted with the same tyres in order to achieve problem-free operation of the TCS. Differing rolling circumferences of the tyres can
lead to an undesirable reduction in the engine output.
● Changes to vehicle (e.g. on engine, on the brakes, on chassis or another combination of tyres and wheels) can influence the function of the TCS ⇒ page 198, Ac
cessories, changes and replacement of parts.

Active driver-steering recommendation (DSR)
This function indicates to the driver in critical situations a steering recommendation in order to stabilise the vehicle. The active driver-steering recommendation is
activated, for example, on the right and left vehicle side when braking sharply on
different road surfaces.

WARNING
Even with this function the vehicle cannot steer itself! The driver is furthermore responsible for the steering of the vehicle!

General Maintenance

Breakdown assistance

Technical data



158

Intelligent Technology

Brakes
What has a negative effect on braking efficiency?
Wear-and-tear
Wear-and-tear to the brake pads is greatly dependent on the operating conditions
of the vehicle and your style of driving. Particularly if you drive a great deal in
towns and over short distances or if you adopt a sporty style of driving, it may be
necessary to have the thickness of the brake pads inspected at a specialist garage
between the service inspections.
Wet roads or road salt
There may be a certain delay before the brakes take full effect under certain conditions such as when driving through water, during heavy rain showers or after
the vehicle has been washed in an automatic vehicle wash, since the brake discs
and brake pads may be moist or even have a coating of ice on them in winter. You
should dry the brakes as soon as possible by applying and releasing the brakes
several times.
There also may be a certain delay before the full braking efficiency is available
when driving on roads which have been treated with road salt if you have not
used the brakes for some considerable time beforehand. The layer of salt on the
brake discs and brake pads must first be rubbed off when you apply the brakes.
Corrosion
Corrosion on the brake discs and dirt on the bake pads occur if the vehicle has
been parked for a long period and if you do not make much use of the braking system.
We recommend cleaning the brake discs by firmly applying the brakes at a fairly
high speed if you do not make much use of the braking system or if surface corrosion is present ⇒  .
Faults in the brake surface
If you notice that the braking distance has suddenly become longer and that the
brake pedal can be depressed further, it is possible that a brake circuit of the dualcircuit brake system has failed. Drive, in such cases, to the nearest specialist garage without delay in order to have the problem rectified. Drive at a reduced
speed while on your way to the dealer and adapt your style of driving to the higher brake pedal pressure required.

Low brake fluid level
An insufficient level of brake fluid may result in problems in the brake system. The
level of the brake fluid is monitored electronically ⇒ page 28, Brake system .

WARNING
● Only apply the brakes for the purpose of drying and cleaning the brake
discs if the traffic conditions permit this. Do not place any other road users in
jeopardy.
● When retrospectively mounting a front spoiler, solid wheel hubs etc. one
must ensure that the air supply to the front wheel brakes is not reduced otherwise the braking system could run too hot.
● Allow for the fact that new brake pads do not achieve their full braking efficiency until approximately 200 kilometres. New brake pads must be first
“run in” before they develop their optimal friction force. You can, however,
compensate for this slightly reduced braking force by increasing the pressure
on the brake pedal. This guideline also applies to any new brake pads installed
at a future date.

CAUTION
● Never allow the brakes to rub by applying slight pressure if you do not wish to
brake the vehicle. This causes the brakes to overheat and can also result in a longer braking distance and excessive wear.
● Before negotiating a steep downhill section, please reduce your speed, shift
down into the next lower gear (manual gearbox) or select a lower driving stage
(automatic gearbox). This enables you to make full use of the braking power of
the vehicle and reduces the strain on the brakes. Any additional braking should be
done intermittently, not continuously.

Notice
The brake light flashes automatically in case of an emergency braking at speeds
greater than 60 km/h or with the intervention of the ABS, which lasts longer than
1.5 seconds. After the speed was reduced below 10 km/h or the vehicle was stopped, the brake light stops flashing and the hazard warning light system switches
on. The hazard warning light system is switched off automatically after accelerating or driving off again.



Intelligent Technology

Brake booster

As soon as the vehicle speed has increased to about 20 km/hour an automatic
test procedure is conducted during which you will be able to hear a pumping noise
for about 1 second.

The brake booster boosts the pressure which you generate with the brake pedal.
The necessary pressure is only generated when the engine is running.

WARNING

WARNING


● The ABS can also not overcome the physical limits of your vehicle. Please
do not forget this, particularly when driving on icy or wet road surfaces. If the
ABS is operating within the control range, adapt your speed immediately to
the conditions of the road surface and the traffic situation. The increased
safety offered by the ABS must not tempt you to take greater risks than otherwise - risk of an accident!

Never switch off the engine before the vehicle is stationary.

● The brake booster only operates when the engine is running. Greater
physical effort for braking is required when engine is switched off. Because if
you do not stop as normal, this can cause an accident and severe injuries.
● While stopping or braking with a vehicle with a petrol engine and manual
transmission in the low rev range, press down on the clutch pedal. If you fail
to do so, the result may be an impairment of the function of the power brake.
You will apply a greater force to the brake pedal which you are usde to - danger of accident!

159

● The normal braking system is still fully functional if there is an ABS fault.
Visit a specialist garage immediately and adjust your style of driving according
to the damage to the ABS as you will not know how great the damage is and
the limitation it is placing on the braking efficiency.


Notice


Antilock brake system (ABS)
ABS prevents the wheels locking when braking.
General
The ABS contributes significantly to enhancing the active safety of your vehicle.
Compared to a car not fitted with the ABS brake system, you are able to retain optimal steering ability even during a full brake application on a slippery road surface
because the wheels do not lock up.
You must not expect, however, that the braking distance will be shorter under all
circumstances as a result of the ABS. The braking distance for example on gravel
and fresh snow, when you should anyway be driving slowly and cautiously, will be
longer.
Operating principle
The brake pressure will be reduced on a wheel which is rotating at a speed which
is too low for the speed of the vehicle and tending to lock. This control cycle is
noticeable from a pulsating movement of the brake pedal which is accompanied
by noises. This is consciously intended to provide the driver with the information
that the wheels are tending to lock (ABS control range). You must always keep the
brake pedal depressed to enable the ABS to optimally control the brake application in this braking range. Never interrupt the application of the brakes!

Using the system

Safety

Driving Tips

A warning light comes on if a fault occurs in the ABS system  ⇒ page 27.

● Changes to vehicle (e.g. on engine, on the brakes, on chassis or another combination of tyres and wheels) can influence the function of the ABS ⇒ page 198,

Accessories, changes and replacement of parts.

Brake Assist
During a severe brake application (e.g. if a hazard exists), the Brake Assist increases the braking force and thus makes it possible to rapidly produce the pressure
required in the brake system.
The majority of drivers do apply the brakes in good time in dangerous situations,
but do not depress the brake pedal with sufficient pressure. Consequently, it is
not possible for the car to achieve its maximum deceleration and the car covers a
greater distance than necessary.
The Brake Assist is activated by the very quick operation of the brake pedal. In
such cases, a much greater braking pressure exists than during a normal brake application. This makes it possible, even with a relatively low resistance of the brake
pedal, to produce an adequate pressure in the brake system in the shortest possible time, which is required for maximum deceleration of the car. You must apply
the brake pedal firmly and hold it in this position in order to achieve the shortest
£
possible braking distance.

General Maintenance

Breakdown assistance

Technical data

160

Intelligent Technology

The Brake Assist is able to help you achieve a shorter braking distance in emergency situations by rapidly producing the pressure required in the brake system. It
fully exploits the attributes of the ABS. After you release the brake pedal, the
function of the Brake Assist is automatically switched off and the brakes operate
in the normal way.

If there is a fault in the power steering, the warning light  or  lights up in the
instrument cluster ⇒ page 24.

WARNING
Contact your specialist garage if the power steering is defective.

The Brake Assist is part of the ESP system. If a fault occurs in the ESP, the Brake
Assist function is also not available. Further information on the ESP ⇒ page 155.



Tyre pressure monitoring system

WARNING
● The Brake Assist is also not able to overcome the physical limits of your car
in terms of the braking distance required.
● Adapt your speed to the conditions of the road surface and to the traffic
situation.
● The increased safety offered by the Brake Assist must not tempt you to
take a greater safety risk than otherwise.



Uphill Start Assist

Fig. 140 Button for setting the tyre inflation pressure control value

The uphill start assist makes it easier to start off on steep hills. The system assists
a start off by holding the brake pressure produced by the brake pedal actuation
for approx. 2 seconds after releasing the brake pedal. The driver can therefore
move his foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal and start off on the
slope, without having to actuate the handbrake. The brake pressure drops gradually the more you operate the accelerator pedal. If the vehicle does not start off
within 2 seconds, it starts to roll back.
The uphill start assist is active as of a 5 % slope, if the driver door is closed. It is
always active on slopes when in forward or reverse start off. When driving downhill, it is inactive.

Electromechanical power steering
The power steering enables you to steer the vehicle with less physical force.
With the electromechanical power steering, the steering assist is automatically
adapted to the speed and to the steering angle.
It is still possible to fully steer the vehicle if the power steering fails or if the engine is not running (vehicle being towed in). The only difference is that greater
physical effort is required.

The tyre pressure monitoring system compares with the aid of the ABS sensors
the speed and also the rolling circumference of the individual wheels. If the rolling
circumference of a wheel is changed, the warning light  in the instrument cluster ⇒ page 27 and an acoustic signal sounds.
The rolling circumference of the tyre can change if:



● the tyre inflation pressure is too low,
● the structure of the tyre is damaged,
● the vehicle is loaded on one side,
● the wheels of an axle are loaded heavily (e.g. when towing a trailer or when
driving uphill or downhill),
● snow chains are mounted,
● the temporary spare wheel is mounted,
● one wheel per axle was changed.
Basic setting of the system
After changing the tyre inflation pressures, after changing one or several wheels,
the position of a wheel on the vehicle (e.g. exchanging the wheels between the
axles) or when the warning light lights up while driving, a basic setting of the sys£
tem must be carried out as follows.

Intelligent Technology
● Inflate all tyres to the specified inflation pressure ⇒ page 193.
● Switch on the ignition.
● Press button   ⇒ fig. 140 for more than 2 seconds. While pressing the button, the warning light  lights up. At the same time the memory of the system is
erased and the new calibration is started, which is confirmed with an audible signal and then the warning light  goes out.
● If the warning light  does not go out after the basic setting, there is a fault in
the system. Have the vehicle inspected by your nearest specialist garage.

161

Diesel particle filter (diesel engine)
In the diesel particle filter the resulting soot particles are collected
and burnt during the combustion of diesel fuel.

Warning light  lights up
If the tyre inflation pressure of at least one wheel is insufficiently inflated in comparison to the stored basic value, the warning light  ⇒  lights up.
Warning light  flashes
If the warning light flashes, there is a system fault. Have the vehicle inspected by
your nearest specialist garage.

Fig. 141 Vehicle data sticker

Code 7GG, 7MB or 7MG on the vehicle data sticker, see ⇒ fig. 141 , indicates that
your vehicle is equipped with a diesel particle filter. The vehicle data sticker is located on the floor of the luggage compartment and is also stated in the Service
schedule.

WARNING
● When the warning light  lights up, immediately reduce the speed and
avoid sudden steering and brake manoeuvres. Please stop the vehicle without
delay at the nearest possible stop and inspect the tyres and their inflation
pressures.

The diesel particle filter filters the soot particles completely from the exhaust. The
soot is collected in the diesel particle filter and burnt regularly. To assist this procedure, we recommend not to drive regularly over short distances.

● The driver is responsible for the correct tyre inflation pressures. For this
reason, the tyre inflation pressures must be checked regularly.

If the diesel particle filter is full or there is a fault, it is indicated by the warning
light .

● Under certain circumstances (e.g. sporty style of driving, wintry or unpaved
roads) the warning light  can be delayed or does not light up at all.
● The tyre pressure monitoring system does not take away the responsibility
from the driver for the correct tyre inflation pressure.

WARNING
● The diesel particle filter achieves very high temperatures. Therefore do not
park at points where the hot filter comes into direct contact with dry grass or
other combustible materials - risk of fire!

Notice
The tyre pressure monitoring system:

● Never use additional underbody protection or corrosion-protection agents
for the exhaust pipes, catalytic converters, diesel particle filter or heat shields.
When the engine reaches its operating temperature, these substances might
ignite - risk of fire.

● does not replace the regular tyre inflation pressure control, because the system cannot detect an even pressure loss,
● cannot warn in case of very rapid tyre inflation pressure loss, e.g. in case of
sudden tyre damage. In this case carefully bring the vehicle to a standstill without
sudden steering movements and without sharp braking.
● In order to ensure a proper functioning of the tyre inflation pressure-control
system, it is necessary to carry out the basic setting again every 10 000 km or 1x a
year.
Using the system

Safety

Driving Tips

Notice


When using diesel fuel with high sulphur content the life of the diesel particle filter is clearly reduced. A specialist garage will be able to tell you which countries
use only diesel fuel with high sulphur content.
General Maintenance

Breakdown assistance

Technical data



162

Driving and the Environment

Driving and the Environment
The first 1 500 kilometres and afterwards
New engine
The engine has to be run in during the first 1 500 kilometres.
Up to 1 000 kilometres
– Do not drive faster than 3/4 of the mamimum speed of the gear in use, that is
3/4 of the maximum permissible engine speed.


Do not use full throttle.



Avoid high engine revolutions.



Do not tow a trailer.

From 1 000 up to 1 500 kilometres
– Increase the power output of the engine gradually up to the full speed of the
gear engaged, that is up to the maximum permissible engine revolutions.
During the first operating hours the engine has higher internal friction than later
until all of the moving parts have harmonized. The driving style which you adopt
during the first approx.1 500 kilometres plays a decisive part in the success of running in your car.
You should not drive at unnecessarily high engine revolutions even after the running-in period is complete. The maximum permissible engine speed is marked by
the beginning of the red zone on the scale of the revolutions counter. Shift up into the next higher gear on a vehicle fitted with manual gearbox before the red
zone is reached. During acceleration (depressing the accelerator) exceptionally
high engine speeds are automatically reduced, yet the engine is not protected
against too high engine speeds which are caused by incorrectly shifting down the
gears resulting in a sudden increase of the engine speeds above the permitted
maximum revolutions which can lead to engine damage.
For a vehicle fitted with a manual gearbox the converse situation also applies: Do
not drive at engine revolutions which are too low. Shift down as soon as the engine is no longer running smoothly.

CAUTION
All the speed and engine revolution figures apply only when the engine is at its
normal operating temperature. Never rev up an engine which is cold, neither when
the vehicle is stationary nor when driving in individual gears.

For the sake of the environment
Not driving at unnecessarily high engine revolutions and shifting to a higher gear
as early as possible are ways to minimise fuel consumption and operating noise
levels and protects the environment.



New tyres
New tyres have to be “run in” since they do not offer optimal grip at first. You
should take account of this fact for the first 500 kilometres and drive particularly
carefully.



New brake pads
Allow for the fact that new brake pads do not achieve their full braking efficiency
until approximately 200 kilometres. New brake pads must be first “run in” before
they develop their optimal friction force. You can, however, compensate for this
slightly reduced braking force by increasing the pressure on the brake pedal.
This guideline also applies to any new brake pads installed at a future date.
During the running-in period, you should avoid excessive stresses on the brakes.
This includes, for example, violent braking, particularly from very high speeds, and
also when crossing mountain passes.



Catalytic converter
Proper operation of the emission control system (catalytic converter) is of major significance for driving your vehicle in an environmentally conscious way.
Please refer to the following guidelines:

£

Driving and the Environment


For vehicles with petrol engine only refuel with unleaded petrol ⇒ page 177,
Unleaded petrol.



Never run the fuel tank completely empty.



Do not switch off the ignition while you are driving the vehicle.



Do not pour too much oil into the engine ⇒ page 184, Replenishing engine oil.

Driving in an economical and environmentally
conscious manner
General
Your personal style of driving is a major factor.

If you drive your vehicle in a country in which unleaded petrol is not available, you
must have the catalytic converter replaced later when driving the vehicle into a
country in which use of a catalytic converter is mandatory.

Your fuel consumption, any pollution of the environmental and the wear-and-tear
to the engine, brakes and tyres, depend essentially on three factors:
● your personal style of driving,
● the conditions under which your vehicle is operated,
● technical aspects.

WARNING
● In view of the high temperatures which may be produced in the catalytic
converter, one should always park a vehicle in such a way that the catalytic
converter cannot come into contact with easily flammable materials below the
vehicle - a risk of fire!

You can easily improve your fuel economy by 10 - 15 percent by driving in an economical way with foresight. This section is intended to provide you with a number
of tips on how to protect the environment and at the same time save money.

● Never use additional underbody protection or corrosion-protection agents
for the exhaust pipes, catalytic converters or heat shields. Such substances
might ignite when driving - risk of fire!

The fuel consumption can naturally also be influenced by factors which are beyond the driver's control. It is, for example, normal for the fuel consumption to increase in winter and under worsened conditions such as poor road conditions,
towing a trailer, etc.

CAUTION

The technical requirements for low fuel usage and economic efficiency of the vehicle have already been built into the vehicle at the works. Special attention has
been given to minimising negative effects on the environment. It is necessary to
take note of the guidelines given in this chapter in order to make best use of
these characteristics and to maintain their effectiveness.

● On vehicles fitted with a catalytic converter, never let the fuel tank run completely empty. An irregular fuel supply can result in poor ignition or misfiring. Unburnt fuel may get into the exhaust system and damage the catalytic converter.
● Filling the tank even only once with leaded petrol will result in the catalytic
converter being destroyed.

The optimal engine speed should be obtained when accelerating, in order to avoid
a high fuel consumption and resonance of the vehicle.

● If you detect misfiring, a drop in performance or irregular engine running when
driving, reduce your speed immediately and have the vehicle inspected by the
nearest specialist garage. The symptoms described may be caused by a fault in
the ignition system. Unburnt fuel may get into the exhaust system and damage
the catalytic converter.

A vehicle's highest fuel consumption occurs it accelerates.

Even if the exhaust system is operating properly, a sulphur-like exhaust odour
may be produced under certain operating conditions of the engine. This depends
on the sulphur content of the fuel. It is often sufficient to refuel with unleaded
premium-grade petrol of a different brand or at a different filling station.

Safety



Looking ahead when driving

For the sake of the environment

Using the system

163

Driving Tips



Avoid accelerating and braking unnecessarily. If you drive with forsight you will
not need to brake so often and will also then not have to accelerate so much. Let
your vehicle coast to a stop, for example, if this is possible, when you see that the
next set of traffic lights is at red.

General Maintenance

Breakdown assistance

Technical data



164

Driving and the Environment

Shifting gears and saving energy

Avoiding full throttle

Shifting up early saves on fuel.

Driving more slowly means saving fuel.

Fig. 142 Fuel consumption in litres/100
km. and speed in km/h.

Fig. 143 Fuel consumption in litres/100
km. and speed in km/h.

Manual gearbox
– Drive no more than about one length of your vehicle in first gear.


Sensitive use of the accelerator will not only significantly reduce fuel consumption
but also positively influence environmental pollution and wear of your vehicle.
You should avoid exploiting the top speed of your vehicle wherever possible. Fuel
consumption, pollutant emissions and vehicle noises increase disproportionally at
high speeds.

Shift up into the next higher gear at approx. 2 000 to 2 500 revs.

An effective way of achieving good fuel economy is to shift up early. You will consume more fuel if you drive at unnecessarily high revolutions in any given gear. To
shift in a fuel-efficient manner, follow ⇒ page 13, Shift recommendation for changing gears.

The ⇒ fig. 143 shows the ratio of fuel consumption to the speed of your vehicle.
You will cut your fuel consumption by half if you only make use three-quarters of
the possible top speed of your vehicle.

Automatic gearbox
– Depress the accelerator pedal slowly. Do not depress it beyond the kickdown
position, however.

Reducing idling
Idling also costs fuel.

Only depress the accelerator pedal slowly if your vehicle is fitted with an automatic gearbox in order to automatically select an economic driving programme. You
will achieve good fuel economy by shifting up early and shifting down late.

It is worthwhile switching off the engine in a traffic jam or when waiting at a level
crossing or at traffic lights with a lengthy red phase. Even after just 30 - 40 seconds you will have saved more fuel than that is needed when you start the engine
up again.

General
The ⇒ fig. 142 shows the ratio of fuel consumption to the speed of your vehicle in
the relevant gears. Fuel consumption in 1st gear is the highest, while that in 5th or
the 6th gear is the lowest.

If an engine is only idling it takes much longer for it to reach its normal operating
temperature. Wear-and-tear and pollutant emissions, though, are particularly high
in the warming-up phase. This is why you should drive off right after starting the

engine. Do avoid high engine revolutions at this time, however.

Notice
Also use the information supplied by the multi-functional indicator ⇒ page 14.





Driving and the Environment

Regular servicing

Avoid driving short distances

A poorly tuned engine uses an unnecessarily high amount of fuel.

Short distances result in an above-average high fuel consumption.

165

Having your vehicle serviced regularly at a specialist garge enables you to satisfy
one of the requirements for economical motoring even before you set off on your
journey. Keeping your vehicle properly serviced not only has a positive effect on
the safety of your vehicle and maintaining its value, but also saves on fuel.
A poorly tuned engine can result in a fuel consumption which is 10% higher than
normal.
The foreseen maintenance work should be undertaken exactly according to the
Service schedule by a specialist garage.

Fig. 144 Fuel consumption in litres/100
km at different temperatures

Also check the oil level after refueling. Oil consumption is dependent to a considerable extent on the load and speed of the engine. Oil consumption could be as
high as 0.5 litres/1 000 km depending on your style of driving.



It is quite normal that a new engine has a higher oil consumption at first, and reaches its lowest level only after a certain running in time. It is therefore not possible to correctly assess the oil consumption of a new vehicle until after you have
driven about 5 000 km.

The engine and catalytic converter must first have reached their optimal operating temperature in order to effectively reduce fuel consumption and pollutant
emissions.
The cold engine vehicle consumes approx. 15 - 20 litres/100 km of fuel immediately after starting. Fuel consumption drops to 10 litres/100 km after just 1 kilometre.
The engine reaches its operating temperature (outside temperature and engine
dependent) only after about 4 to 10 kilometres and the fuel consumption then
stabilizes. You should therefore avoid driving short distances whenever possible.

For the sake of the environment
● You can achieve additional improvements in your fuel economy by using highlubricity oils.
● Check the ground below your car at regular intervals to detect any leakages in
good time. Please have your vehicle inspected by a specialist garge if you find any
stains caused by oil or other fluids on the floor.

Avoid driving a distance of no more than 4 km if the engine is cold.



An important factor in this connection is also the ambient temperature. The
⇒ fig. 144 shows the different fuel consumptions for the same distance, on the
one hand at +20°C and on the other hand at -10°C. Your vehicle has a higher fuel
consumption in winter than in summer.



Checking tyre inflation pressures
Tyres which are correctly inflated save fuel.
Always ensure that your tyres are inflated to the correct pressure at all times. The
rolling resistance will be increased if the tyre filling pressure is too low. This will
not only increase fuel consumption but also tyre wear and the driving behaviour
will worsen.
Always check the inflation pressure of the tyres when cold.

Using the system

Safety

Driving Tips

General Maintenance

Breakdown assistance

Technical data

£

166

Driving and the Environment

Do not drive with winter tyres all year round for this costs about 10 % more fuel.
Winter tyres are also louder.



Environmental protection has played a major role in the design, selection of materials and manufacture of your new ŠKODA. Particular emphasis has been paid to a
number of aspects, including:

No unnecessary ballast
Transporting ballast costs fuel.

Design measures
● Joints designed to be easily detached.
● Simplified disassembly due to the modular structure system.
● Improved purity of different classes of materials.
● Identification of all plastic parts in accordance with VDA Recommendation 260.
● Reduced fuel consumption and exhaust emission CO2.
● Minimum fuel leakage during accidents.
● Reduced noise.

The fact that every kilogram of extra weight increases your fuel consumption
means that it is worth taking a look in the luggage compartment to avoid transporting any unnecessary ballast.
It is particularly in town traffic, when one is accelerating quite often, that the vehicle weight will have a significant effect upon the fuel consumption. A rule of
thumb here is that an increase in weight of 100 kilograms will cause an increase in
fuel consumption of about 1 litre/100 kilometres.
You may frequently also leave a roof rack fitted on just out of convenience, although you no longer need it. The increased aerodynamic drag of your vehicle
causes it to use about 10% more fuel than normal at a speed of 100 - 120 km/h,
even when you are not carrying a load on the roof.



Saving electricity
Generating electricity costs fuel.


Switch off electrical components as soon as you no longer need them.

When the engine is running, the alternator generates and supplies electrical power. If more electrical components of the electrical system are switched on, more
fuel is needed to operate the alternator.



Keeping a log of your fuel consumption
If you really wish to keep a close check on your fuel consumption, it is best to enter the figures in a logbook. This does not take much time but is a very worthwhile
exercise. It enables you to detect any change (positive and negative) at an early
stage and to take any appropriate action.
If you find that your fuel consumption is too high, you should reflect on how,
where and in what conditions you have driven the vehicle since you last refuelled.
1)

Subject to fulfilment of the national legal requirements.

Environmental compatibility

Choice of materials
● Extensive use of recyclable material.
● Air conditioning filled with CFC-free refrigerant.
● No cadmium.
● No asbestos.
● Reduction in the “vaporisation” of plastics.
Manufacture
● Solvent-free cavity protection.
● Solvent-free protection of the vehicle for transportation from the production
plant to the customer.
● The use of solvent-free adhesives.
● No CFCs used in the production process.
● Without use of mercury.
● Use of water-soluble paints.
Trade-in and recycling of old cars
ŠKODA meets the requirements of the brand and its products regarding environment and resource protection. All new ŠKODA vehicles can be utilized up to 95 %
and always 1) be returned. In a lot of countries sufficient trade-in networks have £



Driving and the Environment
been created, where you can trade-in your vehicle. After you trade-in your vehicle,
you will receive a confirmation stating the recycling in accordance with environmental regulations.

The adaptation of the headlights with Xenon lights (applies only to vehicles which
are designed for driving on the left and on the right) is performed in the menu
Settings Lights & Vision Travel mode in the main menu of the Information display
⇒ page 17.

Vehicles with special built-on types
Technical documents regarding changes carried out on the vehicle must be kept
by the vehicle user, in order to hand over later to the old car user. This ensures the
recycling in accordance with environmental regulations.



Avoiding damage to your vehicle

Notice
Detailed information about the trade-in and recycling of old cars is available from
a ŠKODA Service Partner.

167



When driving on poor roads and lanes or when driving over kerbstones, steep
ramps etc., you must pay particular attention to ensuring that any low-slung parts
of the vehicle, such as spoiler and exhaust, do not touch the ground and get damaged.
This particularly applies to models with a lowered suspension (sport suspension)
and also when your vehicle is fully laden.

Motoring abroad



Driving through bodies of water on roads

General
Other circumstances may exist abroad.
It is also possible, in certain countries, that the ŠKODA Service Partner network is
limited or has not been established yet. This is the reason why obtaining certain
spare parts may be somewhat complicated and specialist garage personnel may
only be able to make limited repairs. ŠKODA in the Czech Republic and its foreign
importers are happy to provide information about technical aspects of the vehicle,
required maintenance work and possibilities for getting repairs done.



Unleaded petrol

Fig. 145 Crossing bodies of water

A vehicle fitted with a petrol engine must always be refuelled with unleaded petrol ⇒ page 162. The automobile associations can provide you with information regarding the locations of filling stations which offer unleaded petrol.

Headlight
The low beam of your headlights is set asymmetrically. It illuminates the side of
the road on which you are driving to a greater extent. If you drive abroad on the
other side of the road, you will dazzle oncoming traffic.
In order to prevent the dazzling of oncoming traffic, it is necessary that an adjustment of the headlights is carried out by a specialist garage.
Using the system

Safety

Driving Tips

In order to avoid damage to the vehicle when driving through bodies of water (e.g.
flooded roads), observe the following:


● Determine the depth of the water when driving through bodies of water. The
water can reach at the maximum the web on the lower sill of the vehicle
⇒ fig. 145 .
● Drive no more than at walking speed. At a higher speed, a water wave can
form in front of the vehicle which can cause water to penetrate into the air induction system of the engine or into other parts of the vehicle.
● Never let the vehicle stand in the water, never drive backwards and do not
£
switch off the engine.

General Maintenance

Breakdown assistance

Technical data

168

Driving and the Environment

WARNING
● Driving through water, mud, sludge etc. can reduce the braking power and
extend the braking distance - risk of accident!
● Avoid sudden and severe braking manoeuvres immediately after driving
through bodies of water.
● After driving through bodies of water, the brakes must be cleaned and
dried as soon as possible by intermittent braking. Only apply the brakes for
the purpose of drying and cleaning the brake discs if the traffic conditions permit this. Do not place any other road users in jeopardy.

CAUTION
● When driving through bodies of water, parts of the vehicle such as the engine,
gearbox, catalytic converter, chassis or electrics can be severely damaged.
● Oncoming vehicles can generate water waves which can exceed the permissible water level for your vehicle.
● Potholes, mud or rocks can be hidden under the water making it difficult or impossible to drive through the body of water.
● Do not drive through salt water. The salt can lead to corrosion. Immediately
rinse all the parts of the vehicle, which came into contact with the salt water, with
fresh water.

Notice
After driving through a body of water, we recommend that the vehicle is checked
by a specialist garage.



Towing a trailer

169

Towing a trailer
Technical requirements

height above sea level. The towed weight is the weight of the (laden) vehicle and
the (laden) trailer together. One should take this into account before driving up to
higher altitudes.

Your vehicle is designed primarily for transporting persons and luggage. It can,
however, also be used for towing a trailer - provided certain technical equipment
is fitted.

The trailer and drawbar load information on the type plate of the towing device
are merely test data for the towing device The data relating to your vehicle,
which is often less than this test data, can be found in your vehicle registration
documents.

If your vehicle has been factory-fitted with a towing device or has a towing device
from ŠKODA Original Accessories, then the towing device satisfies all technical
and legal requirements.

Distribution of the load
Distribute the load in the trailer in such a way that any heavy items are located as
close as possible to the axle. Secure the items to prevent them slipping.

Your vehicle is fitted with a 13-pin power socket for the electrical connection between the vehicle and trailer. If the trailer which you wish to tow has a 7-pin connector, you can use a suitable adapter from ŠKODA Original Accessories.

Tyre pressure
Correct the tyre inflation pressure on your vehicle for that of “fully laden”
⇒ page 193. The inflation pressure of the tyres fitted to the trailer adjust in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendation.

This work must be carried out in accordance with the manufacturer's specifications if a towing device is retrofitted.
Authorised ŠKODA Service Partners can provide detailed information about retrofitting a towing device and for any necessary modifications to the cooling system.

Exterior mirrors
You have to have additional exterior mirrors fitted if you are not able to see the
traffic behind the trailer with the standard rear-view mirrors. Both exterior mirrors
should be attached to folding arms. Adjust the mirrors so that they provide you
with an adequate field of view to the rear.

WARNING
We recommend that you have the towing device from ŠKODA Original Accessories installed by an authorised ŠKODA Service Partner. He is familiar with all
the relevant details relating to retrofitting such equipment. There is a risk of
an accident if the towing device is not properly fitted!

General Maintenance
Trailer load
The permissible trailer load must on no account be exceeded.
You can negotiate appropriately steeper inclines and descents if you do not make
full use of the permissible trailer load.
The trailer loads specified only apply for altitudes up to 1.000 metres above mean
sea level. The fact that the engine power output drops with increasing height due
to a lowering of air pressure and thus the ability to climb, means that the towed
weight must be reduced by 10% for every further increase of 1 000 metres in

Using the system

Safety

Driving Tips



Headlights
Before starting off with a hitched trailer, also check the setting of the headlights.
Alter the setting as necessary with the aid of the headlight beam adjuster
⇒ page 50.
Detachable ball head
The ball head is detachable on vehicles with towing device and can be obtained
from ŠKODA Original Accessories. It is stowed together with separate fitting instructions in the spare wheel well in the luggage compartment of the vehicle.

Notice
● We recommend that you also have your vehicle inspected between service intervals if you tow a trailer frequently.
● The handbrake on the towing vehicle must be put on when coupling and decoupling the trailer.

General Maintenance

Breakdown assistance

Technical data



170

Towing a trailer

Driving Tips

Please refer to the following guidelines ⇒ page 25, Coolant temperature/ Coolant
quantity .



Do not, as far as possible, drive with your vehicle unladen and the trailer laden.

The coolant temperature can be reduced by switching on the heating.



Do not make full use of the legal maximum speeds. This applies in particular to
downhill sections.



Apply the brakes in good time.



Keep a check on the coolant temperature gauge if the outside temperature is
high.

Any increase in the cooling effect of the coolant fan through shifting down a gear
and increasing the engine speed is not possible since the fan speed is independent of the engine speed. One should also not drop a gear for this reason when
towing a trailer as long as the engine can manage the slope without any drop in
speed.

Distribution of weight
The distribution of the weight is very poor if your vehicle is unladen and the trailer
is laden. Maintain a particularly low speed if you cannot avoid driving with this
combination.
Driving speed
Do not drive faster than 80 km/hour for safety reasons. This also applies for countries in which higher speeds are allowed.
The fact that the driving stability of the vehicle + trailer combination reduces with
increasing speed means that the legally allowed speed should not be used when
there are unfavourable road, weather or wind conditions, particularly near accident black spots.
You must always reduce your speed immediately as soon as you detect even just
the slightest swaying of the trailer. On no account attempt to stop the trailer
from “swaying” by accelerating.
Apply the brakes in good time! If the trailer is fitted with a trailer brake, apply the
brakes gently at first and then brake firmly. This will avoid brake jolts resulting
from the trailer wheels locking. Shift down gears in good time before negotiating
a downhill section to allow the engine to also act as a brake.
Engine overheating
Please keep a check on the coolant temperature gauge if you have to negotiate a
lengthy slope in a low gear at a high engine speed when the outside temperature
is very high ⇒ page 11, Coolant temperature gauge.
If the needle of the coolant temperature gauge moves into the right-hand area or
even the red area of the scale, reduce your speed immediately. Stop and switch
off the engine if the warning light  in the instrument cluster begins flashing.
Wait a few minutes and check the level of coolant in the coolant expansion bottle
⇒ page 186, Inspecting the coolant level.



Taking care of your vehicle and cleaning the vehicle

171

General Maintenance
Taking care of your vehicle and cleaning the vehicle
General

How often you should wash your vehicle depends on a wide range of factors, such
as:

Proper care retains the commercial value of your vehicle.







Regular and proper care retains the value of your vehicle. It may also be one of
the requirements for the acceptance of warranty claims relating to corrosion damage and paint defects on the bodywork.
We recommend you use care products from ŠKODA Original Accessories which are
available from authorised ŠKODA Service Partners. Please follow the instructions
for use on the package.

The longer insect residues, bird droppings, tree sap, road and industrial dust, tar,
soot particles, road salt and other aggressive deposits remain adhering to the
paintwork of your vehicle, the more detrimental their destructive effect can be.
High temperatures, such as those caused by intensive sun's rays, accentuate this
caustic effect.

WARNING
● Care products may be harmful to your health if not used according to the
instructions.

It may therefore be necessary, in certain circumstances, to wash the car once a
week. It may also be sufficient, however, to wash the car once a month followed
by appropriate wax treatment.

● Always store care products in a safe place, out of the reach of children risk of poisoning!

It is essential to also thoroughly wash the underside of your vehicle at the end of
the winter road salting and gritting period.

For the sake of the environment
● Always select environmentally-friendly products when purchasing vehicle care
products.
● Do not dispose of the packages with residues of care products in domestic
waste.

Washing the vehicle
Frequent washing protects your vehicle.
The best protection for your vehicle against harmful environmental influences is
frequent washing and wax treatment.

Safety

WARNING


When washing your vehicle in the winter: Water and ice in the brake system
can affect the braking efficiency - risk of accident!



Automatic vehicle wash systems

Care of the exterior of vehicle

Using the system

Frequency of use,
The parking situation (garage, below trees etc.),
Season of the year,
Weather conditions,
Environmental influences.

Driving Tips

The paintwork of the vehicle is sufficiently resistant that the vehicle can be washed normally in automatic vehicle wash plants without any problem. The actual
stress to which the paintwork is subjected, however, depends greatly on the design of the vehicle wash system, the filtering of the water and the type of washing and care products used. If the paintwork of your vehicle appears mat after being washed or even has scratches, point this out to the operator of the vehicle
£
wash plant. Use a different vehicle wash plant, if necessary.

General Maintenance

Breakdown assistance

Technical data

172

Taking care of your vehicle and cleaning the vehicle

There are no particular points to note before washing your vehicle in an automatic
vehicle wash system other than the usual precautionary measures (closing the
windows including the sliding/tilting roof, removing the external antenna, etc.).

For the sake of the environment
Only wash your vehicle at washing bays specifically reserved for this purpose. This
ensures that no water which may be contaminated by oil flows into the sewage
system. It is not even permitted to wash your vehicle in certain areas except at
such specific washing bays.

If you have any particular attached parts fitted to your car - such as spoiler, roof
rack system, two-way radio aerial - it is best to first of all consult the operator of
the car wash plant.
It is important to degrease the lips of the windscreen wiper rubbers after passing
through the automatic vehicle wash system.

Washing vehicle by hand
It is important to first soften the dirt with plenty of water and rinse it off as thoroughly as possible before washing your vehicle by hand.
One should then clean the vehicle using a soft washing sponge, washing glove or
a washing brush and only slight pressure. Work from the top to the bottom - beginning with the roof. Only place slight pressure on the vehicle paintwork during
cleaning Only use a car shampoo for stubborn dirt.
Wash out the sponge or washing glove thoroughly at short intervals.
Clean wheels, door sills and similar parts last. Use a second sponge for such areas.
Rinse off the vehicle well after giving it a wash and dry it off using a chamois
leather.

WARNING
● The ignition should always be switched off when you wash your vehicle risk of accident!
● Protect your hands and arms from sharp-edged metal parts when you are
cleaning the underfloor, the inside of the wheel housings or the wheel trims risk of cuts.

CAUTION


Do not wash your vehicle in bright sunlight - risk of paint damage.

● Ensure that the jet of water is not aimed directly at the locking cylinders or at
the door and panel joints if you spray your vehicle in winter down with a hose risk of freezing.
● Do not use any insect sponges, rough kitchen sponges or similar cleaning
products - risk of damage to the surface of paintwork.



Washing with a high-pressure cleaner


When you wash your vehicle with a high-pressure cleaner, it is essential to comply
with the instructions for use of the cleaning equipment. This applies in particular
to the pressure used and to the spraying distance. Maintain a sufficiently large
distance to soft materials such as rubber hoses or insulation material.
On no account use circular spray nozzles or so-called dirt cutters!

WARNING
It is particularly important that you do not clean tyres with circular spray jets.
Visible but also invisible damage to tyres may occur even at a relatively large
spraying distance and if sprayed only for a short time - risk of accident!

CAUTION
The water containing wax must be no hotter than 60 °C, otherwise the vehicle
can be damaged.



Wax treatment
Good wax treatment is an effective way of protecting the paintwork from harmful
environmental influences and minor mechanical damage.
The vehicle must be treated with a high-quality hard wax polish at the latest,
when no more drops form on the clean paintwork.
A new layer of a high-quality hard wax polish can be applied to the clean bodywork after it has dried thoroughly. Even if you use a wax preserver regularly we
still recommend that you treat the paintwork of the vehicle at least twice a year
with hard wax.

CAUTION
Never apply wax to the windows.



Taking care of your vehicle and cleaning the vehicle

Polishing

Plastic parts

Polishing is only necessary if the paintwork of your vehicle has become unattractive and if it is no longer possible to achieve a gloss with wax preservers.

External plastic parts are cleaned by normal washing. Plastic parts and synthetic
leather can also be treated with special solvent-free plastic cleaning agents if a
damp cloth is not sufficient. Paint care products are not suitable for plastic parts.

You must treat the paintwork with a wax preserver if the polish you use does not
contain any preserving elements ⇒ page 172.

CAUTION

We recommend using a preservative from ŠKODA Original Accessories.

Solvent-free cleaners attack the material and can damage it.

CAUTION



Chrome parts

Only use a plastic ice scraper for removing snow and ice from the windows and
mirrors. You should not move the ice scraper forward and backward but in one direction on the window which you are cleaning in order to avoid any damage to the
surface of the glass.
You can best remove residues of rubber, oil, grease, wax or silicone by using a
special window cleaner or a special silicone remover.

First clean the chrome parts with a damp clotch and then polish them with a soft,
dry cloth. If this method does not completely clean chrome parts, use a specific
chrome care product.

You should also clean the windows regularly from the inside.
Do not use window leathers which you have used to polish the vehicle body to dry
off the windows. Residues of preservatives in the window leather can dirty the
window and reduce visibility.

CAUTION
Do not polish the chrome parts in a dusty environment, otherwise they can be
scratched.



Windows

● You must not treat mat painted parts or plastic with polishing products or hard
wax.
● Do not polish the paintwork of the vehicle in a dusty environment, otherwise
the paintwork can be scratched.

173



Do not affix any stickers over the inside of the rear window to avoid damage to
the heating elements of the rear window heater.

CAUTION

Paint damage

● Never remove snow or ice from the glass parts with warm or hot water - risk of
formation of cracks in the glass!

Slight damage to paintwork such as scratches, scuffs or traces of chip damage
must be touched up immediately with paint (Škoda painting pen) before any corrosion can result. You can of course have this work carried out by authorised
ŠKODA Service Partners.

● When removing snow or ice from the windows and mirror lenses make sure
not to damage the paintwork of the vehicle.



The authorised ŠKODA Service Partners have a range of matching touch-up pens
or spray cans available in the colour of your vehicle.

The headlight lenses

The paint number of the original paintwork of your vehicle is indicated on the vehicle data sticker ⇒ page 223.

Please do not use any aggressive cleaning or chemical solvent products for cleaning the front headlights - risk of damage to the plastic lenses. Please use soap
£
and clean warm water.

Any corrosion which has already have formed must be removed thoroughly. Apply
a corrosion protection primer and then the paint to the affected point. You can of
course have this work carried out by authorised ŠKODA Service Partners.

Using the system

Safety

Driving Tips



General Maintenance

Breakdown assistance

Technical data

174

Taking care of your vehicle and cleaning the vehicle
to apply a hard wax layer onto the wheel hubs every three months. You must not
use any products which cause abrasion when treating the wheel hubs. Any damage to the paint layer on the wheel hubs must be touched up immediately.

CAUTION
Never wipe the headlights dry and do not use any sharp objects for cleaning the
plastic lenses, this may result in damage to the protective paintwork and consequently in formation of cracks on the headlight lenses, e.g. through effect of
chemical products.



WARNING
One should remember when cleaning the wheels that moisture, ice and road
salt may adversely affect braking efficiency - risk of an accident!

Door and window seals

Notice

The rubber seals on the doors, boot lid, bonnet, roof window and windows remain
supple and last longer if you treat them from time to time with a rubber care product (e.g. with a spray with silicone-free oil). You also avoid premature wear of the
seals and prevent leakages in this way. It is also easier to open the doors. Rubber

seals which are well cared for also do not stick together in cold winter weather.

Severe layers of dirt on the wheels can also result in wheel imbalance. This may
show itself in the form of a wheel vibration which is transmitted to the steering
wheel which, in certain circumstances, can cause premature wear of the steering.
This means it is necessary to remove the dirt.

Locking cylinder

Underbody protection

Use specific products for de-icing locking cylinders.

The underside of your vehicle is protected for life against chemical and mechanical
influences.

Notice
When washing your vehicle, ensure that as little water as possible gets into the
locking cylinders.

Wheels
Steel wheels
You should also thoroughly wash the wheels and wheel trims when giving your
vehicle its regular wash. This prevents any brake dust, dirt and road salt from
sticking to the wheel hubs. You can remove stubborn brake abrasion adhering to
the wheels with an industrial cleaner. Touch up any damage to the paintwork on
the wheels before rust is able to form.
Light alloy wheels
Regular care of light alloy wheels is necessary in order to retain their decorative
appearance over long periods. It is particularly important to remove regularly any
road salt and brake abrasion from light alloy wheels, otherwise the light metal will
suffer. Wash thoroughly and then treat the wheels with a protective product for
light alloy wheels which does not contain any acidic components. We recommend





One cannot, however, completely rule out damage to the protective layer when
driving so we recommend that you inspect the protective layer on the underside
of your vehicle and on the chassis at certain intervals - this is best done at the beginning and end of the winter - and to touch up any damaged areas.
The authorised ŠKODA Service Partners have suitable spray products available as
well as the necessary equipment and are familiar with the instructions for use.
Therefore, we recommend you have such touch-up work or additional corrosion
protection measures carried out by an authorised ŠKODA Service Partner.

WARNING
Never use additional underbody protection or corrosion-protection agents for
the exhaust pipes, catalytic converters, diesel particle filter or heat shields.
When the engine reaches its operating temperature, these substances might
ignite - risk of fire!



Protection of hollow spaces
All the cavities of your vehicle which are at risk from corrosion are protected for
life by a layer of protective wax applied in the factory.

£

Taking care of your vehicle and cleaning the vehicle
Normal cleaning
– Clean soiled areas of the leather with slightly moistened cotton or woollen
cloth.

This wax protection does not require to be inspected or re-treated. Please remove
any small amount of wax which flows out of the cavities at high temperatures
with a plastic scraper and clean the spot using petroleum cleaner.

WARNING
Safety and environmental protection regulations should observed when using
petroleum cleaner to remove wax - a risk of fire!



Care of the interior of vehicle

You can clean plastic parts and artificial leather with a moist cloth. You should only treat such parts with special solvent-free plastic cleaning and care products it
does prove to be adequate.
Upholstery cloth and cloth trim on the doors, luggage compartment cover, headliner etc. are best treated with special cleaning products, using if necessary a dry
foam and a soft sponge or brush.

CAUTION



Ensure that the leather is not soaked through at any point and that no water
gets into the stitching of the seams.



Dry off the leather with a soft, dry cloth.



Remove fresh stains on a fat base (e.g. butter, mayonnaise, chocolate etc.)
with an absorbent cloth or household cleaning paper or with the cleaner from
the care set if the stain has not yet penetrated into the surface.



Use a grease dissolver for grease stains which have dried in.



Eliminate special stains (e.g. ball-point pens, felt pen, nail varnish, dispersion
paint, shoe cream etc.) with a special stain remover suitable for leather.



Leather care
– Treat the leather every six months with a special leather care product.

Fabric covers of electrically heated seats
Do not clean the seat covers moist as this may result in damage to the seat heating system.
Clean such covers using special agents, for example dry foam.





Apply only a small amount of the care product.



Dry the leather off with a soft cloth

CAUTION
● You must on no account treat the leather with solvents (e.g. gasoline, turpentine), floor wax, shoe cream or such like.

Natural leather
Natural leather requires quite particular care and attention.
Leather should be treated from time to time according the following guidelines
depending on how much it is used.

Using the system

Severe soiling
– Clean severely soiled areas with a cloth dipped in a mild soapy solution (2
spoonfuls of natural soap to 1 litre of water).

Removing stains
– Remove fresh stains which are water-based (e.g. coffee, tea, juices, blood etc.)
with an absorbent cloth or household paper or use the cleaner from the care
set for a stain which has already dried in.

Plastic parts, artificial leather and cloths

Solvent-free cleaners attack the material and can damage it.

175

Safety

Driving Tips

● Avoid leaving your vehicle for lengthy periods in bright sunlight in order to
avoid bleaching the leather. If you leave your vehicle parked in the open for
lengthy periods, protect the leather from the direct rays of the sun by covering it
over.

General Maintenance

Breakdown assistance

Technical data

£

176

Taking care of your vehicle and cleaning the vehicle

● Sharp-edged objects on items of clothing such as zip fasteners, rivets, sharpedged belts may leave permanent scratches or signs of rubbing on the surface.
● The use of a mechanical steering wheel lock may damage the leather surface
of the steering wheel.

Notice
● Use a care cream with light blocker and impregnation effect regularly and each
time after cleaning the leather. The cream nourishes the leather, allows it to
breathe and keeps it supple and also provides moisture. It also creates surface
protection.
● Clean the leather every 2 to 3 months, remove fresh soiling each time this occurs.
● Remove fresh stains such as those from ball-point pens, ink, lipstick, shoe
cream etc., as quickly as possible.
● Care also for the leather dye. Refreshen areas which have lost their colour
with a special coloured leather cream as required.
● The leather is a natural material with specific properties. During the use of the
vehicle, minor optical changes can occur on the leather parts of the covers (e. g
wrinkles or creases as a result of the stress of the covers).



Seat belts


Keep the seat belts clean!



Wash seat belts which have become soiled using a mild soapy solution.



Inspect the seat belts regularly to ensure they are in good condition.

Belt webbing which has become severely soiled may prevent the inertia reel from
reeling up the belt properly.

WARNING


The seat belts must not be removed for cleaning.

● Never clean the seat belts chemically as dry cleaning may destroy the fabric. The seat belts must also not be allowed to come into contact with corrosive liquids (such as acids etc.).
● Seat belts which have damage to the webbing, the connections, the inertia
reel or the lock should be replaced by a specialist garage.


Inertia reel belts must be completely dried before being reeled up.



Fuel

177

Fuel
Petrol

On vehicles with prescribed unleaded petrol min. 95 RON, the use of petrol with a
higher octane number than 95 RON does not result in a power increase or a lower
fuel consumption.

Unleaded petrol
Your vehicle can only be operated with unleaded petrol, which complies with the
standard EN 228 (In Germany: standard DIN 51626 - 1 or E10 for unleaded fuel with
octane rating 95 RON and 91 RON or DIN 51626 - 2 or E5 for unleaded fuel with
octane rating 95 RON and 98 RON). On the inside of the fuel filler flap, you will
find the information regarding the RON required by your engine ⇒ fig. 147 - right.
Prescribed fuel - unleaded petrol 95/91 RON
Use unleaded fuel with the octane rating 95 RON. You can also use unleaded petrol 91 RON, but this leads to a slight loss in performance.
If, in case of necessity, the vehicle must be refuelled with petrol of a lower octane
number than the one prescribed, you must continue driving at medium engine
speeds and low engine load. Driving at high engine revs or a high engine load can
severely damage the engine! Refuel as soon as possible with petrol of the prescribed octane number.
Prescribed fuel - unleaded petrol min. 95 RON
Use unleaded fuel with the octane rating 95 RON.
In case of necessity, you can refuel with petrol with the octane rating 91 RON if
petrol with the octane rating 95 RON is not available. You must continue driving at
medium engine speeds and minimum engine load. Driving at high engine revs or a
high engine load can severely damage the engine! Refuel as soon as possible with
petrol of the prescribed octane number.
Even in case of necessity, you must not use petrol of a lower octane number than
91 RON, otherwise the engine can be severely damaged!
You can find further information on refuelling ⇒ page 179, Refuelling.
Unleaded petrol with higher octane number
You can make unlimited use of unleaded petrol which has a higher octane number
than the one prescribed.
On vehicles with prescribed unleaded petrol 95/91 RON, the use of petrol with a
higher octane number than 95 RON does not result in a noticeable power increase
or a lower fuel consumption.

Using the system

Safety

Driving Tips

Prescribed fuel - unleaded petrol 98/95 RON
Use unleaded fuel with the octane rating 98 RON. You can also use unleaded petrol 95 RON, but this leads to a slight loss in performance.
In case of necessity, you can refuel with petrol with the octane rating91 RON of
unleaded fuel with octane rating 98 RON or 95 RON is not available. You must
continue driving at medium engine speeds and minimum engine load. Driving at
high engine revs or a high engine load can severely damage the engine! Refuel as
soon as possible with petrol of the prescribed octane number.
Even in case of necessity, you must not use petrol of a lower octane number than
91 RON, otherwise the engine can be severely damaged!
Fuel additives
Your vehicle can only be operated with unleaded petrol, which complies with the
standard EN 228 (in Germany: standard DIN 51626 - 1 or E10 for unleaded fuel with
octane rating 95 RON and 91 RON or DIN 51626 - 2 or E5 for unleaded fuel with
octane rating 95 RON and 98 RON). These meet all requirements for troublefree
engine operation. Therefore, we do not recommend the use of fuel additives.

CAUTION
● All ŠKODA vehicles with petrol engines are equipped with a catalytic converter
and must be driven only with unleaded petrol. Filling the tank even only once with
leaded petrol will result in the catalytic converter being destroyed!
● If you use petrol with a lower octane number than the one prescribed, the engine can be severely damaged!
● The use of improper fuel additives can cause serious damage to the engine or
the catalytic converter. In no case may fuel additives with metal components be
used, especially not with manganese and iron content.
● Fuels with metallic content may not be used. Risk of engine or catalytic converter damage!
● LRP (lead replacement petrol) fuels with metallic components may not be
used. Risk of engine or catalytic converter damage!

General Maintenance

Breakdown assistance

Technical data



178

Fuel

Biofuel Ethanol E85
Ethanol E85
Only valid for vehicles with 1.6/75°kW MultiFuel engine.
Biofuel Ethanol E85 consists of 85 % bioethanol and 15 % unleaded petrol complying with the standard (DIN) EN°228.
Biofuel Ethanol E85 in accordance with the standard (DIN) EN 228 can be mixed in
any desired ratio with unleaded petrol.
Drive the vehicle for at least 5 minutes without interruption, if biofuel Ethanol E85
has been refuelled, so that the engine control unit can determine the share of the
biofuel in the fuel. During this period do not drive at top speed of your vehicle or
high engine speeds and not at full throttle. During this process decrease the idling
speed.

Notice
● When operating with Ethanol E85, the fuel consumption increases by approx
33 %, as a lower quantity of energy is contained in the bioethanol than in unleaded petrol.
● Biofuel Ethanol E85 contains only a low quantity of additives in contrast to unleaded petrol. Therefore we recommend to fill up the tank with unleaded petrol
complying with EN 228 every 15 000 km (e.g. before the oil change) and run it
empty, so that the engine remains clean. Make sure not to use the whole content
of the tank ⇒ page 179, Refuelling.


The interval of 15 000 km applies for the oil change.



Operation in winter

WARNING
Pay attention to any legal requirements if you do carry a spare canister in the
vehicle. We do not recommend carrying any fuel canisters in your vehicle for
safety reasons. The canister can be damaged in the event of an accident and
fuel may leak out.
Fig. 146 MultiFuel - power socket

CAUTION
● Even inadvertently filling the fuel tank with another biofuel such as Ethanol
°E85 can result in damage to the fuel system.
● If you park your vehicle for a lengthy period, fill with petrol complying with
(DIN) EN°228, because Ethanol E85 can contain low quantities of impurities, which
can lead to corrosion.

For the sake of the environment
If you use Ethanol E85, the CO2 emission of your vehicle is lowered up to 5 %.

If you use biofuel Ethanol E85 at very low temperatures, it is necessary to preheat
the engine before an engine start.
The power socket for the engine preheating is located in the front bumper next to
the fog light ⇒ fig. 146 .
The outside temperature

Duration of engine preheating

lower than -10 °C

We recommend up to 1 hour

lower than -15 °C

at least 1 hours.

lower than -25 °C

at least 2 hours.

If an engine preheating is not possible at outside temperatures lower than -10 °C,
the share of unleaded petrol complying with EN 228 must be as high as possible.
Thus the cold start property of the engine is clearly improved.
If there is biofuel Ethanol E85 in the tank and the engine is not preheated, it can
lead at temperatures below -15 °C to very poor or no starting of the engine.

£

Fuel

179

Operation in winter

For the sake of the environment
The use of engine preheating at temperatures below -10 °C has a positive effect
on the fuel consumption and thus on the environment.

Notice
An extension cable used for connecting to the electrical network is located in the
luggage compartment.



Winter-grade diesel fuel
A different grade of diesel fuel is available at filling stations in winter than during
the summer. Using “summer-grade diesel fuel” at temperatures below 0°C can result in operational problems because the diesel becomes viscous as a result of
paraffin separation.
It is therefore the case that the standard EN 590 (standard DIN 51628 in Germany,
standard ÖNORM C 1590 in Austria, GOST R 52368-2005/EN 590:2004 in Russia)
is the diesel fuel class prescribed for certain periods of the year which can also be
purchased at the corresponding time during the year. “Winter-grade diesel fuel”
will still operate properly even at a temperature of -20°C.

Diesel
Diesel fuel
Your vehicle can only be operated with diesel fuel, which complies with the standard EN 590 (standard DIN 51628 in Germany, standard ÖNORM C 1590 in Austria,
GOST R 52368-2005/EN 590:2004 in Russia).

It is often the case in countries with different climatic conditions that diesel fuels
available have a different temperature characteristic. The authorised ŠKODA Service Partners and filling stations in the country concerned will be able to provide
you with information regarding the diesel fuels available.

Fuel additives
You must not use fuel additives, so-called “flow improvers” (petrol and similar
products) in diesel fuel.

Prewarming fuel
The vehicle is fitted with a fuel filter prewarming system. This secures operation
of a vehicle using diesel fuel down to an environmental temperature of -25°C.

You can find information on refuelling ⇒ page 179, Refuelling.

CAUTION
It is not permitted to add the various fuel additives on the market, including petrol, to diesel fuel in order to improve its flow properties.

CAUTION
● Your vehicle can only be operated with diesel fuel, which complies with the
standard EN 590 (standard DIN 51628 in Germany, standard ÖNORM C 1590 in
Austria, GOST R 52368-2005/EN 590:2004 in Russia). Filling the tank even only
once with diesel fuel which does not comply with the standard, can result in damage to the engine parts, the lubrication system, the fuel and exhaust system.



Refuelling

● If by mistake you have refuelled with a different fuel other than the diesel fuel
which complies to the above mentioned standards (e. g. petrol), do not start the
engine or switch on the ignition! Severe damage damage is possible! Contact a
specialist garage and have the fuel system of the engine cleaned.


Water which has collected in the fuel filter can result in engine problems.

● Your vehicle is not adapted for use of biofuel (RME), therefore this fuel must
not be refuelled and driven. The use of biofuel (RME) can lead to damage to the
engine or the fuel system.



Fig. 147 Right rear side of the vehicle: Open fuel filler flap/fuel filler flap with cap unscrewed £

Using the system

Safety

Driving Tips

General Maintenance

Breakdown assistance

Technical data

180

Fuel

The filler flap is automatically unlocked or locked with the central locking.
Opening the fuel filler cap
– Press in the middle of the left area of the fuel filler flap in direction of arrow 1
⇒ fig. 147 .


Hold the fuel filler cap on the fuel filler tube with one hand and unlock it by
turning the vehicle key to the left (only valid for vehicles which do not have
automatic unlocking of the fuel filler flap).



Unscrew the fuel filler cap anti-clockwise and place the fuel filler cap from
above on the fuel filler flap ⇒ fig. 147 - right.

Closing fuel filler cap
– Screw on the cap by turning it to the right until it is heard to lock.


Hold the fuel filler cap on the fuel filler tube with one hand and lock it by turning the vehicle key to the right (only valid for vehicles which do not have automatic locking of the fuel filler flap).



Close the fuel filler flap until it locks.

The correct grade of fuel for your vehicle as well as the tyre size and inflation
pressures are stated on a sticker affixed to the inside of the fuel filler flap. Further
information on fuel ⇒ page 177.
The fuel tank has a capacity of about 55 litres or 60 litres 1).

WARNING
Pay attention to any legal requirements if you do carry a spare canister in the
vehicle. We do not recommend carrying any fuel canisters in your vehicle for
safety reasons. The canister can be damaged in the event of an accident and
fuel may leak out.

CAUTION
● Before refuelling it is necessary to switch off the auxiliary heating system
(auxiliary heating and ventilation).
● Remove any fuel which has spilled onto the paintwork of your vehicle immediately - risk of paint damage!

1)

Valid for Laura Combi 4x4 and Laura Scout.

● On vehicles fitted with a catalytic converter, never let the fuel tank run completely empty. An irregular supply of fuel to the engine can result in misfiring and
unburnt fuel may get into the exhaust system, which may result in overheating
and damage to the catalytic converter.
● The fuel tank is full just as soon as the pump nozzle switches off for the first
time, provided the nozzle has been operated properly. Do not continue refuelling 
otherwise the expansion volume is filled up.

Inspecting and Replenishing

181

Inspecting and Replenishing
Engine compartment
Bonnet remote release



Ensure that the arms of the windscreen wipers are correctly in place against
the windscreen before opening the bonnet otherwise damage could occur to
the paintwork.



Pulling on the locking lever in direction of arrow 1 ⇒ fig. 149 will unlock the
bonnet.



Grip with the hand under the radiator grille and lift up the bonnet.



Take the bonnet support out of its holder and set it in the opening 2 designed for it.

Closing the bonnet
– Lift the bonnet slightly and unhook the bonnet support. Press the bonnet support into the holder designed to hold it.
Fig. 148 Bonnet release lever

Bonnet remote release
– Pull the unlocking lever below the dash panel on the driver's side ⇒ fig. 148 .
The bonnet jumps out of its lock as a result of the spring force. A locking lever appears at the same time in the radiator grille.

Opening and closing the bonnet.



Allow the bonnet to drop from a height of about 20 cm into the lock - bonnet
do not press down on it!



Check whether the bonnet is properly closed.

WARNING


● Never open the bonnet if you see that steam or coolant is flowing out of
the engine compartment - risk of scalding! Wait long enough until the steam
or coolant has stopped escaping.
● For safety reasons, the bonnet must always be properly closed when driving. One should therefore check that the lock has in fact engaged properly after closing the bonnet.
● Stop your vehicle immediately while driving if you notice that the lock is
not properly engaged and close the bonnet properly - risk of an accident!

CAUTION
Never open the bonnet using the locking lever - danger of causing damage.

Fig. 149 Radiator grille: Locking lever/securing the bonnet with the bonnet support

Opening the bonnet
– Unlock the bonnet ⇒ fig. 148 .
Using the system

Safety

Driving Tips

General Maintenance

Breakdown assistance

Technical data



182

Inspecting and Replenishing

Working in the engine compartment

WARNING (Continued)

Particular care is required when carrying out any work in the engine compartment!

● If you wish to work under the vehicle, you must secure the vehicle from
rolling away and support it with suitable supporting blocks: the car jack is not
sufficient for this - risk of injury!

There is a risk of injuries, scalding, accidents and fire when working in the engine compartment, e.g. inspecting and replenishing oil and other fluids. For this
reason, it is essential to comply with the warning instructions stated below and
with the general applicable rules of safety. The engine compartment of your car
is a hazardous area ⇒  .

● In cases where it be necessary to carry out inspection work when the engine is running there is an additional risk from rotating parts (e.g. the V-ribbed
belt, alternator, radiator fan) and from the high-voltage ignition system.
Please observe in addition the following:
– Never touch the electrical cables of the ignition system.
– Absolutely avoid any jewellery, loose items of clothing or long hair from
getting into the rotating parts of the engine - Hazard! Therefore remove
any jewellery beforehand, tie up your hair and wear tight fitting clothing.

WARNING
● Never open the bonnet if you see that steam or coolant is flowing out of
the engine compartment - risk of scalding! Wait long enough until the steam
or coolant has stopped escaping.


Switch off the engine and pull out the ignition key.



Apply the handbrake firmly.

● If your vehicle is fitted with a manual gearbox, move the gearshift lever into Neutral, or if it is fitted with automatic gearbox, move the selector lever into position P.


Allow the engine to cool down.



Keep children clear of the engine compartment.



Do not touch any hot engine parts - risk of burns!

● Never spill oil and other fluids over the hot engine. Such fluids (e.g. the antifreeze contained in the coolant) may ignite!


Avoid short circuits in the electrical system - particularly on the battery.

● Never place your hand into the radiator fan as long as the engine is still
warm. The fan might suddenly start running!
● Never open the cap of the coolant expansion reservoir so long as the engine is still warm. The cooling system is pressurized!
● Cover over the cap of the reservoir with a large cloth when opening it as
protection for your face, hands and arms from hot steam or hot coolant.
● Do not let objects, such as e.g cleaning cloth or tools lie in the engine compartment.

● Please also comply with the warning instructions stated below when carrying out any essential work on the fuel system or on the electrical system.
– Always separate the car battery from the electrical system.
– Do not smoke.
– Never carry out any work close to naked flames.
– Always keep a working fire extinguisher at hand.

CAUTION
When replenishing fluids in the engine, always ensure that the fluids are on no account mixed up. This may result in major operating problems and also vehicle

damage!

Inspecting and Replenishing

183

Engine oil

Overview of the engine compartment
The main inspection points.

Check engine oil level
The dipstick indicates the level of oil in the engine.

Fig. 151 Dipstick
Fig. 150 Petrol engine 1.8 ltr./118 kW TSI

1
2
3
4
5
6

Coolant expansion bottle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windshield washer fluid reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine oil filler opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine oil dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brake fluid reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Battery (below a cover) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

186
191
184
183
187
188

Notice
The location of the inspection points in the engine compartment of petrol and die
sel engines is practically identical.

Checking the oil level
– Ensure that the vehicle is positioned on a level surface and the engine has
reached its operating temperature.


Switch the engine off.



Open the bonnet ⇒ 



Wait a few minutes until the engine oil flows back into the oil sump. Take out
the dipstick.



Wipe off the dipstick with a clean cloth and insert it again fully.



Then withdraw the dipstick again and read off the oil level.

in Working in the engine compartment on page 182.

Oil level within range A
– You must not top up the oil.
Oil level within range B
– You may top up the oil. It is possible that the oil level may then be within
range A after doing this.
Oil level within range C
– You must top up the oil ⇒ page 184. It is sufficient, once this is done, to keep
the oil level within range B .

Using the system

Safety

Driving Tips

General Maintenance

Breakdown assistance

Technical data

£

184

Inspecting and Replenishing

It is normal for the engine to consume oil. The oil consumption may be as much as
0.5 l/1 000 km depending on your style of driving and the conditions under which
you operate your vehicle. The oil consumption may be slightly higher than this
during the first 5 000 kilometres.

● Avoid dripping oil onto hot parts of the engine when topping up will oil - a
risk of fire!

One should therefore check the oil level at regular intervals, preferably every time
after the fuel tank is filled or after driving for long stretches.

● Read and observe the warning notes ⇒ page 182, Working in the engine
compartment before working in the engine compartment.

WARNING

We recommend maintaining the oil level within the range A - but not above this,
if the engine has been operating at high loads, for example during a lengthy motorway trip during the summer months, towing a trailer or negotiating a high
mountain pass.

For the sake of the environment
The oil level must on no account extend beyond the range A ⇒ page 183. Oil will
otherwise be drawn in through the crankcase ventilation and may pass through
the exhaust system to atmosphere. The oil may combust in the catalytic converter

and damage it.

The warning light in the instrument cluster will indicate whether the oil level is
too low ⇒ page 25, Engine oil pressure . In this case, check the oil level as soon
as possible. Top up with an appropriate quantity of oil.

Changing engine oil

CAUTION
● The oil level must on no account extend beyond the range A . Danger of damaging the catalytic converter.

The engine oil must be changed at the intervals stated in the Service schedule or
according to the service interval indicator ⇒ page 12, Service reminder indicator.

● Do not continue your journey if for some reason it is not possible under the
conditions prevailing to top up with oil. Switch the engine off and obtain professional assistance from a specialist garage, otherwise it could lead to severe engine damage.

● Only carry out the engine oil change, if you have the required professional
knowledge!

WARNING

Notice
Engine oil specifications ⇒ page 222, Technical data.

Replenishing engine oil


Inspecting the engine oil level ⇒ page 183.



Unscrew the cap of the engine oil filler opening.



Pour in a suitable grade of oil in portions of 0.5 litres ⇒ page 225, Engine oil
specifications.



Inspect the oil level ⇒ page 183.



Carefully screw on the cap of the filler opening and push the dipstick in fully.



● Read and observe the warning notes ⇒ page 182, Working in the engine
compartment before working in the engine compartment.
● First of all, let the engine cool down, wear an eye protection and gloves risk of caustic burns due to hot oil.

CAUTION
You must not pour any additives into the engine oil - risk of engine damage! Damage, which results from such product, are excluded from the warranty.

For the sake of the environment


You must on no account pour oil into the ground or into the sewage system.

● In view of the problems involved in properly disposing of old oil, the necessary
special tools and the knowledge required for such work, we recommend that you
have the oil and oil filter change carried out by an authorised ŠKODA Service Part£
ner.

Inspecting and Replenishing
Coolant capacity

Notice
After your skin has come in contact with the oil, you must thoroughly wash your
skin.

Petrol engines


Capacities (in liter)

1.2 ltr./77 kW TSI - EU5

7,7

1.4 ltr./59 kW - EU4

7,1

Cooling system

1.4 ltr./90 kW TSI - EU5

7,7

1.6 ltr./75 kW - EU4, EU2

7,4

Coolant

1.8 ltr./118 kW TSI - EU5, EU2 DDK
(1.8 ltr./112 kW TSI - EU5)

8,6

The job of the coolant is to cool the engine.

2.0 ltr./147 kW TSI - EU5

8,6

The cooling system does not require any maintenance under normal operating
conditions. The coolant consists of water with a concentration of coolant additive
of 40 %. This mixture not only provides antifreeze protection down to -25°C but
also protects the cooling and heating system from corrosion. It also prevents the
formation of scale and significantly increases the boiling point of the coolant.

Diesel engines

You must therefore not reduce the concentration of antifreeze agent in the coolant by adding water, also not during the summer months or in countries with a
warm climate. The concentration of coolant additive in the coolant must be at
least 40 %.
You can increase the amount of antifreeze in the coolant if a higher concentration
of antifreeze is necessary for climatic reasons but only up to 60% (antifreeze protection down to approx. -40°C). The antifreeze protection tails off above that concentration.
Vehicles exported to countries with a cold climate (e.g. Sweden, Norway, Finland)
are already factory-filled with a coolant which offers antifreeze protection down
to about -35°C. In these countries the concentration of coolant additive should be
at least 50 %.

Capacities (in liter)

1.6 ltr./77 kW TDI CR - EU5

8,4

1.9 ltr./77 kW TDI PD - EU4, EU3

8,4

1.9 ltr./77 kW TDI PD DPF - EU4

8,4

2.0 ltr./81 kW TDI CR - EU4, EU5

8,4

2.0 ltr./103 kW TDI CR DPF - EU4, EU5

8,4

2.0 ltr./125 kW TDI CR - EU5

8,4

CAUTION
● Other coolant additives may cause operational problems which, in particular,
involves significantly reducing the anticorrosion effect.
● Any faults or problems resulting from corrosion may cause a loss of coolant
and, as a consequence of this, result in major engine damage.

Notice
On vehicles which are fitted with an independent auxiliary heating and ventilation, the volume of the coolant is greater by approx. 1 ltr.

Coolant
The cooling system is factory-filled with coolant (purple in colour), which complies
with the specification TL-VW 774 G.
When refilling, we only recommend you use the same antifreeze described on the
antifreeze expansion tank.
Please contact an authorised ŠKODA Service Partner if you have any questions regarding the coolant or if you wish to fill up with a different coolant.
An authorised ŠKODA Service Partner can also supply you with the correct coolant
additives.

Using the system

185

Safety

Driving Tips

General Maintenance

Breakdown assistance

Technical data



186

Inspecting and Replenishing

Inspecting the coolant level

CAUTION
One should contact a specialist garage as soon as possible if the source of overheating itself cannot be determined and removed, since there may be grave damage to the engine.



Replenishing the coolant


Switch the engine off.



Allow the engine to cool down.

Fig. 152 Engine compartment: Coolant
expansion bottle



Place a cloth over the cap of the coolant expansion reservoir ⇒ fig. 152 and unscrew the cap carefully by turning it to the left ⇒  .

The coolant expansion bottle is located in the engine compartment on the right.



Top up the coolant.



Screw the cap tight until it is heard to lock.



Switch the engine off.



Open the bonnet ⇒ page 181.



Check the level of coolant in the coolant expansion bottle ⇒ fig. 152 . The coolant level when the engine is cold must lie between the b (MIN) and a (MAX)
markings. The level may also rise slightly above the a (MAX) marking when
the engine is warm.

If the coolant level in the reservoir is too low, this is indicated by the warning light
in the instrument cluster ⇒ page 25, Coolant temperature/ Coolant quantity . We
still recommend inspecting the coolant level directly at the reservoir from time to
time.
Loss of coolant
A loss of coolant is first and foremost an indication of a leak in the system. You
should not merely top up the coolant in the reservoir. It is also important to have
the cooling system inspected without delay by a specialist garage.
Losses can only occur through the pressure relief in the cap of the coolant expansion bottle which is completely free of leaks if the coolant boils as a result of overheating and is forced out of the cooling system.

WARNING
Read and observe the warning notes ⇒ page 182, Working in the engine compartment before working in the engine compartment.

The coolant which you use for replenishing the system, must comply with one
specific specification ⇒ page 185. Do not use an alternative additive if the specified coolant additive is not available in exceptional cases. Just top up the system
with water and as soon as possible arrange adjustment to correct the mixing ratio
of water and coolant additive again by a specialist garage.
Only use fresh coolant for topping up the system.
Do not fill the coolant above the mark a (max.) ⇒ fig. 152 ! Excess coolant heats
up and then is forced out of the cooling system through the pressure relief valve
in the cap.
Wait until the engine has cooled down for a system which has suffered a major
loss of coolant before pouring in coolant. This is necessary to avoid engine damage.

WARNING
● The cooling system is pressurized! Do not open the cap of the coolant expansion bottle if the engine is still hot - risk of scalding!
● The coolant additive and thus all of the coolant is harmful to your health.
Avoid contact with the coolant. Coolant vapours are also harmful to the
health. It is important, therefore, to always safely store any coolant additive in
£
its original container out of the reach of children - risk of poisoning!

Inspecting and Replenishing

187

Brake fluid

WARNING (Continued)

● If any splashes of coolant get into your eyes, rinse out your eyes immediately with clear water and contact a doctor as soon as possible.

Inspecting the brake fluid level

● You should also consult a doctor without delay if you have inadvertently
swallowed coolant.

CAUTION
Do not continue your journey if for some reason it is not possible under the conditions prevailing to top up with coolant. Switch the engine off and obtain professional assistance from a specialist garage, otherwise it could lead to severe engine damage.

For the sake of the environment
Do not re-use coolant if it is necessary to drain the coolant in the system. It should
be collected and disposed of in compliance with environmental protection regula
tions.

Radiator fan
The radiator fan may switch on suddenly.

Fig. 153 Engine compartment: Brake fluid reservoir

The brake fluid reservoir is located on the left of the engine compartment. The
brake fluid reservoir on right-hand steering models is positioned on the other side
of the engine compartment.


Switch the engine off.



Open the bonnet ⇒ page 181.

The radiator fan is driven by an electric motor and controlled according to the
coolant temperature.



Inspect the brake fluid level in the reservoir ⇒ fig. 153 . The level must be between the “MIN” and “MAX” markings.

The radiator fan may continue running for up to 10 minutes after the engine has
been switched off - even if the ignition is also off. It may also switch on suddenly
after a certain time, if

A slight drop in the fluid level results when driving due to normal wear-and-tear
and automatic adjustment of the brake pads, and is perfectly normal.




There may be an indication of a leak in the brake system, however, if the fluid level drops significantly within a short time or if it drops below the “MIN” marking. If
the brake fluid level is too low, this is indicated by the warning light lighting up in
the instrument cluster ⇒ page 28, Brake system . In this case stop immediately
and do not drive any further! Obtain professional assistance.

the coolant temperature has risen because of an accumulation of heat or
the warm engine compartment is heated up additionally by strong sunlight.

WARNING
You must therefore be aware when working in the engine compartment that
the fan may switch on suddenly - risk of injury!



WARNING
● Read and observe the warning notes ⇒ page 182, Working in the engine
compartment before working in the engine compartment.
● If the fluid level has dropped below the MIN marking, do not drive any further - risk of accident! Contact a Škoda dealer to obtain professional assistance.

Using the system

Safety

Driving Tips

General Maintenance

Breakdown assistance

Technical data



188

Inspecting and Replenishing

Replacing brake fluid

There is a risk of injuries, scalding, accidents and burns when carrying out any
work on the battery and on the electrical system. For this reason, it is essential to
comply with the warning instructions ⇒  stated below and with the general applicable rules of safety.

Brake fluid absorbs moisture. This causes the fluid to absorb moisture from the
surrounding air over a period of time. Excessive water in the brake fluid may be
the cause of corrosion in the brake system. The water content also lowers the
boiling point of the brake fluid.

WARNING

Only new genuine brake fluid from ŠKODA may be used.

● The battery acid is strongly corrosive and must, therefore, be handled with
the greatest of care. Always wear protective gloves, eye and skin protection
when handling batteries. Corrosive fumes in the air irritate the air passages
and lead to conjunctivitis and inflammation of the air passages in the lungs.
Battery acid corrodes dental enamel and creates deep wounds after contact
with the skin which take a long time to heal. Repeated contact with diluted
acids causes skin diseases (inflammations, ulcers, slin cracks). Acids coming into contact with water are diluted accompanied by significant development of
heat.

The brake fluid must comply with one of the following standards or specifications:




VW 50114
FMVSS 116 DOT4
DIN ISO 4925 CLASS 4

We recommend that you have the brake fluid replaced by an authorised ŠKODA
Service Partner as part of an Inspection Service.

● Do not tilt the battery otherwise battery electrolyte may flow out of the
battery vent openings. Protect the eyes with safety glasses or a shield! There
is the danger of suffering blindness! If any battery electrolyte gets into your
eye, rinse out your eye immediately with clear water for several minutes. Contact a doctor without delay.

WARNING
Using old brake fluid can result in severe stress on the brakes because of the
formation of vapour bubbles in the brake system. This greatly impairs the
braking efficiency and thus also the safety of your vehicle.

● Splashes of acid on your skin or clothes should be neutralised as soon as
possible using soap suds and then rinsed with plenty of water. If acid was
swallowed, seek immediate medical attention.

CAUTION
Brake fluid damages the paintwork of the vehicle.



For the sake of the environment
Due to issues with disposal, the special tools and knowledge required, we recommend you have the brake fluid replaced by an authorised ŠKODA Service Partner.

Battery
General information
Improper handling of the vehicle battery can cause damage. We therefore recommend you have work on the vehicle battery carried out by an authorised ŠKODA
service partner.



Keep batteries out of the reach of children.

● Hydrogen is released when you charge a battery and a highly explosive gas
mixture is produced. An explosion can be caused through sparkling over during unclamping or loosening of the cable plug while the ignition is on.
● Bridging of the poles will create a short circuit (e.g. through metal objects,
cables). Possible consequences of a short circuit: Melting of lead struts, explosion and burning of the battery, jets of acid spurting out.
● It is prohibited to work with a naked flame and light, to smoke or to carry
out any activities which produce sparks. Avoid creating sparks when working
with cables and electrical devices. Strong sparking represents a risk of injury.
● Before carrying out any work on the electrical system, switch off the engine, the ignition as well as all electrical components and disconnect the negative cable (-) on the battery. If you wish to replace a bulb it is sufficient to
switch off the appropriate light.

£

Inspecting and Replenishing

189

Battery cover

WARNING (Continued)

● Never charge a frozen or thawed battery - risk of explosion and caustic
burns! Replace a frozen battery.
● Never jump-start the batteries which have a too low electrolyte level - risk
of explosion and caustic burns!
● Never use a battery which is damaged - risk of explosion! Immediately replace a damaged battery.

CAUTION
● You must only disconnect the battery if the ignition is switched off, otherwise
the electrical system (electronic components) of the vehicle may be damaged.
When disconnecting the battery from the electrical system of the vehicle, first disconnect the negative terminal (-) of the battery. Then disconnect the positive terminal (+).

Fig. 154 Engine compartment: Polyester cover of the vehicle battery/plastic cover of the vehicle battery

The battery is located in the engine compartment in a polyester cover ⇒ fig. 154 left or in a polyester cover ⇒ fig. 154 - right.

● When reconnecting the battery, first connect the positive terminal (+) and only
then the negative terminal (-) of the battery. You must on no account connect the
cables wrongly - risk of a cable fire.



Open the battery cover in direction of arrow 1 ⇒ fig. 154 or press the interlock 2 on the side of the battery cover, fold the cover up and remove the battery.



The installation of the battery cover takes place in the reverse order.

● Ensure that battery acid does not come into contact with the vehicle body otherwise damage could occur to the paintwork.
● Do not place the battery in direct daylight in order to protect the battery housing from the effects of ultra-violet light.

The edge of the polyester battery cover ⇒ fig. 154 - left is inserted between the
battery and the side wall of the battery cover when working on the battery.

● If the vehicle has not been driven for more than 3 to 4 weeks, the battery will
discharge This is because certain electrical components consume electricity (e. g.
control units) also in idle state. You can prevent the discharging of the battery by
disconnecting the negative terminal or charging the battery constantly with a very
low charging current.



Battery control

For the sake of the environment
A removed battery is a special type of waste which is harmful to the environment
- contact your specialist garage regarding disposing of the battery.

Notice
● Please also refer to the guidelines ⇒ page 191, also after connecting the battery.


You should replace batteries older than 5 years.



Fig. 155 The battery: Electrolyte level
indicator

The battery is practically maintenance-free under normal operating conditions.

Using the system

Safety

Driving Tips

General Maintenance

Breakdown assistance

Technical data

£

190

Inspecting and Replenishing

Charging the battery

We recommend you have the electrolyte level checked by a specialist garage from
time to time, especially in the following cases.




A properly charged battery is essential for reliably starting the engine.

High outside temperatures.
Long daily drives
After each charge ⇒ page 190.

On vehicles with a vehicle battery fitted with a colour indicator, the so-called magic eye ⇒ fig. 155 , the electrolyte level can be determined by looking at the change
in colour.
Air bubbles can influence the colour of the indicator. For this reason carefully
knock on the indicator before carrying out the check.
● Black colour - electrolyte level is correct.
● Colourless or light yellow colour - electrolyte level too low, the battery must be
replaced.

Notice
● The battery electrolyte level is periodically checked by an authorised ŠKODA
Service Partner as part of the Inspection Service.
● For technical reasons, on vehicles with the description “AGM”, the electrolyte
level cannot be checked.
● Vehicles with a “START-STOP” system are fitted with a battery control unit for
checking the energy level for the recurring engine start.



Read the warning notes ⇒ 

Switch the ignition and all electrical components off.



Only for “quick-charging”: Disconnect both battery cables (first of all “negative”, then “positive”).



Carefully attach the terminal clamps of the charger to the battery terminals
(red = “positive”, black = “negative”).



You can now plug the mains cable of the charger into the power socket and
switch on the charger.



When charging is completed: switch the charger off and unplug the mains cable from the power socket.



Only then should you disconnect the terminal clamps of the charger.



Reconnect the cables to the battery (first of all “positive”, then “negative”).

in General information on page 188 and ⇒ 

.

It is not normally necessary to disconnect the cables of the battery if you recharge
the battery using low amperages (as for example from a mini-charger). Please also refer to the instructions from the charger manufacturer.
A charging current of 0.1 of the total battery capacity (or lower) is that which
should be used until full charging is achieved.

Operation in winter

It is, however, necessary to disconnect both cables before charging the battery
with high amperages, so-called “quick-charging”.

The battery has to provide greater amounts of electricity during the winter. It also
has only part of the initial power output at low temperatures that it has at normal
temperatures.

“Quick-charging” a battery is dangerous ⇒  in General information on page 188.
It requires a special charger and specialist knowledge. We recommend having the
quick charging of vehicle batteries undertaken by a specialist garage.

A discharged battery may already freeze at temperatures just below 0°C.
We therefore recommend that you have the battery checked by a specialist garage before the start of winter and recharged if necessary.

A discharged battery may already freeze at temperatures just below 0°C ⇒  . We
recommend that you no longer use a battery which has thawed out because the
casing of the battery may be cracked through the formation of ice and this would
allow battery electrolyte to flow out.

WARNING
Never charge a frozen or thawed battery - risk of explosion and caustic burns.
Replace a frozen battery.




The vent plugs of the battery should not be opened for charging.


£

Inspecting and Replenishing

191

CAUTION

WARNING

Vehicles with a “START-STOP” system are fitted with a special battery type which
allows the battery control unit to check the energy level for recurring engine start.
This battery must only be replaced by a battery of the same type.

● Never charge a frozen or thawed battery - risk of explosion and caustic
burns. Replace a frozen battery.
● Never charge a battery which has a too low electrolyte level - risk of explosion and caustic burns.

For the sake of the environment
Batteries contain poisonous substances such as sulphuric acid and lead. For this
reason, it must be disposed of properly. Under no circumstances must it be disposed of in the communal rubbish.

CAUTION
On vehicles with the “START/STOP” system, the pole terminal of the charger must
not be connected directly to the negative terminal of the vehicle battery, but only
to the engine earth ⇒ fig. 172 .



Disconnecting and reconnecting the battery

Operating measure

Electrical power window (operational faults)

⇒ page 42

Enter the car stereo/radio navigation system
code number

see operating instructions for the
car stereo/radio navigation system

Setting the clock

⇒ page 13

Data in the multi-functional indicator are deleted.

Notice
Despite such intervention by the vehicle electric system management, the vehicle
battery may be drained. For example, when the ignition is switched on a long time
with the engine turned off or the side or parking lights are turned on during longer parking.

⇒ page 14

We recommend having the vehicle checked by an authorised ŠKODA Service Partner to ensure full functionality of all electrical systems.

Automatic consumer shut-off
Under heavy load on the vehicle battery, the vehicle electrical system management automatically takes various measures to avoid draining the vehicle battery.
● The idling speed is raised to allow the generator to deliver more electricity to
the electrical system.
● If necessary, some electrical consumers are limited in their performance or are
temporarily switched off completely.

On disconnecting and reconnecting the battery the following functions are initially
deactivated or are no longer able to operate fault-free.
Operation







Windshield washer system

Replacing the battery
When replacing a battery, the new new battery must have the same capacity,
voltage (12 V), amperage and be the same size. Suitable types of vehicle battery
are available from an authorised ŠKODA Service Partner.
We recommend you have a battery change carried out by an authorised ŠKODA
Service Partner, who will properly install the new battery and dispose of the original one.

Using the system

Safety

Driving Tips

Fig. 156 Engine compartment: Windshield washer fluid reservoir

General Maintenance

Breakdown assistance

Technical data

£

192

Inspecting and Replenishing

The windshield washer reservoir contains the cleaning fluid for the windscreen or
rear window and for the headlamp cleaning system. The reservoir is located at the
front right of the engine compartment ⇒ fig. 156 .
The filling level of the container is about 3 litres and about 5.5 litres on vehicles
which have a headlight washing system.
Clear water is not sufficient to intensively clean the windscreen and headlights.
We therefore recommend using clean washing water together with the screen
cleaner from ŠKODA Original Accessories (in winter additionally with antifreeze)
which is capable of removing stubborn dirt. Follow the instructions for use on the
packaging when using screen cleaning products.
You should always add antifreeze to the cleaning water in winter even if your vehicle is fitted with heated windscreen washer nozzles.
It is also possible in exceptional cases to use methylated spirits when no screen
cleaner with antifreeze is available. The concentration of methylated spirits must
not be more than 15 %. Please note, however, that the antifreeze protection at
this concentration is only adequate down to -5°C.

WARNING
Read and observe the warning notes ⇒ page 182, Working in the engine compartment before working in the engine compartment.

CAUTION
● On no account should you add radiator antifreeze or other additives to the
windscreen washer fluid.
● If the vehicle is fitted with a headlight cleaning system, you should only add
cleaning products which do not attack the polycarbonate coating of the headlights to the windscreen washer fluid. Please contact an authorised ŠKODA Service Partner who will help you select a suitable cleaning agent.



Wheels and Tyres

193

Wheels and Tyres
Wheels

WARNING
● New tyres during the first approximately 500 km do not offer optimal grip
and should therefore be run appropriately - risk of accident!

General information
● New tyres do not offer optimal grip at first. They should therefore be run in for
about 500 km at a moderate speed and an appropriately cautious style of driving.
You will also profit from longer tyre life.
● The tread depth of new tyres may differ because of design features and the
configuration of the tread (depending on the type of tyre and the manufacturer).
● Drive over curbs on the side of the road and other such obstacles slowly and,
where possible, at a right angle in order to avoid damage to tyres and wheel trims.
● We recommend you Inspect your tyres and rims from time to time for damage
(punctures, cuts, splits and bulges). Remove foreign bodies from the tyre profile.
● Damage to tyres is frequently not visible. Unusual vibrations or pulling of the
vehicle to one side could be a sign of tyre damage. Please reduce your speed immediately and stop if you suspect that a wheel is damaged. Inspect the tyres for
signs of damage (bulges, splits, etc.) If no visible damage is present, please drive
at an appropriately slow speed and carefully to the nearest specialist garage in order to have your vehicle inspected.
● Also protect your tyres from contact with oil, grease and fuel.
● Immediately replace any dust caps of the valves which have got lost.
● Mark wheels before removing them so that their previous direction of running
can be maintained when mounted them again.
● Always store wheels or tyres which been removed in a cool, dry and, where
possible, dark place. Tyres which are not fixed to a wheel trim should be stored
upright.
Unidirectional tyres
The direction of rotation of the tyres is marked by arrows on the wall of the tyre.
This indicates the direction of rotation of the tyre, and it is essential that the tyres
are fitted on to run in this direction. Only then are the tyres able to provide the
optimal properties in terms of grip, low noise, wear-and-tear and aquaplaning.
Further information concerning the use of unidirectional tyres ⇒ page 197.

Using the system

Safety

Driving Tips



Never drive with damaged tyres - risk of accident!

Notice
Please observe the various differing legal requirements regarding tyres.



Tyre life

Fig. 157 An opened fuel filler flap with a
tyre size and tyre inflation pressure table

The life of your tyres very much depends on the following points:
Tyre pressure
The working life of tyres will be shortened considerably if the tyres are insufficiently or over-inflated and this will have an adverse effect on the handling of
your vehicle.
Correctly inflated tyres are of particular importance when travelling at high
speeds. It is therefore good to check the tyre pressure, including that of the spare
wheel, at least once a month and also before setting off on a long trip.
The tyre inflation pressures for summer tyres are indicated on the inside of the
fuel filler flap ⇒ fig. 157 . The inflation pressures for winter tyres are 20 kPa
(0.2 bar) higher than those for summer tyres ⇒ page 196.

General Maintenance

Breakdown assistance

Technical data

£

194

Wheels and Tyres

Wear indicators

The tyre inflation pressure for tyres of the tyre size 205/50 R17, which are intended to be used with snow chains, is identical to the tyre inflation pressure for
tyres of the tyre size 225/45 R17, see ⇒ fig. 157 .
The tyre pressure should be at the highest pressure specified for your vehicle at
all times.
The tyre inflation pressure of the emergency spare wheel R 18 is 420 kPa
(4.2 bar).
Always check the inflation pressure of tyres when cold. Do not reduce the higher
pressure of warm tyres. Adapt the inflation pressure of the tyres accordingly if
your vehicle is carrying a significantly higher payload.

Fig. 158 Tyre tread with wear indicators

Driving style
Fast cornering, sharp acceleration and braking (squealing tyres) increase wearand-tear on your tyres.

The base of the tread of the original tyres has wear indicators 1.6 mm high, installed at right angles to the direction of travel. These wear indicators are located at 6
- 8 points depending on the make and are evenly spaced around the circumference of the tyre ⇒ fig. 158 . Markings on the walls of the tyres through the letters
“TWI”, triangular symbols or other symbols identify the position of the wear indicators.

Balancing wheels
The wheels of a new vehicle are balanced. There are a wide range of influences
when driving which may result in an imbalance and which makes themselves felt
through vibration in the steering.

A remaining tread of just 1.6 mm, measured in the grooves of the tread next to the
wear indicators, means that your tyres have reached their legally permissible minimum tread depth.

You should have the wheels rebalanced since any imbalance increases wear-andtear on the steering, the suspension and tyres. A wheel must also be rebalanced
when a new tyre is fitted and each time a tyre is repaired.

WARNING

Wheel alignment errors
Incorrect wheel alignment at the front and rear will not only increase wear-andtear on the tyres but will also has an adverse effect on vehicle safety. Contact
your specialist garage if you notice any unusual tyre wear.

● You must have your tyres replaced with new ones at the latest when the
wear indicators have been worn down. The legally permissible minimum tread
depth should be observed.
● Worn tyres do not provide the necessary adhesion to the road surface at
high speeds on wet roads. One could experience “aquaplaning” (uncontrolled
movements of the vehicle - “swimming” on a wet road surface).

WARNING
● If the inflation pressure is too low, the tyre must perform a higher rolling
resistance. At higher speeds the tyre will warm up as a result of this. This can
result in tread separation and even a tyre blowout.


Immediately replace the damaged rims or tyres.

● Tyres which are 6 years old or more should only be fitted in exceptional cases and when adopting an appropriately cautious style of driving.

For the sake of the environment
Tyres which are insufficiently inflated increase your fuel consumption.





Wheels and Tyres

Changing wheels around

195

The tyre/wheel combinations which are approved for your vehicle are indicated in
your vehicle documents. Approval and licensing may differ according to the legislation prevailing in individual countries.
Proper knowledge of the tyre data makes it easier for you to select the correct
type of tyre. Tyres do, for example, have the following inscription on their walls:
195 / 65 R 15 91 T
What this means is:

Fig. 159 Changing wheels around

If significantly greater wear is present on the front tyres, we recommend changing
the front wheels around with the rear wheels as shown in the diagram ⇒ fig. 159 .
You will then obtain approximately the same life for all the tyres.

Tyre width in mm

65

Height/width ratio in %

R

Code letter for the type of tyre - R adial

15

Diameter of wheel in inches

91

Load index

T

Speed symbol

The following speed restrictions apply to tyres.

It may be advantageous to swap the tyres over “crosswise” when uneven wear
characteristic arise on the running surfaces of the tyres (but not in the case of unidirectional tyres). We recommend that you contact an authorised ŠKODA Service
Partner. They have extensive knowledge about the possible combinations.
We recommend that you change the wheels around every 10 000 km in order to
achieve even wear on all wheels and to obtain optimal tyre life.

195

Speed symbol

Permissible maximum speed

S

180 km/h



New tyres and wheels
Tyres and wheel rims are important design elements. One should therefore use
the tyres and wheel rims which have been released for use by ŠKODA. They are
exactly matched to the vehicle type and therefore contribute significantly to good
road holding and safe driving characteristics ⇒  .
Only fit radial tyres of the same type on all 4 wheels, size (rolling circumference)
and, if possible, the same tread pattern on one axle.
Authorised ŠKODA Service Partners have access to the most current information
about which tyres we have released for use on your vehicle.
We recommend that you have any work relating to tyres or wheels carried out by
an authorised ŠKODA Service Partner. Authorised ŠKODA Service Partners have
all of the necessary special tools and replacement parts available plus the required specialist knowledge and are also in a position to properly dispose of the
old tyres. A large number of authorised ŠKODA Service Partners also have an attractive range of tyres and wheels available.
Using the system

Safety

Driving Tips

T

190 km/h

U

200 km/h

H

210 km/h

V

240 km/h

W

270 km/h

Y

300 km/h

The date of manufacture is also stated on the tyre wall (possibly only on the inside of wheel):
DOT ... 20 11...
means, for example, that the tyre was manufactured in the 20th week of the year
2011.
Any spare wheel which differs from the tyres fitted to the vehicle (e.g. winter
tyres or low-profile tyres) should only be used only for a short time in the event of
a puncture and when adopting an appropriately cautious style of driving. It should
£
be replaced as quickly as possible by a normal wheel.

General Maintenance

Breakdown assistance

Technical data

196

Wheels and Tyres

WARNING

WARNING
● Only use those tyres or wheel rims which have been approved for your
model of ŠKODA vehicle. Failure to observe this instruction will adversely affect the road safety of your vehicle - risk of accident! Approval and licencing of
your vehicle on public roads may also become void as a result.

● In case of incorrect treatment of the wheel bolts, the wheel can loosen
when the car is moving - risk of accident!

● You must on no account drive at a higher speed than is permissible for
your tyres - risk of an accident resulting from tyre damage and loss of control
over your vehicle.

● If the wheel bolts are tightened to a too low tightening torque, the rim can
lossen when the car is moving - risk of accident! A tightening torque which is
too high can damage the bolts and threads and this can result in permanent
deformation of the contact surfaces on the rim.

● The wheel bolts must be clean and must turn easily. However, they must
never be treated with grease or oil.

● Tyres which are 6 years old or more should only be fitted in exceptional cases and when adopting an appropriately cautious style of driving.

CAUTION

● Never fit tyres which have already been used without having adequate
knowledge of their previous history. Tyres age even if they have not been
used at all or only very little. A spare tyre must only be used in exceptional cases and only then when adopting an appropriately cautious style of driving.

The prescribed tightening torque of the wheel bolts for steel and light alloy
wheels is 120 Nm.

● Do not, where possible, replace individual tyres but at least replace them
on both wheels of a given axle at the same time. Always fit the tyres with the
deeper tread depth to the front wheels.

Winter tyres
The handling of your vehicle will be significantly improved when driving on wintry
roads if you fit winter tyres. Summer tyres do not offer the same grip on ice, snow
and at temperatures below 7 °C because of their construction (width, rubber
blend, tread pattern). This particularly applies to vehicles which are equipped with
low-profile tyres or high-speed tyres (code index H or V on wall of tyre).

For the sake of the environment
Old tyres must be disposed of in conformity with the appropriate regulations.

Notice
It is not normally possible to fit wheels from other models of cars for technical
reasons. This may also apply in certain circumstances to the wheels of the same
type of vehicle.

Wheel bolts
Wheels and wheel bolts are matched to each other in terms of design. Each time
you fit other wheels - e.g. light alloy wheels or wheels with winter tyres - you
must therefore also use the matching wheel bolts of the correct length and shape
of spherical cap. This is essential to ensure that the wheels are tightly fitted and
that the brake system operates properly.
If you retrofit wheel trims (or have this done), please also ensure that an adequate flow of air remains assured for cooling the brake system.
Authorised ŠKODA Service Partners are instructed in the technical possibilities
which exist regarding converting or retrofitting tyres, wheels and wheel trims.



Winter tyres must be mounted on all four wheels to obtain the best handling
characteristics.


You must only fit those types of winter tyre which are approved for your vehicle.
The permissible sizes of winter tyres are stated in your vehicle documents. Approvals may differ because of national legislation.
Please remember that the tyres should be inflated to 20 kPa (0.2 bar) more than is
the case for summer tyres ⇒ page 193.
Winter tyres no longer offer the same winter performance once the tyre tread has
worn down to a depth of about 4 mm.
Ageing also causes winter tyres to lose most of their winter performance properties - even in cases where the remaining tread depth is still clearly more than 4
mm.
Speed restrictions apply to winter tyres as well as to summer tyres ⇒ page 195,
⇒  .

£

Wheels and Tyres

Snow chains

You can fit winter tyres of a lower speed category to your vehicle provided that
you also do not drive faster than the permissible maximum speed for such tyres,
even if the possible maximum speed of your vehicle is higher. The corresponding
tyre category can damage the tyres when exceeding the permissible maximum
speed.

Snow chains must only be mounted on the front wheels.
When driving on wintry roads, snow chains improve not only traction, but also the
braking performance.

Please pay attention to the notes if you decide to fit winter tyres ⇒ page 193.

For technical reasons, it is only permissible to fit snow chains with the following
wheel/tyre combinations.

You can also fit so-called “all-year tyres” instead of winter tyres.
Please contact your specialist garage if there are any points which are not clear
who will be able to provide you with information regarding the maximum speed
for your tyres.

WARNING
You must on no account drive your car at more than the permissible maximum
speed for your winter tyres - risk of an accident resulting from tyre damage
and loss of control over your car.

Wheel size

Depth (D)

Tyre size

6J x 15a)

47 mm

195/65

6.5J x 15a)

50 mm

195/65

6J x 16a)

50 mm

205/55

6J x 17b)

45 mm

205/50

a)

Only fit snow chains with links and locks not larger than 15 mm.

b)

Only fit snow chains with links and locks not larger than 9 mm.

Remove the full wheel trims before installing the snow chains.

For the sake of the environment
Fit your summer tyres on again in good time since summer tyres offer you better
grip and handling on roads which are free of snow and ice as well as ar temperatures below 7 °C - the braking distance is shorter, there is less tyre noise, tyre
wear is reduced and fuel consumption is reduced.

Observe the different national legal regulations relating to the use of snow chains
and the maximum vehicle speed with snow chains.

WARNING

Notice
Please observe the various differing legal requirements regarding tyres.



Please pay attention to the information in the supplied fitting instructions of
the snow chain manufacturer.

CAUTION

Unidirectional tyres

You must take the chains off as soon as you drive on roads which are free of
snow. They adversely affect the handling of your vehicle, damage the tyres and
are rapidly destroyed.

The direction of rotation of the tyres is marked by arrows on the wall of the tyre.
This indicates the direction of rotation of the tyre, and it is essential that the tyres
are fitted on to run in this direction. Only then are the tyres able to provide the
optimal properties in terms of grip, low noise, wear-and-tear and aquaplaning.

Notice
We recommend that you use snow chains from ŠKODA Original Accessories.

Should it be necessary to fit on a spare wheel in exceptional cases with a tyre not
dedicated to the running direction or in opposite running direction, please adopt a
cautious style of driving as the tyre is no longer able to provide optimal grip and
handling in such a situation. This particularly important on wet roads. Pay attention to the following points ⇒ page 200, Spare wheel.
You should have the defective tyre replaced as soon as possible and restore the
correct direction of rotation on all tyres
Using the system

197

Safety

Driving Tips



General Maintenance

Breakdown assistance

Technical data



198

Accessories, changes and replacement of parts

Accessories, changes and replacement of parts
General
ŠKODA vehicles have been built according to the latest discoveries in safety engineering. Thus one should not change the condition in which the vehicle was delivered from the manufacturer without some thought.
If you want to retrofit the vehicle with accessories, if a vehicle part is to be replaced with a new one, or when needing to make technical changes, the following
instructions must be observed:
● Advise should always be obtained from an authorised ŠKODA Service Partner
before buying any accessories or parts and before making any technical changes
⇒  .
● The guidelines and instructions issued by ŠKODA must be observed when
making technical changes.

WARNING
● Work or modifications on your vehicle, which have been carried out unprofessionally, can cause operational faults - risk of accident!
● We advise you, in your own interest, to only use ŠKODA Original Accessories and ŠKODA Original Parts which have been expressly approved for use on
your vehicle. Reliability, safety and suitability have been established for
ŠKODA Original Accessories and ŠKODA Original Parts.
● Although we constantly monitor the market, we are not able to assess or
warrant the parts even though in some instances such parts may have a type
approval or may have been approved by a nationally recognised testing laboratory.

Notice

Adhering to the prescribed procedures will prevent any kind of damage to the vehicle, and its travelling and operating safety will be maintained. The vehicle also
complies with German road transport regulations (StVZO). More information is
available from an authorised ŠKODA Service Partner who can also perform the
necessary work properly.

● ŠKODA Original Accessories and ŠKODA Original Parts can be bought from authorised ŠKODA Service Partners who also professionally undertake the assembly
of parts which were purchased there.

Interference on the electronic components and their software can lead to operational faults. This interference can also impair not directly affected systems because of the networking of the electronic components. In other words, the vehicle's roadworthiness may be put at risk and increased wear on parts may arise.

● All ŠKODA Original Accessories and Original Parts from the Original Accessories
catalogue, such as a towing device, child seats, etc. are authorised.

Any damage which is done caused by technical changes made without consulting a ŠKODA dealer is excluded from the warranty – see the warranty certificate.

● We recommend having all work undertaken by an authorised ŠKODA Service
Partner.

● We recommend that you also buy car stereos, aerials or other electrical accessories from an authorised ŠKODA Service Partner, who should also carry out the
installation.



Breakdown assistance

199

Breakdown assistance
Breakdown assistance
First-aid box and Warning triangle (Laura)

First-aid box and warning triangle (Estate car)

Fig. 160 Placing of the warning triangle
(Laura)

The first-aid box is attached by a strap to the right-hand side of the luggage compartment.
The warning triangle can be attached to the trim panel of the rear wall with rubber straps ⇒ fig. 160 .

For vehicles of the type estate car the first-aid box and the warning triangle are
housed in a compartment on the right side in the luggage compartment. You can
open the compartment by turning the locks in the direction of arrow ⇒ fig. 161 .

Notice
Pay attention to the use-by-date of the contents of the first-aid box.

Notice


Fig. 161 Placing of the warning triangle
(Estate car)

Pay attention to the use-by-date of the contents of the first-aid box.

● We recommend a first-aid box from the range of ŠKODA Original Accessories
that you can purchase from an authorised ŠKODA Service Partner.
● If you also want to equip your vehicle with a warning triangle, we recommend
a warning triangle from the range of ŠKODA Original Accessories that you can pur
chase from authorised ŠKODA Service Partners.

● We recommend a first-aid box from the range of ŠKODA Original Accessories
that you can purchase from an authorised ŠKODA Service Partner.
● If you also want to equip your vehicle with a warning triangle, we recommend
a warning triangle from the range of ŠKODA Original Accessories that you can pur
chase from authorised ŠKODA Service Partners.

Fire extinguisher
The fire extinguisher is attached with straps in a holder under the driver seat.
On vehicles fitted with electrically adjustable seats, the fire extinguisher is fastened to a bracket underneath the front passenger seat.
Please read carefully the instructions which are attached to the fire extinguish£
er.

Using the system

Safety

Driving Tips

General Maintenance

Breakdown assistance

Technical data

200

Breakdown assistance

The fire extinguisher must be checked by an authorised person or company annually (please observe the differing legal requirements).

The vehicle tool kit contains the following parts (depending on equipment fitted):








WARNING
If the fire extinguisher is not correctly attached, in case of sudden manoeuvres or an accident it can be “thrown” through the interior compartment and
cause injuries.

Notice

Before placing the lifting jack back in its storage area, screw in the arm of the lifting jack fully.

● The fire extinguisher must comply with the relevant and valid legal requirements.
● Pay attention to the expiration date of the fire extinguisher. If the fire extinguisher is used after the expiration date, its proper function is no longer assured.
● The fire extinguisher is only supplied in certain countries within the scope of
delivery.

Wire clamps for removing the full wheel trims,
Plastic clip for a wheel bolt cover,
Wheel wrench,
Towing eye,
Adapter for the wheel bolts lock,
Replacement lamp,
Screwdriver for removing the fog lights1).

WARNING


● The factory-supplied lifting jack is only intended for your model of vehicle.
On no account attempt to lift a heavier vehicle or other loads - risk of injury!
● Ensure that the vehicle tool kit is safely attached in the luggage compartment.

Vehicle tool kit

Notice
Ensure that the box is always secured with the strap.



Spare wheel

Fig. 162 Luggage compartment: Storage
compartment for vehicle too kit

The vehicle tool kit and the lifting jack with sticker are housed in a plastic box in
the spare wheel ⇒ fig. 162 or in the compartment for the spare wheel. There is
also space here for the removable ball for the trailer towing device. The box is attached with a strap on the spare wheel.

Fig. 163 Luggage compartment: Spare
wheel

The spare wheel lies in a well under the floor covering of the luggage compartment and is fixed in place using special screws ⇒ fig. 163 .
1)

Valid for Laura RS and Laura Scout.

£

Breakdown assistance
Before removing the spare wheel, you must take out the box with the vehicle tool
kit box ⇒ fig. 162 .



One should check the inflation pressure in the spare wheel (at best when generally checking the tyre air pressures - see sign on the fuel filler flap ⇒ page 193) to
ensure that the spare wheel is always ready to use.

Take the vehicle tool kit ⇒ page 200 and the spare wheel ⇒ page 200 out of
the luggage compartment.

WARNING
● If you find yourself in flowing traffic switch on the hazard warning lights
system and place the warning triangle on the side of the road at the prescribed distance from your vehicle. Comply with the national legal regulations. In
this way you are protecting not only yourself but also other road users.

Temporary spare wheel
A warning label displayed on the rim of the temporary spare wheel indicates that
your vehicle is equipped with a temporary spare wheel.

● Never start the engine with the vehicle sitting on the raised jack - danger
of suffering injury.

Please observe the following notes when driving with a temporary spare wheel:
● The warning label must not be covered after installing the wheel.
● Do not drive faster than 80 km/h with this spare wheel and pay particular attention while driving. Avoid accelerating at full throttle, sharp braking and fast
cornering.
● The inflation pressure for this spare wheel is identical to the inflation pressure
of the standard tyres. The temporary spare wheel R 18 must have an inflation
pressure of 420 kPa (4.2 bar)!
● Use this spare wheel only to reach the nearest specialist garage as it is not intended for continuous use.
● No other summer or winter tyres must be mounted on the rim of the spare
wheel R 18.

201

CAUTION
If you have to change a wheel on a slope first block the opposite wheel with a
stone or similar object in order to secure the vehicle from unexpectedly rolling
away.

Notice
Comply with the national legal regulations.





Changing a wheel
Always change a wheel on a level surface as far as possible.


Take off the full wheel trim ⇒ page 202 or the caps ⇒ page 202.



In the case of light alloy wheels remove the wheel trim cap ⇒ page 203.

Preliminary work



First of all slacken the safety wheel bolt and afterwards the other wheel bolts
⇒ page 203.

The following steps should be carried out before actually changing the wheel.



Jack up the vehicle until the wheel to be changed is clear of the ground
⇒ page 204.

Changing a wheel



If it is necessary to change a wheel, park the vehicle as far away as possible
from the traffic flow. The place you choose should be level.



Unscrew the wheel bolts and place them on a clean surface (cloth, paper etc.).



Have all the occupants get out. While changing a tyre, the occupants of the
vehicle should not stand on the road (instead they should remain behind a
crash barrier).



Take off the wheel.



Fit on the spare wheel and tighten the wheel bolts slightly.

Apply the handbrake firmly.



Lower the car.



Engage 1st gear or if your vehicle is fitted with an automatic gearbox, position
the selector lever into position P.



Tighten the wheel bolts firmly, alternately and diagonally using the wheel
wrench (crosswise) and lastly the wheel safety bolt ⇒ page 203.



If a trailer is coupled, uncouple it.



Mount the full wheel trim/wheel trim cap or the caps.



Using the system

Safety

Driving Tips

General Maintenance

Breakdown assistance

£

Technical data

202

Breakdown assistance


Notice


All bolts must be clean and must turn easily.



You must never grease or oil the wheel bolts!

● When fitting on unidirectional tyres, ensure that the tyres rotate in the correct
direction ⇒ page 193.



Subsequent steps

Stow and attach the replaced wheel in the spare wheel well using a special
screw ⇒ fig. 163 .



Stow the vehicle tool kit in the space provided.



Check the tyre pressure on the spare wheel just mounted as soon as possible.



Have the tightening torque of the wheel bolts checked with a torque wrench
as soon as possible. Steel and light alloy wheels must be tightened to a tightening torque of 120 Nm.



Install
– First press the full wheel trim onto the wheel at the valve opening provided.
Then press the full wheel trim into the wheel in such a way that its entire circumference locks correctly in place.

CAUTION
● Use the pressure of your hand, do not knock on the full wheel trim! Heavy
knocks mainly on the points where the full wheel trim has not been inserted into
the wheel, can result in damage to the guide and centering elements of the full
wheel trim.

After changing the wheel, you must perform the following steps.


Push the wheel key through the clamp, support the wheel key at the tyre and
pull off the wheel trim.

● Check for yourself that the safety wheel bolt is located in the hole in the area
of the valve before fitting the full wheel trim onto a steel wheel which is attached
with a safety wheel bolt ⇒ page 204, Securing wheels against being stolen.



Wheel bolts with caps

Change the damaged wheel or consult a specialist garage about possibilities
for getting repairs done.

WARNING
It is necessary to observe the guidelines given on ⇒ page 195 if the vehicle is
subsequently fitted with tyres which are different to those it was fitted with
at the works.

Notice

Fig. 164 Removing the cap.

● If you find, when changing the wheel, that the wheel bolts are corroded and
difficult to turn, the bolts must be replaced before checking the tightening torque.
● Drive cautiously and only at a moderate speed to a workshop where the tightening torque can be checked.



Pulling off
– Push the plastic clip sufficiently far onto the cap until the inner catches of the
clip are positioned at the collar of the cap and detach the cap ⇒ fig. 164 .

Full wheel trim

Install
– Push the caps fully onto the wheel bolts.

Pulling off
– Hook the clamp found in the vehicle tool kit into the reinforced edge of the full
wheel trim.

The caps are located in the well of the luggage compartment.



Breakdown assistance

Wheel trim caps

203

Tightening wheel bolts
– Insert the wheel wrench fully onto the wheel bolt 1).


Grasp the end of the wrench and turn the bolt to the right until it is tight.

WARNING
Slacken the wheel bolts only a little (about one turn) as long as the vehicle has
not yet been jacked up - risk of an accident!.

Notice
Fig. 165 Pulling off wheel trim cap on
light alloy wheels

Pulling off
– Carefully remove the wheel trim cap using the wire clamp ⇒ fig. 165 .

Apply pressure carefully with your foot to the end of the wrench if it proves difficult to slacken the bolts. Hold tight on the vehicle when doing this and ensure
that you have a steady position.


Slackening and tightening wheel bolts
Slacken the wheel bolts before jacking up the vehicle.

Fig. 166 Changing a wheel: Slackening
wheel bolts

Slackening wheel bolts
– Insert the wheel wrench fully onto the wheel bolt 1).


Grasp the end of the wrench and turn the bolt about one turn to the left
⇒ fig. 166 .

1)

Use the appropriate adapter for slackening and tightening the safety wheel bolts ⇒ page 204.

Using the system

Safety

Driving Tips

General Maintenance

Breakdown assistance

Technical data



204

Breakdown assistance

Raise vehicle

WARNING

You have to raise the vehicle with a lifting jack in order to be able
to take off the wheel.



Always raise the vehicle with the doors closed - risk of injury.

● Never position any body parts such as arms or legs under the vehicle, while
the vehicle is raised with a lifting jack.
● Secure the base plate of the lifting jack with suitable means to prevent
possible moving. A soft and slippery ground under the base plate may move
the lifting jack, causing the vehicle to fall down. It is therefore always necessary to place the lifting jack on a solid surface or use a wide and stable base.
Use a non-slip base (e.g. a rubber foot mat) if the surface is smooth, such as
cobbled stones, a tiled floor, etc.
● Attach the lifting jack only at the attachment points provided for this purpose.

Fig. 167 Changing a wheel: Jacking
points for positioning lifting jack



Securing wheels against being stolen
You need a special adapter for slackening the safety wheel bolts.

Fig. 168 Attach lifting jack

Position the lifting jack by selecting the jacking point which is closest to the wheel
to be removed ⇒ fig. 167 . The jacking point is located directly below the engraving
in the lower sill. The engraving is only visible after opening the door.


Position the lifting jack below the jacking point and move it up until its claw is
positioned directly below the vertical web of the lower sill.



Align the lifting jack so that its claw grasps the web ⇒ fig. 168 at the right below the embossing in the side surface of the base plate.



Make sure that the base plate of the lifting jack rests with its entire surface on
level ground and is located vertical to the point ⇒ fig. 168 where the claw
grasps the web.



Turn the lifting jack up further until the wheel is just clear of the ground.

Fig. 169 Illustration image: Safety
wheel bolt with adapter



Pull off the full wheel trim/cap from the wheel hub or cap from the safety
wheel bolt.



Insert the adapter B with its toothed side fully into the inner toothing of the
safety wheel bolt A right down in such a way that only the outer hexagon is
jutting out ⇒ fig. 169 .



Insert the wheel wrench fully onto the adapter B .



Slacken the wheel bolt, or tighten it firmly ⇒ page 203.



Reinstall the full wheel trim/wheel cap after removing the adapter or place the
£
cap onto the safety wheel bolt.

Breakdown assistance


Have the tightening torque checked with a torque wrench as soon as possible. Steel and light alloy wheels must be tightened to a tightening torque of
120 Nm.






The safety wheel bolts on vehicles fitted with them (one safety wheel bolt per
wheel) can only be loosened or tighten up by using the adapter provided.

with tears or punctures greater than 4 mm in size,
to repair damage to the tyre wall,
when driving with very low tyre pressure or with a completely flat tyre,
if the use-by-date (see inflation bottle) has passed.

WARNING

It is meaningful to note the code number hammered into the rear side of the
adapter or the rear side of the safety wheel bolts. You can obtain a replacement
adapter from an authorised ŠKODA Service Partner, if necessary, by quoting this
number.

● If you find yourself in flowing traffic switch on the hazard warning lights
system and place the warning triangle on the side of the road at the prescribed distance from your vehicle. Comply with the national legal regulations. In
this way you are protecting not only yourself but also other road users.

We recommend that you always carry the adapter for the wheel bolts with you in
the vehicle. It should be stowed in the vehicle tool kit.

● Park the vehicle as far away as possible from the traffic flow. Park on as
flat and firm a surface as possible.

CAUTION

● A tyre filled with sealant has the same driving characteristics as a standard
tyre.

Damage can occur to the adapter and safety wheel bolt if the safety wheel bolt is
tightened up too much.

Notice
The set of safety wheel bolts can be obtained from an authorised ŠKODA Service
Partner.





Do not drive faster than 80 km/h, 50 mph.



Avoid accelerating at full throttle, sharp braking and fast cornering.



Check the tyre inflation pressure after driving 10 minutes.

● Sealant is hazardous to heath. Remove immediately if it comes into contact with the skin.

For the sake of the environment

Tyre repair kit

Used sealant or sealant whose expiry date has passed must be disposed of in accordance with environmental protection regulations.

General information
The tyre repair kit is located in a box under the carpet in the luggage compartment.
Use the tyre repair kit to reliably repair tyre damage caused by foreign bodies or a
puncture with diameters up to 4 mm. Do not remove foreign bodies, e.g. screws or
nails, from the tyre!

Notice


Observe the manufacturer's usage instructions for the tyre repair kit.

● You can purchase a new bottle of sealant from the range of the ŠKODA Original Accessories.
● Change the wheel that was repaired using the tyre repair kit or consult a specialist garage about possibilities for getting repairs done.

The repair can be undertaken on the vehicle immediately.
The repair with the tyre repair kit is not at all intended to replace a permanent
repair on the tyre, this repair only serves to reach the next specialist garage.
Do not use the tyre repair kit:
● to repair wheel damage,
● in outside temperatures of less than -20 °C (-4 °F),

Using the system

205

Safety

Driving Tips

General Maintenance

Breakdown assistance

Technical data



206

Breakdown assistance

Components of the tyre repair kit



Have all the occupants get out. While changing a tyre, the occupants of the
vehicle should not stand on the road (instead they should remain behind a
crash barrier).



Switch off the engine and engage 1st gear or if your vehicle is fitted with an
automatic gearbox, position the selector lever into position P.



Apply the handbrake firmly.



Check whether you can carry out the repairs with the tyre repair kit
⇒ page 205, General information.



If a trailer is coupled, uncouple it.



Remove the tyre repair kit from the luggage compartment.



Stick the sticker 2 ⇒ fig. 170 on the dash panel in view of the driver.



Do not remove the foreign body, e.g. screw or nail, from the tyre.

Fig. 170 Components of the tyre repair kit



Unscrew the valve cap.

The tyre repair kit is made up of the following parts:



Use the valve remover 1 to remove the valve core and place it down on a
clean surface.

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11

Valve remover
Sticker with speed designation “max. 80 km/h”/“max. 50 mph”
Inflation hose with plug
Compressor
Tyre inflation hose
Tyre inflation pressure indicator
Air release valve
ON and OFF switch
12 volt cable connector
Tyre inflator bottle with sealing agent
Replacement valve core

The valve remover 1 has a slot at its lower end which fits into the valve core.
This is the only way in which you can remove and re-install the valve core from the

tyre valve. The same also applies to the replacement valve core 11 .

Preparing to use the tyre repair kit
Before using the tyre repair kit, carry out the following preparatory work:


Park the vehicle as far away as possible from the traffic flow. Park on as flat
and firm a surface as possible.



Seal and inflate tyres
Sealing tyres
– Forcefully shake the tyre inflator bottle

10

⇒ fig. 170 several times.



Firmly screw inflation hose 3 onto the tyre inflator bottle in a clockwise direction 10 . The film on the cap is pierced automatically.



Remove the plug from the inflation hose 3 and plug the open end fully into
the tyre valve.



Hold the bottle 10 with the floor facing upwards and fill the whole sealing
agent in the tyre inflator bottle into the tyres.



Remove the empty tyre inflator bottle from the valve.



Screw the valve core back into the tyre valve using the valve remover 1 .

Pumping up the tyres
– Screw the tyre inflation hose 5 ⇒ fig. 170 of the air compressor firmly onto
the tyre valve.


Check whether the air release valve 7 is closed.

£

Breakdown assistance


On vehicles fitted with a manual gearbox, move the gearshift lever into Neutral.

CAUTION
Switch off the air compressor after running 8 minutes at the latest - danger of
overheating! Allow the air compressor to cool a few moments before switching it
on again.



Start the engine and run it in idle.



Plug the connector 9 into 12 Volt socket ⇒ page 77.



Switch on the air compressor with the ON and OFF switch 8 .



Allow the air compressor to run until reaching a pressure of 2.0 - 2.5 bar. Maximum run time of 8 minutes ⇒  !



Switch off the air compressor with the ON and OFF switch.



If you cannot reach an air pressure of 2.0 – 2.5 bar, unscrew the tyre inflation
hose 5 from the tyre valve.

If the tyre inflation pressure is 1.3 bar or less:
– Do not drive the vehicle! You cannot properly seal with tyre with the breakdown kit.



Drive the vehicle approx. 10 metres forwards or backwards to allow the sealing
agent to distribute in the tyre.





Screw the tyre inflation hose of the air compressor 5 firmly back onto the
tyre valve and repeat the inflation procedure.



If you cannot reach the required tyre inflation pressure here either, this means
the tyre has sustained too much damage. You cannot seal with tyre with the
breakdown kit ⇒  .

If the tyre inflation pressure is 1.3 bar or more:
– Adjust the tyre inflation pressure to the correct value (see inside of fuel filler
cap).



Switch off the air compressor with the ON and OFF switch.



Remove the tyre inflation hose 5 from the tyre valve.

After reaching a tyre inflation pressure of 2.0 – 2.5 bar, drive at a maximum speed
of 80 km/h (50 mph).
Check the tyre inflation pressure after driving 10 minutes ⇒ page 207, Check after
driving for 10 minutes.

WARNING
● During inflation, the tyre inflation hose and air compressor may get hotrisk of injury!
● Do not place hot tyre inflation hoses or hot air compressors on flammable
materials - risk of fire!
● If you cannot inflate the tyre to at least 2.0 bar, this means the damage
sustained was too serious. The sealing agent cannot be used to seal the tyre.
Do not drive the vehicle. Get professional assistance.

Safety

Driving Tips



Check after driving for 10 minutes
Check the tyre inflation pressure after driving 10 minutes.



Contact a Škoda dealer to obtain professional assistance.

Continue driving carefully to the nearest specialist garage at a maximum
speed of 80 km/h (50 mph).



Jump-starting
Initial steps
You can use the battery of another vehicle for jump-starting yours if the engine
does not start because the battery on your vehicle is flat. You will require jumpstart cables for this purpose.
Both batteries must have a rated voltage of 12 V. The capacity (Ah) of the battery
supplying the power must not be significantly less than the capacity of the discharged battery in your vehicle.
Jump-start cables
Only use jump-start cables which have an adequately large cross-section and insulated terminal clamps. Please pay attention to the manufacturer's instructions.
Positive cable - colour coding in the majority of cases red.
Negative cable - colour coding in the majority of cases black.

Using the system

207

General Maintenance

Breakdown assistance

Technical data

£

208

Breakdown assistance
Connecting negative terminal and engine block
– Attach one end 3 to the negative terminal of the battery supplying the power
B.

WARNING
● A discharged battery may already freeze at temperatures just below 0°C.
In case of frozen battery carry out no jump-starting - risk of explosion!



● Please pay attention to the warning instructions relating to working in the
engine compartment ⇒ page 182, Working in the engine compartment.

Starting engine
– Start the engine of the vehicle providing current and run the engine at idling
speed.

Notice
● There must not be any contact between the two vehicles otherwise current
may flow as soon as the negative terminals are connected.
● The discharged battery must be properly connected to the system of the vehicle.
● Switch off any mobile phone, pay attention to the instructions for use of the
mobile phone in such a situation.


We recommend you buy jump-start cables from a car battery specialist.

Attach the other end 4 to a solid metal part which is connected firmly to the
engine block, or to the engine block itself.



Now start the engine of the vehicle with the discharged battery.



Interrupt the attempt at starting an engine after 10 seconds if it does not start
right away and wait for about 30 seconds before repeating the attempt.



Disconnect the cables on the engine in exactly the reverse order they were
connected up.



WARNING

Start engine

● The non-insulated parts of the terminal clamps must never make contact
with each other. In addition, the jump-start cable connected to the positive
terminal of the battery must not come into contact with electrically conducting parts of the vehicle - risk of short circuit!
● Do not affix the jump starting cables to the negative terminal of the discharged battery. There is the risk of detonating gas seeping out the battery
being ignited by the strong spark which results from the engine being started.
Fig. 171 Jump-starting using the battery
from another vehicle: A - flat vehicle battery, B - battery providing current

It is important to connect the jump-start cables in the correct order.
Connecting positive terminals
– Attach one end 1 ⇒ fig. 171 to the positive terminal of the discharged battery
A.


Attach the other end 2 to the positive terminal of the battery supplying the
power B .

● Run the jump-start cables so that they cannot be caught by any rotating
parts in the engine compartment.


Do not bend over the batteries - risk of caustic burns!



The vent screws of the battery cells must be tightened firmly.

● Keep any sources of ignition (naked flame, smouldering cigarettes etc.)
away from the battery - risk of an explosion!
● Never jump-start the batteries which have a too low electrolyte level - risk
of explosion and caustic burns!



Breakdown assistance

Jump-starting in vehicles with the “START-STOP” system

209

The maximum towing speed is 50 km/h.
Driver of the towed vehicle
– Switch the ignition on so that the steering wheel is not blocked and you can
also operate the turn signal lights, the headlight flasher, the windscreen wipers and windscreen washer system.


Note that the brake servo unit and power steering only operate if the engine is
running. You will require significantly greater physical force to depress the brake
pedal and to steer the vehicle if the engine is not running.

Fig. 172 Jump-starting on vehicles with
the START-STOP system

One vehicles with the “START STOP” system, the negative cable of the charger
must never be connected directly to the negative pole of the vehicle battery, but
only to the engine earth ⇒ fig. 172 .

The vehicle

Take the vehicle out of gear or move the selector lever into position N if your
vehicle is fitted with an automatic gearbox.

When using a tow rope, always ensure that the tow rope is always kept taught.

CAUTION


● Do not tow start the engine - danger of damaging the engine. On vehicles with
a catalytic converter, unburnt fuel may get into the catalytic converter where it
may ignite. This in turn may damage or destroy the catalytic converter. You can
use the battery of another vehicle as a jump-start aid ⇒ page 207, Jump-starting.

General

● If the gearbox of your vehicle no longer contains any oil because of a defect,
your vehicle must only be towed in with the driven wheels raised clear of the
ground, or on a special vehicle transporter or trailer.

Vehicles with manual transmission can be towed in with a tow bar or a tow rope
or with the front or rear wheels raised.

● The vehicle must be transported on a special vehicle or trailer if it is not possible to tow in the vehicle in the way described or if the towing distance is greater
than 50 km.

Vehicles with automatic transmission can be towed in with a tow bar or a tow
rope or with the front wheels raised. If the vehicle is raised at rear, the automatic
gearbox is damaged!
Vehicles with four-wheel drive can be towed in with a tow bar or a tow rope or
with the front wheels raised.
A tow bar is safest way of towing a vehicle and also minimizes any shocks. You
can use a tow rope only if a suitable tow bar is not available.
Refer to the following guidelines when towing:
Driver of the towing vehicle
– Release the clutch particularly gently when starting off or depress the accelerator particularly gently if your vehicle is fitted with an automatic gearbox.


● To protect both vehicles when tow-starting or towing, the tow rope should be
elastic. Thus one should only use plastic fibre rope or a rope made out of a similarly elastic material.
● One should be constantly vigilant not to allow impermissibly high towing
forces or jerky loadings. There is always a risk of excessive stresses and damage
resulting at the points to which you attach the tow rope or tow bar when you attempt to tow a vehicle which is not standing on a paved road.
● Attach the tow rope or the tow bar only to the towing eyes provided for this
purpose ⇒ page 210, Front towing eye and ⇒ page 211, Rear towing eye.

On vehicles with manual transmission, only push down on the accelerator pedal once the rope is taught.

Using the system

Safety

Driving Tips

General Maintenance

Breakdown assistance

Technical data

£

210

Breakdown assistance


Notice
● We recommend a tow rope from the range of ŠKODA Original Accessories that
you can purchase from an authorised ŠKODA Service Partner.
● Towing another vehicle requires a certain amount of practice. Both drivers
should be familiar with the particular points about towing a vehicle. Unskilled drivers should not attempt to tow in another vehicle or to be towed in.

CAUTION
The towing eye must always be screwed in fully and firmly tightened, otherwise
the towing eye can tear when towing in or tow-starting!

● When towing, respect the national legal provisions, especially those which relate to the identification of the towing vehicle and the vehicle being towed.
● The tow rope must not be twisted as it may in certain circumstances result in
the front towing eye being unscrewed out of your vehicle.

In order to reinstall the cover after screwing out the towing eye, first of all insert it starting on the side facing the marking. Then press the cover closed on
the side facing the fog light. The cover must engage firmly.



Front towing eye for Laura RS and Laura Scout


The towing eye is stored in the box of the vehicle tool kit.

Front towing eye
The towing eye is stored in the box of the vehicle tool kit.

Fig. 174 Front bumper Laura RS: Protective grille/Laura Scout: Cover

Fig. 173 Front bumper: protective grille/installing the towing eye

Carefully remove the cover as follows.

Laura RS
– Guide one finger into the opening A of the grille ⇒ fig. 174 .


Unlock the cover by pulling it in direction 1 and remove it.



Screw in the towing eye by hand to the left up to the stop ⇒ fig. 173 - right
and tighten it as much as possible.
Put the cover in place after screwing out the towing eye again and press into
place. The cover must engage firmly.



Guide the fingers into the opening A ⇒ fig. 173 .



By pulling in the direction of arrow 1 , first of all slacken the cover in the upper area on the side to the fog lights.





Afterwards, also slacken the cover on the other side in the direction of arrow
2 and remove it.



Screw in the towing eye by hand to the left up to the stop ⇒ fig. 173 - right
and tighten. For tightening, we recommend that you use for example the
wheel wrench, the lashing eye of another vehicle or a similar object which you
can push through the eye.

Laura Scout
– Press on the upper part of the cover B and remove it.


Screw in the towing eye by hand to the left up to the stop ⇒ fig. 173 - right
and tighten it as much as possible. For tightening, we recommend that you
use for example the wheel wrench, the lashing eye of another vehicle or a sim£
ilar object which you can push through the eye.

Breakdown assistance


Put the cover in place after screwing out the towing eye again and press into
place. The cover must engage firmly.

CAUTION
The towing eye must always be screwed in fully and firmly tightened, otherwise
the towing eye can tear when towing in or tow-starting.



Rear towing eye

Fig. 175 Rear bumper: Remove cover/rear bumper: Installing the towing eye



Unlock the bottom part of the cover by pulling it downwards in direction of arrow 1 ⇒ fig. 175 .



Unlock the upper part of the cover by pulling it in direction of arrow 2 and remove it.



Screw in the towing eye by hand to the left up to the stop ⇒ fig. 175 - right
and tighten it as much as possible. For tightening, we recommend that you
use for example the wheel wrench, the lashing eye of another vehicle or a similar object which you can push through the eye.



In order to reinstall the cover after screwing out the towing eye, first of all insert the upper part of the cover and then press in the lower part. The cover
must engage firmly.

CAUTION
The towing eye must always be screwed in fully and firmly tightened, otherwise
the towing eye can tear when towing in or tow-starting.

Using the system

Safety

Driving Tips



General Maintenance

Breakdown assistance

Technical data

211

212

Fuses and light bulbs

Fuses and light bulbs
Electric fuses

Colour coding of fuses
Colour

Replacing fuses in the dash panel

5

brown

7,5

red

10

Defect fuses must be replaced.

Fig. 176 Fuse cover: left side of the dash
panel

Individual electrical circuits are protected by fuses. The fuses are located on the
left side of the dash panel behind the safety cover and under the cover in the engine compartment on the left.


Switch the ignition off and also the electrical component affected.



Use a screwdriver to take off the fuse cover on the side of the dash panel
⇒ fig. 176 or the fuse cover in the engine compartment ⇒ page 212.



Find out which fuse belongs to the relevant component ⇒ page 214, Fuse assignment in the dash panel or ⇒ page 213, Fuse assignment in engine compartment.



Take the plastic clip out of its fixture in the fuse cover, insert it onto the respective fuse and pull out this fuse.



Defect fuses can be detected by their melted metal strips. Replace the defect
fuse by a new fuse of the same ampere number.



Fit on the fuse cover again.

We recommend that you always have the small box of replacement fuses in your
vehicle. You can obtain replacement fuses from the range of ŠKODA Original Parts
or from a specialist garage.

Maximum amperage

light brown

blue

15

yellow

20

white

25

green

30

orange

40

red

50

CAUTION
● Never attempt to “repair” fuses and also do not replace them with a fuse of a
higher amperage - risk of fire! This may also cause damage at another part of the
electrical system.
● Have the electrical system checked as quickly as possible by a specialist garage if a newly inserted fuse blows again after a short time.



Fuse cover in engine compartment

Fig. 177 Fuse cover in engine compartment

On some vehicles, the battery cover must be removed before removing the fuse
cover ⇒ page 189.

£

Fuses and light bulbs
Removing fuse cover
– Move the circlips A ⇒ fig. 177 as far as the stop, the symbol  appears behind
the circlip and remove the cover.

No.

Power consumer

F8

Radio

F9

Not assigned

Installing fuse cover
– Position the fuse cover on the fuse box and push the circlips A as far as the
stop - the symbol  is visible behind the circlip.

F10

Engine control unit, Main relay

F11

Control unit for auxiliary heating

F12

Control unit for CAN databus

F13

Engine control unit

F14

Ignition

F15

Lambda probe
glow plug system relay

F16

Central control unit, right main headlight, right rear light unit

F17

Horn

F18

Amplifier for digital sound processor

F19

Front window wiper

F20

Water pump
valve for fuel dosing

CAUTION
● When unlocking and locking the fuse cover, it must be pressed on the sides to
the box, otherwise damage can occur to the locking mechanism.
● Carefully position the fuse cover in the engine compartment. If the cover was
not correctly positioned, water can get into the fuses and this results in a damage
to the vehicle!



Fuse assignment in engine compartment

Fig. 178 Schematic representation of
fuse carrier in engine compartment

Certain electrical components are only standard on certain vehicle model versions
or only suppliable as optional equipment for certain models.
No.

Power consumer

F1

Not assigned

F2

Control unit for automatic gearbox DQ 200

F3

Measuring circuit

F4

Valves for ABS

a)

F5

Control unit for automatic gearbox

F6

Instrument cluster, windshield wiper lever and turn signal light lever

F7

Power suppy terminal 15, Starter

Using the system

Safety

Driving Tips

F21

Lambda probe

F22

Clutch pedal switch, brake pedal switch

F23

Secondary air pump
Air mass meter
Fuel high pressure pump

F24

Activated charcoal filter, exhaust gas recirculation valve

F25

Pump for ABS

F26

Central control unit, left main headlight, left rear light unit

F27

Secondary air pump
Glow plug system

F28

Not assigned

F29

Power supply terminal 30

F30

Terminal Xa)

In order not to drain the battery unnecessarily when starting the engine, the electrical components
of this terminal are automatically switched off.

General Maintenance

Breakdown assistance

Technical data

213



214

Fuses and light bulbs

Fuse assignment in the dash panel

No.

Power consumer

20

Not assigned

21

Cornering lights for the left and right side

22

Air blower for Climatronic

23

Front power window

24

Cigarette lighter

25

Rear window heater
Rear window heater, Auxiliary heating (auxiliary heating and ventilation)

26

Power socket in the luggage compartment

27

Fuel pump relay, Injection valves (diesel engine)

28

Radio

29

Engine control unit, Crankcase ventilation heater

Power consumer

30

Control unit for automatic gearbox

1

Diagnostic socket, Engine control unit, Electrical fuel pump

31

Vacuum pump

2

Control unit for ABS, ESP

32

Rear power window
Electric sliding/tilting roof

Fig. 179 Schematic representation of
the fuse carrier in the dash panel

Certain electrical components are only standard on certain vehicle model versions
or only suppliable as optional equipment for certain models.
No.

3

Airbag

33

4

Heating, Air conditioning system, Reversing lights

34

Control unit for convenience functions

5

Control unit for headlamp beam adjustment

35

Anti-theft alarm system

6

Instrument cluster, control unit for automatic gearbox, control unit for
electromechanical power steering, parking aid, Haldex coupling

36

Headlight cleaning system

37

Front seat heating

7

Not assigned

38

Heated rear seats

8

Not assigned

39

Instrument cluster, windshield wiper lever and turn signal light lever

9

Not assigned

40

Air blower for heating and air conditioning

10

Not assigned

41

Not assigned

11

Not assigned

42

Not assigned

12

Central locking control unit

43

Towing device

13

Diagnostic socket, Light switch

44

Towing device

14

Control unit for automatic gearbox, Selector lever lock

45

Towing device

15

Central control unit - interior lights

46

Seat heaters

16

Climatronic

47

Relay for auxiliary heating

17

Not assigned

48

Phone

18

Rear window wiper

49

Light switch

19

Control unit for trailer detection

£

Fuses and light bulbs
Electrically adjustable seats are protected by automatic circuit breakers, which
switch on again automatically after a few seconds after the overload has been
eliminated.

Front headlight


Xenon headlight
PY21W

H8/HB4a)

Fog lights
a)

Bulbs

Halogen headlight

Turn signals
Laura RS, Laura Scout

Light unit (Laura)

Bulb

Changing bulbs

Reversing light

P21W

Turn signals

PY21W

The relevant lamp must always be switched off before a light bulb is replaced.

Twin filament light bulb for the brake lights and tail
lights

P21/4W

Twin filament bulbs for the rear fog light and rear
parking light.

P21/4W

Defect light bulbs should only be replaced with light bulbs of the same type. The
designation is located on the light socket or the glass bulb.
Changing certain bulbs is not something which you can do yourself, but requires
to be done by a specialist. Other parts of the vehicle must be removed in order to
change the light bulbs. This applies, in particular, to bulbs which can only be
reached from the engine compartment.
We therefore recommend that you have any bulbs changed by an authorised
ŠKODA Service Partner or, in exceptional cases, by calling on other professional
assistance.
Please note that the engine compartment is a hazardous area ⇒ page 182, Working in the engine compartment.

Parking lights

W3W

Rear light unit (estate car)

Bulb

Reversing lights, brake lights, parking light and rear
fog light

P21W

Turn signals

PY21W

Parking lights

W3W

Others

Bulb

We recommend that you always have a small box of replacement bulbs in your vehicle. You can obtain replacement bulbs from ŠKODA Original Accessories or from
a specialist garage.

Side turn signal lights

LED

Licence plate light

C5W

3. Brake light

LED

A stowage place for the bulbs is located in the box in the spare wheel.

Entry lighting

W5W

Fitted with a xenon headlight

front interior lighting

C10W

Change of bulbs on vehicles with Xenon lights (low beam lights, parking lights and
main beam lights) should be undertaken by a specialist garage.

Reading lights

W5W

Rear interior lighting

C10W

Bulb - Overview

Luggage compartment light

W5W

Front headlight
Low beam
Main beam

Xenon headlight

H7

D1S

Door warning light

C5W

Lighting in storage compartment

C3W

H1

Parking lights

W5W/W5W BL
PY21W SLL/LEDa)

Daylight driving lights

Using the system

Halogen headlight

Safety

Driving Tips

215

General Maintenance

Breakdown assistance

Technical data

£

216

Fuses and light bulbs

Removing the headlight

WARNING
● Bulbs H7 and H1 are pressurised and may burst when changing the bulb risk of injury!
● It is recommended to wear gloves and safety glasses when changing a
bulb.
● Gas discharge bulbs (xenon bulbs) operate with a high voltage, professional knowledge is required - danger to life!

CAUTION
Fig. 181 Front headlight: Fitting position
of the bulbs

Do not take hold of the glass bulb with naked fingers (even the smallest amount
of dirt reduces the working life of the light bulb). Use a clean cloth, serviette or
something similar.

The headlight must be removed in order to change the light bulb of the parking
lights, low beam lights and main beam lights as well as the turn signal lights.

Notice
This Owner's Manual only describes the replacement of bulbs where it is assumed
that no major complications will arise. Other light bulbs should be changed by your

specialist garage.

Front headlight

Removing the headlight
– Switch the ignition and all lights off.


Open the bonnet ⇒ page 181.



Unscrew the plastic nut A ⇒ fig. 181 .



Pull the fuse B in upward direction.



Pull the locking lever of the headlight as far as the stop in the direction of arrow 1 .



Unplug the plug connector and carefully take out the headlight in the direction
of arrow 2 .

Installation is carried out in the reverse order.

Notice

Fig. 180 Front headlight: Fitting position of the bulbs

After installing the headlight, the headlight setting must be checked by a specialist garage.

Positions of the light bulbs in the front headlight ⇒ fig. 180 .
A - Front turn signal light
B - parking lights and low beam
C - main beam light





Fuses and light bulbs

Turn signal light (at the front)

217

Front parking lights and low beam

Fig. 182 Removing the light bulb for the
turn signal light

Fig. 183 Removing the bulbs for the
parking and low beam light

Changing light bulb for turn signal light (at the front)
– Switch the ignition and all lights off.

Removing the light bulb for the parking light
– Switch the ignition and all lights off.



Remove the headlight ⇒ page 216.



Remove the headlight ⇒ page 216.



Turn the socket in the direction of arrow OPEN (open) and take it out together
with the light bulb for the turn signal light ⇒ fig. 182 .



Remove the protective cap B ⇒ fig. 180 .





Press the defective light bulb into the socket, turn to the left and remove.

Remove the socket A ⇒ fig. 183 .



Take the faulty bulb out of the fixture and insert a new one.



Press a new light bulb into the socket and turn the light bulb to the right as far
as the stop.



Insert the protective cap.



Insert the socket with the changed light bulb into the headlight and secure it
by turning in the direction of arrow CLOSE (close) to the right.

Removing the light bulb for the low beam light
– Switch the ignition and all lights off.

Notice
After installing the headlight, the headlight setting must be checked by a specialist garage.





Remove the headlight ⇒ page 216.



Remove the protective cap B ⇒ fig. 180 .



Turn the connector with the light bulb B up to the stop towards the left and
remove ⇒ fig. 183 .



Replace the lamp, insert the connector with the new lamp and turn to the
right up to the stop.



Insert the protective cap.

Notice
● In order to facilitate the removal of the socket with the bulb for the parking
light, we recommend to remove first of all the bulb for the low beam light.
● After installing the headlight, the headlight setting must be checked by a specialist garage.
Using the system

Safety

Driving Tips

General Maintenance

Breakdown assistance

Technical data



218

Fuses and light bulbs

Fog lights and daylight driving lights

Main beam

Fig. 184 Removing the light bulb for the
main beam light



Switch the ignition and all lights off.



Remove the headlight ⇒ page 216.



Remove the protective cap C ⇒ fig. 180 .



Unplug plug A ⇒ fig. 184 .



Press the wire clamps B in the direction of the headlight and then unhook
them to the side.



Fig. 185 Front bumper: Protective grille/removing the fog light

Plug B - Bulb for daylight driving light ⇒ fig. 185 . Plug C - Bulb for fog lights.
Removing the cover
– Switch the ignition and all lights off.

Remove the light bulb C and insert the new light bulb in such a way that the
fixing lugs of the light bulb socket fit into the recesses at the reflector.

Installation is carried out in the reverse order.

Notice
After installing the headlight, the headlight setting must be checked by a specialist garage.





Guide the fingers into the opening A ⇒ fig. 185 .



By pulling in the direction of arrow 1 , first of all slacken the cover in the upper area on the side to the fog lights.



Afterwards, also slacken the cover on the other side in the direction of arrow
2 and remove it.

Removing the fog light
– Guide your hand into the opening, in which the cover was located, and press
the spring bolt ⇒ fig. 185 - right.


Take out the fog light.



Turn the connector with the light bulb up to the stop towards the left and remove.



Replace the lamp, insert the connector with the new lamp and turn to the
right up to the stop.



For the installation, first of all insert the fog light with the interlock to the side
far away from the marking of the vehicle.



Press into place the headlight onto the side facing the marking.

£

Fuses and light bulbs


In order to reinstall the cover, first of all insert one part of the cover starting
on the side facing the marking. Then press the cover closed on the side facing
the fog light. The cover must engage firmly.

219

Fog lights Laura RS, Laura Scout


Cover of fog lights Laura RS, Laura Scout

Fig. 187 Front bumper: Fog lights/fog lights: Replacing the light bulb

Removing the fog light
– Use the screwdriver to unscrew the screws from the car tool kit 1) ⇒ fig. 187 left.

Fig. 186 Front bumper: Laura RS / Laura Scout



Removing the cover - Laura RS
– Switch the ignition and all lights off.


Guide one finger into the opening 1 ⇒ fig. 186 and remove the cover.

Removing the cover - Laura Scout
– Switch the ignition and all lights off.


1)

Guide the wire clamp from the vehicle tool kit into the opening 2 above the
fog light and remove the cover.

Take out the fog light.

Changing the bulb and installing the fog light
– Press the locking button 1 of the plug A and remove the plug from the socket B .





Turn the socket B with the bulb to the left up to the stop and take it out.



Change the bulb, insert again the socket with the new bulb and turn it to the
right up to the stop.



Connect the plug A to the socket B .



Screw in the screws again and insert the cover. The cover must engage firmly.

Valid for Laura RS and Laura Scout.

Using the system

Safety

Driving Tips

General Maintenance

Breakdown assistance

Technical data



220

Fuses and light bulbs

Licence plate light

Open the boot lid and unscrew the light glass ⇒ fig. 188 .



Take the defective bulb out of the holder and insert a new one.



Insert the glass cover of the light again and press it down to the stop - ensure
that the sealing rubber is correctly seated.



Screw on the light glass slightly.

Light unit (Laura)

Fig. 189 Luggage compartment: Cover for the lamp holder/removing the lamp holder

Changing light bulbs in the lamp holder
– Switch the ignition and all lights off.


Unlock the locking button and open the cover of the lamp holder ⇒ fig. 189 left.

Press the catches in the direction of arrow and take out the lamp holder
⇒ fig. 189 - right.



Press the defective light bulb into the socket, turn to the left and remove.



Press a new light bulb into the socket and turn the light bulb to the right as far
as the stop.



Insert the lamp holder in such a way that the catches lock in place in the housing.



Close and lock the cover of the lamp holder.

Change the light bulb for the parking light
– Switch the ignition and all lights off.

Fig. 188 Remove the licence plate light









Unlock the locking button and open the cover of the lamp holder ⇒ fig. 189 left.



Take the defective light bulb (arrow 1 or 2 ) out of the housing and replace it
with a new one.



Close and lock the cover of the lamp holder.



Rear light unit (estate car)

Fig. 190 Luggage compartment: Cover for the lamp holder/removing the lamp holder

Changing light bulbs in the lamp holder
– Switch the ignition and all lights off.


Open the lamp holder cover ⇒ fig. 190 - left.



Take out the light bulbs of the tail light (arrow 1 and 2 ).

£

Fuses and light bulbs


Press the catch in the direction of arrow and take out the lamp ⇒ fig. 190 right.



Press the defective light bulb into the socket, turn to the left and remove.



Press a new light bulb into the socket and turn the light bulb to the right as far
as the stop.



Insert the lamp holder in such a way that the catches lock in place in the housing.



Take out the light bulbs from the rear parking light (arrow 1 and 2 ).



Close the cover of the lamp holder.

Change the light bulb for the parking light
– Switch the ignition and all lights off.


Open the lamp holder cover ⇒ fig. 190 - left.



Take the defective light bulb (arrow 1 or 2 ) out of the housing and replace it
with a new one.



Close the cover of the lamp holder.

Using the system

Safety



Driving Tips

General Maintenance

Breakdown assistance

Technical data

221

222

Technical data

Technical data
Technical data
General information

Performances

The details given in the official vehicle registration documents always take precedence over the details in the Owner's Manual. Please refer to the official vehicle
registration documents or consult an authorised ŠKODA Service Partner concerning the engine with which your vehicle is equipped.

The listed performance values were determined without performance-reducing
equipment, e.g. air conditioning system.




Weight

Used abbreviations
Abbreviation

Description

kW

Kilowatt, measuring unit for the engine output

rpm

Engine revolutions per minute

Nm

Newton meter, measuring unit for the engine torque

g/km

discharged quantity of carbon dioxide in grams per driven
kilometre

TSI

Petrol engine with a turbocharger and a direct fuel injection system

Fig. 191 Type plate

The indicated unloaded weight is for orientation purposes only. It is for the basic
equipment variant of the vehicle not including special features or accessories.

TDI PD

Diesel engine with turbocharger and injection system
unit injector

TDI CR

Diesel engine with turbocharger and injection system
Common Rail

The unloaden weight contains a fuel tank topped up to 90 % and a driver weight
of 75 kg.

5-speed/6-speed manual gearbox
6-speed automatic gearbox

It is possible to calculate the approximate loading capacity from the difference between the permissible total weight and the unloaded weight.

6 speed-/7 speed automatic gearbox DSG

You need to include the following into the loading capacity:

Diesel particle filter






M5 / M6
AQ6
DQ6/DQ7
DPF
N1

The vehicles of this category are designed and constructed for conveying goods with a maximum weight of
3.5 tons



passengers,
all items of luggage and other loads,
roof loads incl. the roof rack,
when using a trailer hitch, the corresponding trailer nose weight (max. 75 kg).

The following specifications are listed on the type plate ⇒ fig. 191 :

£

Technical data
1
2
3
4

Permissible gross weight
The permissible overall weight of the vehicle/trailer combination when the
vehicle is being operated with a trailer
Maximum permissible front axle load
Maximum permissible rear axle load

223

Vehicle identification number (VIN)
The vehicle identification number - VIN (vehicle body number) is stamped into the
engine compartment on the right hand shock absorber dome. This number is also
located on a sign on the lower left hand edge below the windscreen.
Engine number
The engine number is stamped into the engine block.

The type playte is fixed to the lower part of the columns on the driver's side, between the front and rear doors.

Type plate (production plate)
The type plate is located in the lower area of the left centre column.

WARNING
Do not exceed the permissible overall weight - risk of accident and damage to
the vehicle.

Identification details



Sticker on inside of fuel filler flap
The stickers are affixed to the inside of the fuel filler flap and contain the following information:
● The prescribed types of fuel,
● Tyre size,
● Tyre pressure.



Fuel consumption according to the ECE standards
and EU guidelines

Fig. 192 Vehicle data sticker

Vehicle data sticker
The vehicle data sticker ⇒ fig. 192 is located on the floor of the luggage compartment and is also stated in the Service schedule.
The vehicle data sticker contains the following data:
1
2
3
4
5

Vehicle identification number (VIN)
Vehicle type
Gearbox code, paint number, interior equipment number, engine output, engine code
Partial description of the vehicle
7GG, 7MB, 7MG - vehicles with DPF ⇒ page 161

Using the system

Safety

Driving Tips

Depending on the range of the special equipment, style of driving, traffic situation, weather influences and vehicle condition, the consumption values which in
practice result when using the vehicle can deviate from the indicated values.
Urban traffic
The consumption measurement in urban traffic begins with starting of the cold
engine. Afterwards the normal urban traffic is simulated.
Non-urban traffic
For the consumption measurement in non-urban traffic the vehicle, as in daily motoring, is accelerated and braked several times in all gears. The vehicle speed
changes within the range from 0 to 120 km/h.
Combined traffic
The consumption value in the combined traffic consists of 37% from the value for
the urban traffic and of 63% from the value for the non-urban traffic.

General Maintenance

Breakdown assistance

Technical data



224

Technical data

Dimensions
Dimensions (mm)
LAURA
Length

4569
4597a)

LAURA
GreenLine

LAURA RS

ESTATE CAR

COMBI
GreenLine

COMBI RS

COMBI 4x4

SCOUT

4569

4597

4569

4569

4599

4569

4584

Width

1769

1769

1769

1769

1769

1769

1769

1784

Width including exterior mirror

2018

2018

2018

2018

2018

2018

2018

2018

Height

1462
1485b)
1449c)
1484a)

1462
1449c)

1447

1468
1490b)
1455c)

1468
1455c)

1451

1495
1520b)

1533

Clearance

140
164b)
125c)

140
125c)

127

140
164b)
125c)

140
125c)

128

138
163b)

179

2578

2578

2578

2578

2578

2578

2578

2578

1541/1514
1531/1499a)

1535/1508

1528/1508

1541/1514

1535/1508

1528/1508

1541/1514

1531/1500

Wheel base
Track gauge front / rear
a)

The value corresponds to the status with LOOK RS package.

b)

The value corresponds to the status with rough road package.

c)

The value corresponds to the status with SPORT package.



Technical data

Engine oil specifications
The grade of engine oil should be selected in accordance with precise specifications.
The engine of your vehicle has been factory-filled with a high-grade oil which you
can use throughout the year - except in extreme climatic regions.
You can mix various oils together with each other when refilling with oil. This does
not, however, apply for models with flexible service intervals (QG1).
Engine oils are, of course, undergoing continuous further development. Thus the
information stated in this Owner's Manual is only correct at the time of publication.
Authorised ŠKODA Service Partners will be informed about the latest changes of
ŠKODA. This why you should always have engine oil changed by an authorised
ŠKODA Service Partner.
The specifications (VW standards) stated in the following must be indicated separately or together with other specifications on the bottle.
Engine oil specifications for models with flexible service intervals (QG1)
Petrol engines

Specification

Contenta)

1,2/77 kW - EU5

VW 504 00

3,6

1.4 ltr./59 kW - EU4

VW 503 00, VW 504 00

3,2

1.4 ltr./90 kW TSI - EU5

VW 503 00, VW 504 00

3,6

1.6 ltr./75 kW - EU4, EU2

VW 503 00, VW 504 00

4,5

1.6 ltr./75 kW MultiFuel - EU4, EU2

VW 503 00, VW 504 00

4,5

1.8 ltr./118 kW TSI - EU5, EU2 DDK
(1.8 ltr./112 kW TSI - EU5)

VW 504 00

4,6

2.0 ltr./147 kW TSI - EU5

VW 504 00

a)

4,6

Oil capacity with oil filter change. Inspect oil level when filling; do not fill up too much. The oil level
must be between the markings ⇒ page 183.

Specification

Contenta)

VW 507 00

4,3

1.9 ltr./77 kW TDI PD - EU4, EU3

VW 506 01, VW 507 00

3,8

1.9 ltr./77 kW TDI PD DPF - EU4

VW 507 00

4,3

2.0 ltr./81 kW TDI CR - EU4, EU5

VW 507 00

4,3

Diesel engines
1.6 ltr./77 kW TDI CR - EU5

Using the system

Safety

Specification

Contenta)

2.0 ltr./103 kW TDI CR DPF - EU4, EU5

VW 507 00

4,3

2.0 ltr./125 kW TDI CR - EU5

VW 507 00

4,3

Diesel engines

Driving Tips

a)

225

Oil capacity with oil filter change. Inspect oil level when filling; do not fill up too much. The oil level
must be between the markings ⇒ page 183.

Engine oil specifications for vehicles with fixed service intervals (QG2)
Petrol engines

Specification

Contenta)

1,2/77 kW - EU5

VW 502 00

3,6

1.4 ltr./59 kW - EU4

VW 501 01, VW 502 00

3,2

1.4 ltr./90 kW TSI - EU5

VW 501 01, VW 502 00

3,6

1.6 ltr./75 kW - EU4, EU2

VW 501 01, VW 502 00

4,5

1.6 ltr./75 kW MultiFuel - EU4, EU2

VW 502 00

4,5

1.8 ltr./118 kW TSI - EU5, EU2 DDK
(1.8 ltr./112 kW TSI - EU5)

VW 502 00

4,6

2.0 ltr./147 kW TSI - EU5

VW 502 00

4,6

a)

Oil capacity with oil filter change. Inspect oil level when filling; do not fill up too much. The oil level
must be between the markings ⇒ page 183.

If the oils specified above are not available, oils according to ACEA A2 or ACEA A3
can be used once for refilling.
Diesel engines

Specification

Contenta)

1.6 ltr./77 kW TDI CR - EU5

VW 507 00

4,3

1.9 ltr./77 kW TDI PD - EU4, EU3

VW 505 01

3,8

1.9 ltr./77 kW TDI PD DPF - EU4

VW 507 00

4,3

2.0 ltr./81 kW TDI CR - EU4, EU5

VW 507 00

4,3

2.0 ltr./103 kW TDI CR DPF - EU4, EU5

VW 507 00

4,3

2.0 ltr./125 kW TDI CR - EU5

VW 507 00

4,3

a)

Oil capacity with oil filter change. Inspect oil level when filling; do not fill up too much. The oil level
must be between the markings ⇒ page 183.

If the oils specified above are not available, oils according to ACEA B3 or ACEA B4
£
can be used once for refilling.

General Maintenance

Breakdown assistance

Technical data

226

Technical data
CAUTION

Only the above-mentioned oils may be used on vehicles with flexible service intervals (QG1). We recommend always refilling with oil of the same specification since
this will maintain the properties of the oil. In exceptional cases, you must top up
only once engine oil complying with Specification VW 502 00 (only for petrol engines) or Specification VW 505 01 (only for diesel engines) to maximum 0.5 litres.
You must not use other engine oils - risk of engine damage!

Notice
● Before a long drive we recommend that you purchase and carry with you engine oil which complies with the specification for your vehicle. Consequently, you
will always have the correct engine oil for refilling.


We recommend using oils from the ŠKODA Original Accessories.



For further information - see Service shedule.



Technical data

227

Engine 1.2 l/77 kW TSI - EU5
Output (kW per rpm)

Max. torque (Nm per rpm)

Number of cylinders/Displacement (cm3)

77/5000

175/1550-4100

4/1197

Performances

LAURA M6

LAURA DQ7

COMBI M6

COMBI DQ7

Maximum speed (km/h)

192

191

191

Acceleration 0 - 100 km/h (s)

10,8

10,9

10,9
7,0

Fuel consumption (in ltr./100 km) and CO2 (in g/km)
Urban

7,1

7,0

7,1

Non-urban

4,9

5,2

4,9

5,2

Combination

5,7

5,9

5,7

5,9

CO2 emission - combination

134

136

134

136

Permissible gross weight

1865

1890

1880

1905

Unloaden weight ready for work

1265

1290

1280

1305

630

640

Weight (in kg)

1200a)/1400b) (1200a)b))c)

Permissible trailer loads, trailer braked
Permissible trailer loads, trailer unbraked
a)

Uphills up to 12 %

b)

Uphills up to 8%

c)

Vehicles of the group N1.

Using the system

630

640



Safety

Driving Tips

General Maintenance

Breakdown assistance

Technical data

228

Technical data

Engine 1.4 l/59 kW - EU4, EU5
Output (kW per rpm)

Max. torque (Nm per rpm)

Number of cylinders/Displacement (cm3)

59/5000

132/3800

4/1390

Performances

LAURA EU4

LAURA EU5

COMBI EU4

Maximum speed (km/h)

173

174

172

COMBI EU5
173

Acceleration 0 - 100 km/h (s)

14,2

14,3

14,3

14,4

Urban

9,6

8,5

9,6

8,5

Non-urban

5,6

5,1

5,6

5,1

Combination

7,0

6,4

7,0

6,4

CO2 emission - combination

167

149

167

149

Permissible gross weight

1855

1750

1870

1755

Unloaden weight ready for work

1255

1255

1270

1270

900a)/1100b) (900a)b))c)

900a)/1100b)

Fuel consumption (in ltr./100 km) and CO2 (in g/km)

Weight (in kg)

Permissible trailer loads, trailer braked
Permissible trailer loads, trailer unbraked
a)

Uphills up to 12 %

b)

Uphills up to 8%

c)

Vehicles of the group N1.

900a)/1100b)
620



Technical data

229

Engine 1.4 l/90 kW TSI - EU5
Output (kW per rpm)

Max. torque (Nm per rpm)

Number of cylinders/Displacement (cm3)

90/5000

200/1500-4000

4/1390

Performances

LAURA M6

LAURA DQ7

COMBI M6

COMBI DQ7

Maximum speed (km/h)

203/205a)

202

202/204a)

201

9,7/9,8a)

9,7

9,8/9,9a)

9,8

Urban

8,5/7,2a)

8,0

8,5/7,2a)

8,0

Non-urban

5,0/4,9a)

5,3

5,0/4,9a)

5,3

Combination

6,3/5,8a)

6,3

6,3/5,8a)

6,3

CO2 emission - combination

148/134a)

147

148/134a)

147

Permissible gross weight

1910/1925a)

1930

1925/1940a)

1945

Unloaden weight ready for work

1310/1325a)

1330

1325/1340a)

1345

Acceleration 0 - 100 km/h (s)
Fuel consumption (in ltr./100 km) and CO2 (in g/km)

Weight (in kg)

1300b)/1500c) (1300b)c))d)

Permissible trailer loads, trailer braked
Permissible trailer loads, trailer unbraked
a)

The value corresponds to the status with SPORT package.

b)

Uphills up to 12 %

c)

Uphills up to 8%

d)

Vehicles of the group N1.

Using the system

650

660

650

660



Safety

Driving Tips

General Maintenance

Breakdown assistance

Technical data

230

Technical data

Engine 1.6 l/75 kW - EU2, EU4, EU5
Output (kW per rpm)

Max. torque (Nm per rpm)

Number of cylinders/Displacement (cm3)

75/5600

148/3800

4/1595

Performances

LAURA M5 EU4 LAURA M5 EU5

LAURA M5 MultiFuel

LAURA AG6

COMBI M5 EU4 COMBI M5 EU5

COMBI M5
MultiFuel

COMBI AG6

Maximum speed (km/h)

190

184

188

189

188

184

Acceleration 0 - 100 km/h (s)

12,3

14,1

12,4

12,4

12,4

14,2
11,2

Fuel consumption (in ltr./100 km) and CO2 (in g/km)
Urban

10,0

9,6

9,4/13,0a)

11,2

10,0

9,7

9,6/13,2a)

Non-urban

5,8

5,5

5,5/7,5a)

6,1

5,8

5,6

5,7/7,7a)

6,1

Combination

7,4

7,1

7,0/9,5a)

7,9

7,4

7,2

7,2/9,7a)

7,9

CO2 emission - combination

176

166

162/157a)

188

176

168

167/162a)

188

Weight (in kg)
Permissible gross weight

1880

1915

1895

1930

Unloaden weight ready for
work

1280

1315

1295

1330

630

650

Permissible trailer loads, trailer braked
Permissible trailer loads, trailer unbraked
a)

Biofuel Ethanol E85

b)

Uphills up to 12 %

c)

Uphills up to 8%

d)

Vehicles of the group N1.

1200b)/1400c) (1200b)c))d)
630

650



Technical data

231

Engine 1.8 l/112 kW TSI - EU5, EU2 DDK
Output (kW per rpm)

Max. torque (Nm per rpm)

Number of cylinders/Displacement (cm3)

112/4300-6200

250/1500-4200

4/1798

Performances

LAURA M6

LAURA AQ6

COMBI M6

COMBI AQ6

COMBI 4x4 M6

SCOUT M6

Maximum speed (km/h)

219

214

218

213

214

208

Acceleration 0 - 100 km/h (s)

8,1

8,8

8,2

8,9

8,4

8,7

Fuel consumption (in ltr./100 km) and CO2 (in g/km)
Urban

9,5

10,8

9,5

10,8

10,3

10,2

Non-urban

5,5

5,9

5,5

5,9

6,2

6,4

Combination

6,9

7,7

6,9

7,7

7,7

7,8

CO2 emission - combination

158

179

158

179

180

182

Permissible gross weight

1950

1980

1965

1995

2070

2130

Unloaden weight ready for work

1350

1380

1365

1395

1470

1530

Weight (in kg)

1400a)/1600b) (1400a)b))c)

Permissible trailer loads, trailer braked
Permissible trailer loads, trailer unbraked
a)

Uphills up to 12 %

b)

Uphills up to 8%

c)

Vehicles of the group N1.

Using the system

670

690

670

1500a)/1600b) (1500a)b))c)
690

730

750



Safety

Driving Tips

General Maintenance

Breakdown assistance

Technical data

232

Technical data

Engine 1.8 l/118 kW TSI - EU5, EU2 DDK
Output (kW per rpm)

Max. torque (Nm per rpm)

Number of cylinders/Displacement (cm3)

118/4500-6200

250/1500-4500

4/1798

Performances

LAURA M6

LAURA DQ7

COMBI M6

COMBI DQ7

COMBI 4x4 M6

SCOUT M6

Maximum speed (km/h)

223

222

218

211

Acceleration 0 - 100 km/h (s)

7,8

7,9

8,1

8,4

Fuel consumption (in ltr./100 km) and CO2 (in g/km)
Urban

9,5

9,1

9,5

9,1

10,3

10,2

Non-urban

5,5

5,4

5,5

5,4

6,2

6,4

Combination

6,9

6,6

6,9

6,6

7,7

7,8

CO2 emission - combination

158

155

158

155

180

182

Permissible gross weight

1950

1970

1965

1985

2070

2130

Unloaden weight ready for work

1350

1370

1365

1385

1470

1530

Weight (in kg)

1400a)/1600b) (1400a)b))c)

Permissible trailer loads, trailer braked
Permissible trailer loads, trailer unbraked
a)

Uphills up to 12 %

b)

Uphills up to 8%

c)

Vehicles of the group N1.

670

680

670

1500a)/1600b) (1500a)b))c)
680

730

750



Technical data

233

Engine 2.0 l/147 kW TSI - EU5, EU2 DDK
Output (kW per rpm)

Max. torque (Nm per rpm)

Number of cylinders/Displacement (cm3)

147/5100-6000

280/1700-5000

4/1984

Performances

LAURA RS M6

LAURA RS DQ6

COMBI RS M6

COMBI RS DQ6

Maximum speed (km/h)

242

240

239

237

Acceleration 0 - 100 km/h (s)

7,2

7,2

7,3

7,3

Urban

10,2

10,4

10,2

10,4

Non-urban

5,9

6,2

5,9

6,2

Combination

7,5

7,7

7,5

7,7

CO2 emission - combination

175

180

175

180

1915/1980a)

1935/2000a)

1930/1995a)

1950/2015a)

1435

1455

1450

1470

Fuel consumption (in ltr./100 km) and CO2 (in g/km)

Weight (in kg)
Permissible gross weight
Unloaden weight ready for work

1400b)/1600c) (1400b)c))a)

Permissible trailer loads, trailer braked
Permissible trailer loads, trailer unbraked
a)

Vehicles of the group N1.

b)

Uphills up to 12 %

c)

Uphills up to 8%

Using the system

650



Safety

Driving Tips

General Maintenance

Breakdown assistance

Technical data

234

Technical data

Engine 1.6 l/77 kW TDI CR - EU5
Output (kW per rpm)

Max. torque (Nm per rpm)

Number of cylinders/Displacement (cm3)

77/4400

250/1500-2500

4/1598

Performances
Maximum speed (km/h)
Acceleration 0 - 100 km/h (s)

LAURA M5
GreenLine

LAURAM5

LAURA DQ7

COMBI M5

COMBI M5
GreenLine

COMBI DQ7

COMBI 4x4 M6

191/192a)

192

191

190/191a)

191

190

186

11,3

11,4

11,4

11,4

11,6

11,5

12,2

Fuel consumption (in ltr./100 km) and CO2 (in g/km)
Urban

5,7/5,1a)

4,7

5,6

5,7/5,1a)

5,3

5,6

6,7

Non-urban

3,9/3,6a)

3,4

4,2

3,9/3,6a)

3,5

4,2

4,6

Combination

4,5/4,2a)

3,8

4,7

4,5/4,2a)

4,1

4,7

5,4

CO2 emission - combination

119/109a)

99

123

119/109a)

107

123

141

Permissible gross weight

1950/1960a)

1990

1975

1965/1975a)

2005

1990

2075

Unloaden weight ready for work

1350/1360a)

1390

1375

1365/1375a)

1405

1390

Weight (in kg)

1400b)/1600c)

Permissible trailer loads, trailer braked
Permissible trailer loads, trailer unbraked
a)

The value corresponds to the status with SPORT package.

b)

Uphills up to 12 %

c)

Uphills up to 8%

d)

Vehicles of the group N1.

670

680

1475
1600b)/1700c)
(1600b)c))d)

(1400b)c))d)
670

680

730



Technical data

235

Engine 1.9 l/77 kW TDI PD - EU4
Output (kW per rpm)

Max. torque (Nm per rpm)

Number of cylinders/Displacement (cm3)

77/4000

250/1900

4/1896

Performances

LAURAM5

LAURA DQ6

COMBI M5

COMBI DQ6

Maximum speed (km/h)

192

189

191

189

COMBI 4x4 M6
181

Acceleration 0 - 100 km/h (s)

11,8

12,2

11,9

12,3

12,9

Fuel consumption (in ltr./100 km) and CO2 (in g/km)
Urban

6,3

7,7

6,3

7,7

7,7

Non-urban

4,2

5,0

4,2

5,0

4,9

Combination

4,9

5,9

4,9

5,9

6,0

CO2 emission - combination

130

155

130

155

159

1955/1945a)

1980/1970a)

1970

1995

2080

1355

1380

1370

1395

Weight (in kg)
Permissible gross weight
Unloaden weight ready for work

1400b)/1600c)

Permissible trailer loads, trailer braked
Permissible trailer loads, trailer unbraked
a)

670

680

670

1480
1600b)/1700c)
(1600b)c))a)

(1400b)c))a)
680

740

Vehicles of the group N1.

b)

Uphills up to 12 %

c)

Uphills up to 8%

Using the system



Safety

Driving Tips

General Maintenance

Breakdown assistance

Technical data

236

Technical data

Engine 2.0 l/81 kW TDI CR - EU4, EU5
Output (kW per rpm)
M5
M6 4x4
Performances

Number of cylinders/Displacement (cm3)

Max. torque (Nm per rpm)
250/1500-2500

81/4200

4/1968

280/1750-2750

LAURA M5
EU4

LAURA M6
EU5

COMBI M5
EU4

COMBI M6
EU5

COMBI 4x4 M6
EU5

Maximum speed (km/h)

195

194

189

Acceleration 0 - 100 km/h (s)

11,0

11,1

11,6

Fuel consumption (in ltr./100 km) and CO2 (in g/km)
Urban

6,5

6,1

6,5

6,2

7,2

Non-urban

4,3

4,0

4,3

4,1

4,7

Combination

5,0

4,8

5,0

4,9

5,6

CO2 emission - combination

132

126

132

129

148

1971/1951a)

1995

1986

2010

2095

1371

1395

1386

1410

Weight (in kg)
Permissible gross weight
Unloaden weight ready for work

1500b)/1700c)

Permissible trailer loads, trailer braked
Permissible trailer loads, trailer unbraked
a)

Vehicles of the group N1.

b)

Uphills up to 12%

c)

Uphills up to 8%

680

690

680

1495
1600b)/1700c)
(1600b)c))a)

(1500b)c))a)
690

740



Technical data

237

Engine 2.0 l/103 kW TDI CR - EU4, EU5
Output (kW per rpm)

Max. torque (Nm per rpm)

Number of cylinders/Displacement (cm3)

103/4000 - EU4
103/4200 - EU5

320/1750 - 2500

4/1968

LAURA M6

LAURA DQ6

COMBI M6

COMBI DQ6

COMBI 4x4 M6

COMBI 4x4
DQ6

Maximum speed (km/h)

211

209

210

208

204

203

199

197

Acceleration 0 - 100 km/h (s)

9,5

9,6

9,6

9,7

9,8

9,9

10,1

10,2
7,4

Performances

SCOUT M6

SCOUT DQ6

Fuel consumption (in ltr./100 km) and CO2 (in g/km)
Urban

6,1

6,7

6,2

7,0

7,2

7,3

7,4

Non-urban

4,0

4,5

4,1

4,6

4,7

5,2

5,1

5,5

Combination

4,8

5,3

4,9

5,4

5,6

5,9

5,9

6,2

CO2 emission - combination

126

138

129

143

148

156

155

162

Permissible gross weight

1995

2015/2005a)

2010

2030

2095

2115

2155

2175

Unloaden weight ready for
work

1395

1415

1410

1430

1495

1515

1555

1575

Weight (in kg)

Permissible trailer loads, trailer braked
Permissible trailer loads, trailer unbraked
a)

Vehicles of the group N1.

b)

Uphills up to 12 %

c)

Uphills up to 8%

Using the system

1500b)/1700c) (1500b)c))a)
690

700

690

1600b)/1700c) (1600b)c))a)
700

740

750



Safety

Driving Tips

General Maintenance

Breakdown assistance

Technical data

238

Technical data

Engine 2.0 l/125 kW TDI CR - EU5
Output (kW per rpm)

Max. torque (Nm per rpm)

Number of cylinders/Displacement (cm3)

125/4200

350/1750 - 2500

4/1968

Performances

LAURA RS M6

LAURA RS DQ6

COMBI RS M6

COMBI RS DQ6

Maximum speed (km/h)

226

224

225

223

Acceleration 0 - 100 km/h (s)

8,3

8,3

8,4

8,4

Fuel consumption (in ltr./100 km) and CO2 (in g/km)
Urban

7,5

7,9

7,5

7,9

Non-urban

4,6

4,9

4,6

4,9

Combination

5,7

6,0

5,7

6,0

CO2 emission - combination

149

159

149

159

1950/2015a)

1970/2035a)

1965/2030a)

1985/2050a)

1470

1490

1485

1505

Weight (in kg)
Permissible gross weight
Unloaden weight ready for work
Permissible trailer loads, trailer braked
Permissible trailer loads, trailer unbraked
a)

Vehicles of the group N1.

b)

Uphills up to 12 %

c)

Uphills up to 8%

1400b)/1600c) (1400b)c))a)
650



Technical data

Multi-purpose vehicles (AF)
Weight (in kg)
Engine
1.2 ltr./77 kW TSI

Permissible gross weight
M6

DQ7

1820

1845
M5

1.4 ltr./59 kW
1.4 ltr./90 kW TSI
1.6 ltr./75 kW

1755
M6

DQ7

M6

1865

1885

1880a)

M5

AG6

1835

1870
M5

1.6 ltr./75 kW LPG
1.8 ltr./118 (112) kW TSI
1.6 ltr./77 kW TDI CR
1.9 l/77 kW TDI PD
2.0 ltr./81 kW TDI CR
2.0 ltr./103 kW TDI CR
a)

1885
M6

DQ7

1905

1925

4x4 M6
2010

M5

DQ7

4x4 M6

1905

1930

2015

M5

DQ6

4x4 M6

1910

1935

2020

M5

M6

4x4 M6

1926

1950

M6

DQ6

4x4 M6

DQ6 4x4

1950

1970

2035

2055

2035



The value corresponds to the status with SPORT package.

Using the system

Safety

Driving Tips

General Maintenance

Breakdown assistance

Technical data

239

240

Index

Index
A
Abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
ABS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Active driver-steering recommendation . . . . . . . . 157
Adjusting seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61, 133
electrically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Adjusting the steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Front airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Head airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Side airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Air conditioning system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Air outlet vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Recirculated air mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Alternator
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Anti-theft alarm system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Antilock brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Antilock brake system (ABS)
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Assigning the remote control key to the memory
buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Auto Check Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Auto Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Automatic driving lamp control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Emergency programme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Kickdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

Selector lever-emergency unlocking . . . . . . . . . .
Tiptronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic vehicle wash systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic wiper/washer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Avoiding damage to your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

114
113
63
171
54
167

B
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29, 188
change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Charge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Operation in winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Before setting off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Belt
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Boot lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Brake
Handbrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Brake Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Brake booster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Bulbs
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Button for the central locking system . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Button in the driver's door
Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

C
Car jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200, 204
Car state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Central locking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
unlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Changing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Changing wheels around . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Charging the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Check engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Children and safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Side airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Child safety lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Child safety seat
on the front passenger seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Safety information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Child seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Classification into groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
ISOFIX system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Chrome parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Cigarette lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Climatronic
Defrosting windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Recirculated air mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Climatronic (automatic air conditioning) . . . . . . . . . 92
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Clothes hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Cockpit
General view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

Index
Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Convenience operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Converting/masking over headlights . . . . . . . . . . 167
Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
replenishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Coolant level
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Coolant quantity
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Coolant temperature/coolant level
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Coolant temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Cornering lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Correct seated position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Counter for distance driven . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Cruise control
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Cruise control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Cup holder
front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

D
Dash panel insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Daylight driving lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
De-icing the windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Deactivating
an airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Deactivating an airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Defrosting rear window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Diesel engines
Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Diesel particle filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Digital clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Direction indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Using the system

Safety

Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Distance driven . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Door
Child safety lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Driving economically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

E
EDL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Electrically adjustable exterior mirror . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Electric sliding/tilting roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Electronic Differential Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Electronic immobiliser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Electronic stability programme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Electronic stability programme (ESP)
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Emergency wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Engine
starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Engine compartment
Safety information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Engine electronics
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
replenishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Engine oil level
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Engine revolutions counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Environmental compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163, 166
ESP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Exhaust gas
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

Driving Tips

General Maintenance

241

Exhaust gas inspection
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Explanations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Exterior mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Exterior mirror heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

F
First-aid box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Fixing net
Estate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Laura . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Fog lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Fog lights with the function CORNER . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Foldable luggage compartment cover . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Front airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Front armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Diesel fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Fuel consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Saving energy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Fuel reserve
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Full wheel trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

G
Gearbox
mechanical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
General view
Cockpit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Glass roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Glow plug system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Breakdown assistance

Technical data

242

Index

GSM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117, 123

J

M

H

Jacking points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Jump-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207, 208

Main beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45, 51
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Manual shifting of gears . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Memory for the on-board computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Mobile phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116, 117, 123
Connection to the hands-free system . . . . . . . . 124
Connection with the hands-free system . . . . . . 118
Voice control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Motoring abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Multi-functional indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Multifunction steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Multimedia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
AUX-IN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
CD changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
MDI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

Handbrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Hazard warning light system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Head airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Headlight cleaning system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Headlight flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Headlights
Fog lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Headlight cleaning system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Head restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Heated windscreen washer nozzles . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Auxiliary heating (auxiliary heating) . . . . . . . . . . 95
Defrosting windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Recirculated air mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Height adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

I
Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Ignition lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Immobiliser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Information display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Instrument cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Instrument lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Interior light
Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Interior lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Interior mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Interior monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Intermittent wiping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Internet connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
ISOFIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
ISOFIX system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

L
Lashing eyes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Leather care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Light
automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Changing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Lights
converting/masking over . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Range adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
switching on and off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Lights and Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Liquid in reservoir for windscreen washer system
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Lock
Central locking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Locking and unlocking from inside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Low beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Lugagge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36, 67
Fixing of the floor covering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Folding double hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Folding hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Lashing eyes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Luggage compartment - variable loading floor . . . 72
Luggage compartment cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Luggage rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

N
Net partition (Estate) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Note holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

O
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Oil change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Oil dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Onboard computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Open door
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Opening a single door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Opening for skis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Operation in winter
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Biodiesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
De-icing windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

Index
Outside temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Overview of the engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . 183

P
Paint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Paint damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Parking aid
Front and rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Parking light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Parking the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Passive Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Payload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Petrol engines
Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Polishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Power socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Button in the driver's door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Button in the front passenger door and in the
rear doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Operational faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
with central locking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

R
Radiator fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Rear-view mirror
Exterior mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Interior mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Rear armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67, 82
Rear fog light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Rear seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Using the system

Safety

Rear window
heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Rear window heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Recharge battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Recommendation for changing gears . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Synchronisation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Removing the seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Replacement of parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Replacing fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Replacing the wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Roof aerial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Running in the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

S
Safe securing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Safety information
Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Safety wheel bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Saving electrical energy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Seat belt height adjuster
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
fastening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Safety information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
taking off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Seat belt warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Seat heaters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Selector lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Selector lever-emergency unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Selector lever lock
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Selector lever positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Service reminder indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Driving Tips

General Maintenance

243

Setting temperature
Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Setting the clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Side airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Side lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Stability system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
START-STOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
after fuel tank has run empty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Diesel engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Petrol engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
START STOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Steering
active driver-steering recommendation . . . . . . . 157
Steering force assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Storage compartment
Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Storage compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Storage facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Sun . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Sun screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Switching off the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Switch off Anti-spin regulation (ASR)
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

T
Tailgate
Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Taking care of your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
TCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117, 123
Temperature
outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
The first 1 500 kilometres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Breakdown assistance

Technical data

244

Index

The roof luggage rack system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Through-loading bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Tilting roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Tiptronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Top Tether . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Traction control system (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
General Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Transporting children safely . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Tread depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Turn signal lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Two-way radio systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Tyre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Tyre inflation pressure
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Tyre repair kit
Tyre repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Tyres
Winter tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

U
Underbody protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
unlock
Central locking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Uphill Start Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

V
Vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Vehicle key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Vehicle tool kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

Ventilation
Auxiliary ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

W
Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Warning symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Warning triangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Washing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
with a high-pressure cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Washing the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Washing vehicle by hand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Wax treatment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Wheel
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Wheel bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Wheel trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193, 202
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
de-icing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Windscreen washer nozzles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Windshield washer fluid reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Windshield washer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Windshield wiper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Winter tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Wiper blades
Replacing the wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

X
XDL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Xenon headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

Index

Using the system

Safety

Driving Tips

General Maintenance

Breakdown assistance

Technical data

245

246

Index

Index

Using the system

Safety

Driving Tips

General Maintenance

Breakdown assistance

Technical data

247

ŠKODA pursues a policy of constant product and model development. We trust
that you will understand that changes to models in terms of shape, equipment
and engineering, may be introduced at any time. The information about scope of
delivery, appearance, performances, dimensions, weight, fuel consumption, standards and functions of the vehicle is only correct at the time of publication. Certain
items of equipment might only be installed later on (information given by your local authorised ŠKODA Service Partner) and only envisaged for particular markets.
It is therefore not possible for legal claims to be made based on the data, illustrations and descriptions contained in this Owner's Manual.

Reprinting, reproduction or translation, either in whole or in part, is not permitted
without the written consent of ŠKODA.
ŠKODA expressly reserves all rights relating to copyright laws.
We reserve the right to make changes to this document.
Issued by: ŠKODA AUTO a.s.
© ŠKODA AUTO a.s 2011

Sponsor Documents

Or use your account on DocShare.tips

Hide

Forgot your password?

Or register your new account on DocShare.tips

Hide

Lost your password? Please enter your email address. You will receive a link to create a new password.

Back to log-in

Close